P3u en M h006 Ansi Web

Easergy P3
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

User Manual
P3U/en M/H006
02/2021
www.schneider-electric.com
Table of Contents Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
Table of Contents
1 About this manual........................................................................ 13
1.1 Purpose...........................................................................................................13
1.2 Related documents......................................................................................... 13
1.3 Abbreviations and terms................................................................................. 14
2 Product introduction..................................................................... 20
2.1 Warranty..........................................................................................................20
2.2 Product overview............................................................................................ 20
2.3 Product selection guide...................................................................................21
2.4 Access to device configuration....................................................................... 29
2.4.1 User accounts.......................................................................................29
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel.............................................................. 30
2.4.3 Password management........................................................................ 31
2.4.4 Password restoring............................................................................... 31
2.5 Front panel......................................................................................................32
2.5.1 Push-buttons.........................................................................................32
2.5.2 LED indicators...................................................................................... 33
2.5.3 Controlling the alarm screen.................................................................34
2.5.4 Accessing operating levels................................................................... 34
2.5.5 Adjusting the LCD contrast................................................................... 34
2.5.6 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen........................................................34
2.5.7 Controlling an object with selective control...........................................35
2.5.8 Controlling an object with direct control................................................ 35
2.5.9 Menus................................................................................................... 35
2.5.9.1 Moving in the menus .............................................................. 37
2.5.9.2 Local panel messages.............................................................38
2.6 Easergy Pro setting and configuration tool..................................................... 38
3 Measurement functions................................................................40
3.1 Primary, secondary and per unit scaling......................................................... 43
3.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode................................................................. 45
3.1.2 Current transformer ratio...................................................................... 46
3.1.3 Voltage transformer ratio...................................................................... 48
3.2 Measurements for protection functions...........................................................50
3.3 RMS values.....................................................................................................51
3.4 Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD)..............................................51
3.5 Demand values............................................................................................... 52
3.6 Minimum and maximum values...................................................................... 53
3.7 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months...................................... 55
3.8 Memory management of measurements........................................................ 57
3.9 Power and current direction............................................................................ 59
3.10 Symmetrical components..............................................................................60
P3U/en M/H006 3
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 Table of Contents
4 Control functions.......................................................................... 61
4.1 Digital outputs................................................................................................. 61
4.2 Digital inputs................................................................................................... 63
4.3 Virtual inputs and outputs................................................................................66
4.4 Matrix.............................................................................................................. 72
4.4.1 Output matrix........................................................................................ 72
4.4.2 Blocking matrix..................................................................................... 73
4.4.3 Object block matrix............................................................................... 74
4.4.4 Auto-recloser matrix..............................................................................74
4.5 Releasing latches............................................................................................75
4.5.1 Releasing latches using Easergy Pro................................................... 75
4.5.2 Releasing latches using buttons and local panel display......................75
4.5.3 Releasing latches using F1 or F2 buttons............................................ 76
4.6 Controllable objects........................................................................................ 76
4.6.1 Object control with digital inputs........................................................... 78
4.6.2 Local or remote selection......................................................................78
4.6.3 Object control with Close and Trip buttons........................................... 79
4.6.4 Object control with F1 and F2...............................................................79
4.7 Logic functions................................................................................................ 81
4.8 Local panel......................................................................................................88
4.8.1 Mimic view............................................................................................ 88
4.8.2 Local panel configuration......................................................................91
5 Protection functions......................................................................97
5.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent elements...........................97
5.1.1 CT requirements when settings are unknown...................................... 98
5.1.2 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class P..................... 98
5.1.3 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class P.....................99
5.1.4 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class PX................. 100
5.1.5 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX................ 100
5.2 Maximum number of protection stages in one application............................100
5.3 General features of protection stages...........................................................100
5.4 Application modes.........................................................................................108
5.5 Current protection function dependencies.................................................... 108
5.6 Dependent operate time............................................................................... 108
5.6.1 Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves.. 111
5.6.2 Custom curves....................................................................................132
5.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves...............................................133
5.7 Synchronism check (ANSI 25)...................................................................... 135
5.8 Undervoltage (ANSI 27)................................................................................139
5.9 Directional power (ANSI 32) ........................................................................ 142
5.10 Phase undercurrent (ANSI 37)....................................................................144
5.11 Broken conductor (ANSI 46BC) ................................................................. 145
5.12 Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46) ................................................ 147
5.13 Incorrect phase sequence (ANSI 47) .........................................................150
5.14 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47)................................ 151
5.15 Motor start-up supervision (ANSI 48) .........................................................153
4 P3U/en M/H006
5.16 Thermal overload (ANSI 49 RMS).............................................................. 158

5.17 Breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)....................................................................... 162
5.18 Breaker failure 1 and 2 (ANSI 50BF).......................................................... 164
5.19 Switch-on-to-fault (ANSI 50HS) ................................................................. 170
5.20 Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51).................................................................172
5.21 Ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N) ................................................. 176
5.21.1 Ground fault phase detection............................................................180
5.22 Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C) ......................................................181
5.22.1 Taking unbalance protection into use............................................... 184
5.23 Locked rotor (ANSI 51LR)...........................................................................188
5.24 Voltage-dependent overcurrent (ANSI 51V) .............................................. 191
5.25 Overvoltage (ANSI 59)................................................................................194
5.26 Capacitor overvoltage (ANSI 59C) .............................................................197
5.27 Neutral overvoltage (ANSI 59N)................................................................. 202
5.28 Restricted high-impedance ground fault (ANSI 64REF, 64BEF).................205
5.29 Motor restart inhibition (ANSI 66) ...............................................................206
5.30 Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67) ................................................... 208
5.31 Directional ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)........................................ 213
5.31.1 Ground fault phase detection............................................................218
5.32 Transient intermittent ground fault (ANSI 67NI).......................................... 220
5.33 Second harmonic inrush detection (ANSI 68F2).........................................226
5.34 Fifth harmonic detection (ANSI 68H5)........................................................ 228
5.35 Auto-recloser function (ANSI 79) ............................................................... 229
5.36 Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81) ..........................................234
5.37 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R)................................................... 237
5.38 Lockout (ANSI 86).......................................................................................241
5.39 Programmable stages (ANSI 99)................................................................ 243
6 Supporting functions.................................................................. 246

6.1 Event log....................................................................................................... 246
6.2 Disturbance recording...................................................................................248
6.2.1 Configuring the disturbance recorder................................................. 253
6.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush.........................................................254
6.4 System clock and synchronization................................................................255
6.5 Voltage sags and swells................................................................................262
6.6 Voltage interruptions..................................................................................... 265
6.7 Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)...................................................268
6.8 Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60FL).............................................. 270
6.9 Circuit breaker wear......................................................................................272
6.10 Circuit breaker condition monitoring........................................................... 277
6.11 Energy pulse outputs...................................................................................280
6.12 Running hour counter................................................................................. 283
6.13 Timers......................................................................................................... 285
6.14 Combined overcurrent status......................................................................287
6.15 Main short-circuit fault locator..................................................................... 290
6.16 Feeder fault locator (ANSI 21FL)................................................................ 297
P3U/en M/H006 5
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 Table of Contents
6.17 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74) ...............................................................302

6.17.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input.....................................302
6.17.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs................................... 308
7 Communication and protocols....................................................312

7.1 Cybersecurity................................................................................................ 312
7.2 Communication ports.................................................................................... 312
7.2.1 Remote and extension ports...............................................................313
7.2.2 Ethernet port....................................................................................... 313
7.2.3 Disabling the Ethernet communication............................................... 314
7.3 Storm protection............................................................................................316
7.4 Communication protocols............................................................................. 316
7.4.1 Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP..........................................................316
7.4.2 Profibus DP.........................................................................................317
7.4.3 SPA-bus.............................................................................................. 318
7.4.4 IEC 60870-5-103 (IEC-103)................................................................318
7.4.5 DNP 3.0.............................................................................................. 319
7.4.6 IEC 60870-5-101 (IEC-101)................................................................319
7.4.7 IEC 61850...........................................................................................319
7.4.8 Ethernet/IP..........................................................................................320
7.5 IP filter...........................................................................................................320
7.5.1 Configuring the IP filter....................................................................... 321
7.5.2 Unexpected packets........................................................................... 323
7.5.3 Alarms.................................................................................................324
8 Applications and configuration examples...................................325

8.1 Substation feeder protection......................................................................... 325
8.2 Industrial feeder / motor protection............................................................... 327
8.3 Using CSH120 and CSH200 with core balance CTs.................................... 327
9 Installation.................................................................................. 330
9.1 Safety in installation...................................................................................... 330
9.2 Checking the consignment............................................................................332
9.3 Product identification.....................................................................................332
9.4 Storage......................................................................................................... 333
9.5 Mounting....................................................................................................... 333
9.6 Connections.................................................................................................. 336
9.6.1 Rear panel.......................................................................................... 337
9.6.2 Auxiliary voltage..................................................................................350
9.6.3 Local port............................................................................................ 351
9.6.4 Connection data..................................................................................352
9.6.5 External option modules..................................................................... 358
9.6.5.1 VSE-001 fiber-optic interface module....................................358
9.6.5.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module....................................... 359
9.6.5.3 VPA-3CG Profibus interface module..................................... 361
9.6.5.4 VIO 12A RTD and analog input / output modules................. 362
9.6.6 Block diagrams................................................................................... 362
9.6.7 Connection examples......................................................................... 371
6 P3U/en M/H006
9.7 Voltage system configuration........................................................................ 381

9.8 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs..................................................... 388
10 Test and environmental conditions...........................................392

10.1 Disturbance tests........................................................................................ 392
10.2 Electrical safety tests.................................................................................. 393
10.3 Mechanical tests......................................................................................... 394
10.4 Environmental tests.................................................................................... 394
10.5 Environmental conditions............................................................................395
10.6 Casing.........................................................................................................396
11 Maintenance............................................................................. 397
11.1 Preventive maintenance..............................................................................397
11.2 Periodic testing............................................................................................398
11.3 Hardware cleaning...................................................................................... 398
11.4 System status messages............................................................................ 398
11.5 Spare parts..................................................................................................398
11.6 Self-supervision...........................................................................................398
11.6.1 Diagnostics........................................................................................399
12 Order codes and accessories.................................................. 401

12.1 Order codes................................................................................................ 401
12.2 Accessories.................................................................................................403
13 Firmware revision.....................................................................405
P3U/en M/H006 7
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 Legal information
Legal information
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric
Industries SAS referred to in this guide are the sole property of Schneider Electric
SA and its subsidiaries. They may not be used for any purpose without the
owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its content are protected,
within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la propriété
intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as "the Code"), under the laws of
copyright covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You
agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use as
defined in the Code, all or part of this guide on any medium whatsoever without
Schneider Electric's permission, given in writing. You also agree not to establish
any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant
any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the guide or its
content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your
own risk. All other rights are reserved.
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only

by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for
confirmation of the information given in this publication.
8 P3U/en M/H006
Safety information Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
Safety information
Important information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it.
The following special messages may appear throughout this publication or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to

alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that
follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger”

or “Warning” safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists which will result in
personal injury if the instructions are not
followed.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Please note
Electrical equipment must only be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

by qualified personnel. A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge
related to the construction, installation, and operation of electrical equipment and
has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

out of the use of this material.
P3U/en M/H006 9
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 Safety information
Protective grounding
The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and
national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.
10 P3U/en M/H006
North America regulatory compliance Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
North America regulatory compliance
Certificate number: 20190829-E215590
Issue date: 2019-August-29
UL certifies that the Easergy P3 products comply with the following standards:
• UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

• CSA C22.2 No. 14-13 Industrial Control Equipment
• IEEE C37.90-2005 Guide for Power System Protection Testing
• IEEE C37.90.1-2012 Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests
for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electrical Power Apparatus
• IEEE C37.90.2-2004 Standard for Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Trancievers
P3U/en M/H006 11
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 EU directive compliance
EU directive compliance
EMC compliance
2014/30/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive. Product Specific

Standard was used to establish conformity:
• EN 60255-26 2013
Product safety
2014/35/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive. Product

Specific Safety Standard was used to establish conformity:
• EN 60255-27 2014
12 P3U/en M/H006
1 About this manual Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
1 About this manual
1.1 Purpose
This document contains instructions on the installation, commissioning and
operation of Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30.
This document is intended for persons who are experts on electrical power
engineering, and it covers the relay models as described by the order code.
Related topics
12.1 Order codes
1.2 Related documents

Table 1 - Related documents
Document Identification1)
Easergy P3 Universal Relay P3U Quick P3U/EN QS/xxxx

Start
Easergy Pro Setting and Configuration Tool P3eSetup/EN M/xxxx

User Manual
RTD and mA Output/Input Modules User P3VIO12A/EN M/A001

Manual
Profibus Interface Module User Manual P3VPA3CG/EN M/A001
IEC 61850 configuration instructions P3APS17001EN
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) P3APS17002EN
EtherNet/IP configuration instructions P3APS17003EN
Parallel Redundancy Protocol for Easergy P3APS17004EN

P3 relays with dual-port 100 Mbps Ethernet
interface
Communication parameter protocol P3TDS17005EN

mappings
Easergy P3 protection functions' P3TDS17006EN

parameters and recorded values
IEC103 Interoperability List P3TDS17009EN
DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document P3TDS17010EN
P3 Standard Series facia label instruction P3TDS17011EN
P3U/en M/H006 13
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 1 About this manual
Document Identification1)
Principles of numerical protection P3INS17019EN

techniques
Restricted earth fault protection using an I0 P3APS17016EN

input of an Easergy P3 relay
1) xxxx = revision number
1.3 Abbreviations and terms

Table 2 - Abbreviations and terms used in this manual
AFD Arc flash detection
ANSI American National Standards Institute
A standardization organization
bps Bits per second
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection
CLPU Cold load pickup
CM Common mode
Controlling output Heavy duty output rated for the circuit

breaker controlling
CPU Central processing unit
cosφ Active power divided by apparent power =

P/S
(See power factor PF.)
Negative sign indicates reverse power.
CT Current transformer
CT primary CTPRI. Nominal primary value of the IL

(high-voltage) current transformer
CT’ primary CT’PRI. Nominal primary value of the I’L

(low-voltage) current transformer
CT secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the IL

(high-voltage) current transformer
CT’ secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the I’L

(low-voltage) current transformer
Dead band See hysteresis.
14 P3U/en M/H006
DI Digital input
Digital output Relay's output contact
DM Differential mode
DMS Distribution management system
DO Digital output
Document file Stores information about the relay settings,

events and fault logs
DSR Data set ready
An RS232 signal. Input in front panel port of

Easergy P3 devices to disable rear panel
local port.
DST Daylight saving time
Adjusting the official local time forward by

one hour for summer time.
DT Definite time
DTR Data terminal ready
An RS232 signal. Output and always true

(+8 Vdc) in front panel port of Easergy P3
relays.
Easergy P3 Standard P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 relays
Easergy P3 Advanced P3F30, P3L30, P3M30/32, P3G30/32 and

P3T32 relays
eSetup Easergy Pro Setting and configuration tool for Easergy

P3 protection relays, later called Easergy
Pro
Event A single occurrence in a power system

process. In the HMI, event is abbreviated
as “E” followed by an identification number.
For example, E15 refers to Event 15.
F2BIO 2 x optical BIO interfaces, fibre
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
A specific definition of a type of generic

substation event, for peer-peer
communication.
Hysteresis I.e. dead band
Used to avoid oscillation when comparing

two nearby values.
P3U/en M/H006 15
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IMODE Nominal current of the selected mode
In feeder mode, IMODE= VTPRIMARY. In

motor mode, IMODE= IMOT.
IMOT Nominal current of the protected motor
INOM Nominal current
Rating of CT primary or secondary
ISET Start setting value I> (50/51)
IN(nom) Nominal current of IN input in general
I0 SET Start setting value I0>
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
An international standardization
organisation
IEC-101 Communication protocol defined in

standard IEC 60870-5-101
IEC-103 Communication protocol defined in

standard IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group time

code B
Standard for time transfer
IT Instrument transformer (current or voltage

transformer): electrical device used to
isolate or transform voltage or current
levels
LAN Local area network
Ethernet-based network for computers and

devices
Latching Digital outputs and indication LEDs can be

latched, which means that they are not
released when the control signal is
releasing. Releasing of latched devices is
done with a separate action.
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
NTP Network Time Protocol for LAN and WWW
16 P3U/en M/H006
Operation delay A setting in Easergy Pro that specifies the

total operate time from the fault occurrence
until the output contacts are operated.
The delay contains:

• start delay
• user-configurable operation delay
• output contact delay
OVF Indication of the event overflow
P Active power
Unit = [W]
PF Power factor
The absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the

sign is 'IND' for inductive i.e. lagging current
and 'CAP' for capacitive i.e. leading current.
PLC Programmable logic controller
PM Nominal power of the prime mover
(Used by reverse/under power protection.)
POC signals Binary signals that are transferred in the

communication channel of two P3L30 line
differential relays in both directions. POC
signals are used to transfer statuses of the
DI, VI, VO and logic outputs.
pu Per unit
PU Depending of the context, the per unit

refers to any nominal value.
For example, for overcurrent setting 1 pu =

1 x I N .For example, for overcurrent setting
1 pu = 1 x I MOT .
P3U P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 protection relay
Q Reactive power
Unit = [var]
RELxxxxx Short order code
RH Relative humidity
RMS Root mean square
RS232 or RS485 (EIA-232 or EIA-485) Standard defining the electrical

characteristics of a serial communication
interface
RTU Remote terminal unit
P3U/en M/H006 17
S Apparent power
Unit = [VA]
SCADA Supervisory control and data acquisition
SF Alarm duty watchdog output is energized

when the auxiliary power supply is on and
the product status is operative. This output
is referenced as "service status output" in
the setting tool.
Signaling output Alarm duty output rated, not suitable for

direct circuit breaker controlling
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol for LAN and

WWW
SOTF Switch on to fault
Squelch limit Noise filter used to force the measured low

signal level to zero
SPST Single pole single throw
SPDT Single pole double throw
TCS Trip circuit supervision
THD Total harmonic distortion
V Voltage V
VNSEC Voltage at input Vc at zero ohm ground

fault. (Used in voltage measurement mode
“2LL+VN”)
VA Voltage input for VAB or VA depending on

the voltage measurement mode
VB Voltage input for VBC or VB depending on

VC Voltage input for VCA or VN depending on

VN Neutral voltage
Rating of VT primary or secondary
VNOM Nominal voltage
Rating of VT primary or secondary
UMI User-machine interface
USB Universal serial bus
18 P3U/en M/H006
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
Used to be called GMT = Greenwich Mean

Time
VI Virtual input
VO Virtual output
VT Voltage transformer
VTPRI Nominal primary value of voltage

transformer
VTSEC Nominal secondary value of voltage

transformer
P3U/en M/H006 19
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 2 Product introduction
2 Product introduction
2.1 Warranty
This product has a standard warranty of 10 years.
2.2 Product overview

The relay communicates with other systems using common protocols, such as the
Modbus RTU, ModbusTCP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 61850, SPA
bus, and DNP 3.0.
User interface
The relay can be controlled in three ways:
• Locally with the push-buttons on the relay front panel

• Locally using a PC connected to the USB port on the front
• Via remote control over the optional remote control port on the relay rear
panel.
Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 include all the essential protection functions
needed to protect feeders and motors in distribution networks of utilities, industry
and power plants for all level of voltage below 132 kV. Further, the relay includes
several programmable functions, such as trip circuit supervision and circuit
breaker protection and communication protocols for various protection and
communication situations.
Protection functions
• Universal, adaptive protection functions for user-configurable applications like

feeder, motor and voltage protection from basic non-directional to directional
overcurrent protection, thermal overload, and auto-recloser
• Neutral overvoltage, overvoltage and frequency protection including
synchronism check for two breakers
• Single-line diagram, measurements and alarms in the user-machine interface
(UMI)
• User-configurable interlocking for primary object control
• Optional arc flash detection utilizing point sensors and a fiber loop that can
provide system wide arc flash detection.
Virtual injection
• Current and voltage injection by manipulating the database of the product by

setting tool disturbance recorder file playback through the product's database
Robust hardware
• User-selectable Ethernet, RS485 or RS232 -based communication interfaces

• Designed for demanding industrial conditions with conformal-coated printed
circuit boards
• Standard USB connection (type B) for Easergy P3 setting software
20 P3U/en M/H006
2 Product introduction Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
Common technology for cost efficiency
• Powerful CPU supporting IEC 61850

• Thanks to four setting groups, adaptation to various protection schemes is
convenient
User-machine interface (UMI)
• Clear LCD display for alarms and events

• Single-line diagram mimic with control, indication and live measurements
• Programmable function keys and LEDs
• Circuit breaker ON/OFF control
• Common firmware platform with other Easergy P3 range protection relays
NOTE: If the device has been powered off for more than about one week, the
UMI language after starting is IEC but after about two minutes, it is
automatically updated to ANSI.
2.3 Product selection guide

The selection guide provides information on the Easergy P3 platform to aid in the
relay selection. It suggests Easergy P3 types suitable for your protection
requirements, based on your application characteristics. The most typical
applications are presented along with the associated Easergy P3 type.
Table 3 - Applications
Easergy P3 Standard Easergy P3 Advanced
4 3
1
Voltage – – –
Feeder P3F30
w.
directional
–
P3L30
w. line diff. &
P3U30 distance
with
Transformer directional P3T32
o/c – with
P3U10 P3U20
with voltage differential
protection
Motor P3M32
P3M30 with
differential
Generator P3G32
P3G30 with
differential
P3U/en M/H006 21
Measuring Phase current 1/5A CT (x3) 1/5A CT (x3) or 1/5A CT (x3) or 1/5A CT (x6)
inputs LPCT (x3) LPCT (x3)2)
Residual current 1/5A CT or 0.2/1A CT 5/1A+1/0.2A 5/1A+1/0.2A +

5/1A+1/0.2A
CT
Voltage VT (x1) VT (x4) or VT (x4) or LPVT VT (x4)

LPVT (x4) (x4)2)
Arc flash sensor input – 0 to 4 point 0 to 4 point

sensor sensor
Digital I/O Input 2 8/10 14/16 6 to 36 6 to 16
Output 5 + WD 5/8 + WD 11/8 + WD 10 to 21 + WD 10 to 13 + WD
Analog I/O Input – 0 or 4 3) 0 or 4 3)
Output – 0 or 4 3) 0 or 4 3)
Temperature sensor input – 0 or 8 or 123) 0 or 8 or 123)
Front port USB USB
Nominal power supply 24 V dc or 24...48 V dc or 48...230 V ac/dc4) 24...48 V dc or 110...240 V ac/dc
Ambient temperature, in service -40...60°C (-40...140°F) -40...60°C (-40...140°F)

2) LPCT/LPVT available for P3F30 and P3M30 only
3) Usingexternal RTD module
4) Check the available power supply range from the device's serial number label.
Table 4 - Communication & others
4 3
1
Communication
Rear ports RS-232 – ■ ■ ■
IRIG/B ■ ■ ■
RS-485 – ■ Using external Using external

I/O module I/O module
Ethernet – ■ ■ ■
Protocols IEC 61850 Ed1 – ■ ■ ■ ■

& Ed2
IEC 60870-5-101 – ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-103 – ■ ■ ■ ■
DNP3 Over – ■ ■ ■ ■
Ethernet
22 P3U/en M/H006
Modbus serial – ■ ■ ■ ■
Modbus TCP/IP – ■ ■ ■ ■
Ethernet/IP – ■ ■ ■ ■
Profibus DP – ■ ■ ■ ■
SPAbus – ■ ■ ■ ■
Redundancy RSTP – ■ ■ ■ ■
protocols
PRP – ■ ■ ■ ■
Others
Control 1 object 8 objects 8 objects

Mimic Mimic Mimic
Logic Matrix ■ ■
Logic equations ■ ■
Cyber security Password Password
Withdrawability (Pluggable ■ –
connector)
Remote UMI – ■
NOTE: The numbers in the following tables represent the amount of stages
available for each Easergy P3 type.
Table 5 - Protection functions for P3U
Protection functions ANSI Feeder Feeder P3U30 Motor P3U10/20 Motor P3U30
code P3U10/20
Fault locator 21FL – 1 – 1
Synchronism check5) 25 – 2 – 2
Undervoltage 27 – 3 – 3
Directional power 32 – 2 – 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 1 1
RTD temperature 38/49T 12 12 12 12

monitoring6)
Negative sequence 46 – – 2 2
overcurrent (motor,
generator)
Cur. unbalance, broken 46BC 1 1 – –

conductor
Incorrect phase sequence 47 – – 1 1
P3U/en M/H006 23
code P3U10/20
Negative sequence 47 – 3 – 3
overvoltage protection
Motor start-up 48/51LR – – 1 1

supervision / Locked rotor
Thermal overload 49 1 1 1 1
Phase overcurrent 50/51 3 3 3 3
Ground fault overcurrent 50N/51N 5 5 5 5
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1
SOTF 50HS 1 1 1 1
Capacitor bank 51C 2 2 2 2

unbalance7)
Voltage-dependent 51V – 1 – 1
overcurrent
Overvoltage 59 – 3 – 3
Capacitor overvoltage 59C 1 1 – –
Neutral overvoltage 59N 3 3 3 3
CT supervision 60 1 1 1 1
VT supervision 60FL – 1 – 1
Restricted ground fault 64REF 1 1 1 1

with external connection
64BEF
(high impedance)
Starts per hour 66 – – 1 1
Directional phase 67 – 4 – 4
overcurrent
Directional ground fault 67N 3 3 3 3

o/c
Transient intermittent 67NI 1 1 – –
Second harmonic inrush 68F2 1 1 1 1

detection
Fifth harmonic detection 68H5 1 1 1 1
Auto-Recloser 79 5 5 – –
Over or under frequency 81 – 2/2 – 2/2
Rate of change of 81R – 1 – 1

frequency
Under frequency 81U – 2 – 2
Lockout 86 1 1 1 1
24 P3U/en M/H006
code P3U10/20
Programmable stages 99 8 8 8 8
Cold load pickup (CLPU) – 1 1 1 1
Programmable curves – 3 3 3 3
Setting groups 8) – 4 4 4 4
5) The availability depends on the selected voltage measurement mode (in the Scaling setting view in Easergy Pro)
6) Using external RTD module
7) Capacitor bank unbalance protection is connected to the ground fault overcurrent input and shares two stages with the ground fault
overcurrent protection.
8) Not all protection functions have 4 setting groups. See details in the manual.
Table 6 - Protection functions for Px3x
Protection functions ANSI P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
code
Distance 21 – 1 – – – – –
Under-impedance 21G – – – – 2 2 –
Fault locator 21FL 1 1 – – – – –
Overfluxing 24 – – – – 1 1 1
Synchronism check9) 25 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage 27 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Positive sequence under- 27P – – – – 2 2 –

voltage
Directional power 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 – – 1 1 – – –
RTD temperature 38/49T 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

monitoring10)
Loss of field 40 – – – – 1 1 –
Under-reactance 21/40 – – – – 2 2 –
Negative sequence 46 – – 2 2 2 2 2
overcurrent (motor,
generator)
Cur. unbalance, broken 46BC 1 1 – – – – –

conductor
Incorrect phase sequence 47 – – 1 1 – – –
Negative sequence 47 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
overvoltage protection
Excessive start time, 48/51LR – – 1 1 – – –

locked rotor
Thermal overload 49 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P3U/en M/H006 25
code
Phase overcurrent 50/51 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Ground fault overcurrent 50N/51N 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SOTF 50HS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Capacitor bank 51C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

unbalance11)
Voltage-dependent 51V 1 1 – – 1 1 –
overcurrent
Overvoltage 59 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Capacitor overvoltage 59C 1 1 – – – – –
Neutral overvoltage 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CT supervision 60 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
VT supervision 60FL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Restricted ground fault 64REF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

with external connection
64BEF
(high impedance)
Restricted ground fault 64REF – – – – – 1 1

(low impedance)
Stator ground fault 64S – – – – 1 1 –
Starts per hour 66 – – 1 1 – – –
Directional phase 67 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
overcurrent
Directional ground fault 67N 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

o/c
Transient intermittent 67NI 1 1 – – – – –
Second harmonic inrush 68F2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

detection
Fifth harmonic detection 68H5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pole slip 78PS – – – – 1 1 –
Auto-Recloser 79 5 5 – – – – –
Over or under frequency 81 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2
Rate of change of 81R 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

frequency
Under frequency 81U 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Lockout 86 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
26 P3U/en M/H006
code
Line differential 87L – 2 – – – – –
Machine differential 87M – – – 2 – 2 –
Transformer differential 87T – – – – – – 2
Programmable stages 99 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Arc flash detection (AFD) – 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Cold load pickup (CLPU) – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Programmable curves – 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Setting groups 12) – 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) The availability depends on the selected voltage measurement mode (in the Scaling setting view in Easergy Pro)
10) Using external RTD module
11) Capacitor bank unbalance protection is connected to the ground fault overcurrent input and shares two stages with the ground fault
12) Not all protection functions have 4 setting groups. See details in the manual.
Table 7 - Control functions
Control functions P3U10/ P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
20
Switchgear control and 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

monitoring
Switchgear monitoring – – 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
only
Programmable switchgear ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
interlocking
Local control on single- ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

line diagram
Local control with O/I keys ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Local/remote function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Function keys 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Custom logic (logic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

equations)
Control with Smart App ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 8 - Measurements
Measurement P3U10/ P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
20
RMS current values ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)
RMS voltage values ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
RMS active, reactive and – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

apparent power
P3U/en M/H006 27
20
Frequency ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fundamental frequency ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)

current values
Fundamental frequency – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
voltage values
Fundamental frequency – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
active, reactive and
apparent power values
Power factor – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Energy values active and – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

reactive
Energy transmitted with – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

pulse outputs
Demand values: phase ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

currents
Demand values: active, – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

reactive, apparent power
and power factor
Min and max demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: phase currents
Min and max demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: RMS phase
currents
Min and max demand – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

values: active, reactive,
apparent power and
power factor
Maximum demand values – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

over the last 31 days and
12 months: active,
Minimum demand values – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

over the last 31 days and
12 months: active,
reactive power
Max and min values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

currents
Max and min values: – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

voltages
Max and min values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

frequency
28 P3U/en M/H006
20
Max andmin values: – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

active, reactive, apparent
power and power factor
Harmonic values of phase ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■13) ■ ■13) ■13)

current and THD
Harmonic values of – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
voltage and THD
Voltage sags and swells – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

13) Function available on both sets of CT inputs
Table 9 - Logs and records
Logs and Records P3U10/ P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
20
Sequence of event record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disturbance record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Tripping context record ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 10 - Monitoring functions
P3U10/
Monitoring functions P3U30 P3F30 P3L30 P3M30 P3M32 P3G30 P3G32 P3T32
20
Trip circuit supervision 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(ANSI 74)
Circuit breaker monitoring 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Relay monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.4 Access to device configuration

You can access the device configuration via:
• the Easergy Pro setting tool
• the device’s front panel
2.4.1 User accounts
By default, the Easergy P3 device has five user accounts.
P3U/en M/H006 29
Table 11 - User accounts
User account User name Default Use

password
User user 0 Used for reading parameter

values, measurements, and
events, for example
Operator operator 1 Used for controlling objects and

for changing the protection stages’
settings, for example
Configurator conf 2 Needed during the device

commissioning. For example, the
scaling of the voltage and current
transformers can be set only with
this user account.
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel
NOTE: To log on via the front panel, you need a password that consists of
digits only.
1. Press and on the front panel. The Enter password view opens.
Figure 1 - Enter password view
2. Enter the password for the desired access level.
Select a digit value using , and if the password is longer than one digit,
move to the next digit position using .
NOTE: There are 16 digit positions in the Enter password view. Enter the
password starting from the first digit position.
For example, if the password is 2, you can enter 2***, **2*, ***2, or 0002
to log on.
3. Press to confirm the password.
Related topics
2.4.3 Password management
30 P3U/en M/H006
2.4.3 Password management
NOTICE
CYBERSECURITY HAZARD
To improve cybersecurity:
• Change all passwords from their default values when taking the protection
device into use.
• Change all passwords regularly.
• Ensure a minimum level of password complexity according to common
password guidelines.
Failure to follow these instructions can increase the risk of unauthorized

access.
You can change the password for the operator or configurator user accounts in
the General > Device info setting view in Easergy Pro.
The password can contain letters, digits or any other UTF-8 characters (total 1–32
characters). However, the new password cannot be any of the default passwords
(digits 0–4 or 9999).
Follow these guidelines to improve the password complexity and thus device
security:
• Use a password of minimum 8 characters.
• Use alphabetic (uppercase and lowercase) and numeric characters in addition
to symbols.
• Avoid character repetition, number or letter sequences and keyboard patterns.
• Do not use any personal information, such as birthday, name, etc.
• Do not use the same password for different user accounts.
• Do not reuse old passwords.
Also, all users must be aware of the best practices concerning passwords
including:
• not sharing personal passwords
• not displaying passwords during password entry
• not transmitting passwords in email or by other means
• not saving the passwords on PCs or other devices
• no written passwords on any supports
• regularly reminding users about the best practices concerning passwords
NOTE: To log on via the front panel, you need a password that consists of
digits only.
Related topics
2.4.2 Logging on via the front panel
2.4.4 Password restoring
If you have lost or forgotten all passwords, contact Schneider Electric to restore
the default passwords.
P3U/en M/H006 31
2.5 Front panel
Figure 2 - Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 front panel
G
B E
A. LCD E. Local port

B. Navigation push-buttons F. Function push-buttons and LEDs showing their status
C. Object control buttons G. INFO push-button
D. LED indicators
2.5.1 Push-buttons
Symbol Function
HOME/CANCEL push-button for returning to the previous menu. To

return to the first menu item in the main menu, press the button for at
least 3 seconds.
INFO push-button for viewing additional information, for entering the

password view and for adjusting the LCD contrast.
Programmable function push-button.14)
Programmable function push-button.14)
ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.
UP navigation push-button for moving up in the menu or increasing a

numerical value.
DOWN navigation push-button for moving down in the menu or

decreasing a numerical value.
32 P3U/en M/H006
Symbol Function
LEFT navigation push-button for moving backwards in a parallel menu

or selecting a digit in a numerical value.
RIGHT navigation push-button for moving forwards in a parallel menu or

selecting a digit in a numerical value.
Circuit breaker close push-button
Circuit breaker trip push-button
14) The default names of the function buttons are Function button 1 and 2. You can change the names
of the buttons in the Control > Names for function buttons setting view.
2.5.2 LED indicators
The relay has 12 LED indicators on the front panel:
• two LEDs for function buttons (F1 and F2)

• two LEDs represent the unit's general status (power and service)
• eight user-configurable LEDs (A-H)
The LED statuses are restored after device restart.
When the relay is powered, the power LED is green. During normal use, the
service LED is not active, it activates only when an error occurs or the relay is not
operating correctly. Should this happen, contact your local representative for
further guidance. The service LED and watchdog contact are assigned to work
together. Hardwire the status output into the substation's automation system for
alarm purposes.
To customize the LED texts on the front panel for the user-configurable LEDs, the
text may be created using a template and then printed. The printed text may be
placed in the pockets beside the LEDs.
You can also customize the LED texts that are shown on the screen for active
LEDs via Easergy Pro.
Table 12 - LED indicators and their information
LED indicator LED color Meaning Measure /

Remarks
Power LED lit Green The auxiliary power Normal operation

has been switched state
on
Service LED lit Red Internal fault. The relay attempts

Operates in parallel to reboot. If the
with the self- service LED remains
supervision output lit, call for
maintenance.
P3U/en M/H006 33
LED indicator LED color Meaning Measure /

Remarks
A–H LED lit Yellow Application-related Configurable in the

status indicators. Matrix setting view
F1 or F2 LED lit Yellow Corresponding Depending on the

function key function
pressed / activated programmed to F1 /
F2
2.5.3 Controlling the alarm screen
You can enable or disable the alarm screen either via the relay's local display or
using Easergy Pro:
• On the local display, go to Events > Alarms.

• In Easergy Pro, go to General > Local panel conf.
2.5.4 Accessing operating levels
1. On the front panel, press and .
2. Enter the password, and press .
2.5.5 Adjusting the LCD contrast
Prerequisite: You have entered the correct password.
1. Press , and adjust the contrast.
◦ To increase the contrast, press .

◦ To decrease the contrast, press .
2. To return to the main menu, press .
NOTE: By nature, the LCD display changes its contrast depending on the
ambient temperature. The display may become dark or unreadable at low
temperatures. However, this condition does not affect the proper operation of
the protection or other functions.
2.5.6 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen
You can start the test sequence in any main menu window.
To start the LED and LCD test:
1. Press .
2. Press .
34 P3U/en M/H006
The relay tests the LCD screen and the functionality of all LEDs.
2.5.7 Controlling an object with selective control
Prerequisite: You have logged in with the correct password and enabled selective
control in the Objects setting view.
When selective control is enabled, the control operation needs confirmation

(select before operate).
• Press to close an object.
– Press again to confirm.
– Press to cancel.
• Press to trip an object.
– Press again to confirm.
– Press to cancel.
2.5.8 Controlling an object with direct control
Prerequisite: You have logged in with the correct password and enabled direct
control in the Objects setting view.
When direct control is enabled, the control operation is done without confirmation.
• Press to close an object.
• Press to trip an object.
2.5.9 Menus
This section gives an overview of the menus that you can access via the device's
front panel.
The main menu
Press the right arrow to access more measurements in the main menu.
Table 13 - Main menu
Menu name Description
Active LEDs User-configurable texts for active LEDs
Measurements User-configurable measurements
Single line Single line or Single line mimic,

measurements and control view. This is a
default start view. To return to this view
from any location, press the HOME/
CANCELL button for at least 3 seconds.
P3U/en M/H006 35
Info Information about the relay: relay's name,

order code, date, time and firmware version
P Power: power factor and frequency values

calculated by the relay. Press the right
arrow to view more measurements.
E Energy: the amount of energy that has

passed through the protected line,
calculated by the relay from the currents
and voltages. Press the right arrow to view
more energy measurements.
I Current: phase currents and demand

values of phase currents. Press the right
arrow to view more current measurements.
V Line-to-line voltages. Press the right arrow

to view other voltage measurements.
Dema Minimum and maximum phase current and

power demand values
Vmax Minimum and maximum values of voltage

and frequency
Imax Minimum and maximum current values
Pmax Minimum and maximum power values
Month Monthly maximum current and power

values
FL Short-circuit locator applied to incomer or

feeder
Evnt Event log: event codes and time stamps
DR Disturbance recorder configuration settings
Runh Running hour counter
TIMR Timers: programmable timers that you can

use to preset functions
DI Digital input statuses and settings
DO Digital output statuses and settings
Prot Protection: settings and statuses for various

protection functions
36 P3U/en M/H006
50/51-1–50/51-4 Protection stage settings and statuses. The

availability of the menus are depends on
the activated protection stages.
AR Auto-reclosure settings, statuses and

registers
OBJ Objects: settings related to object status

data and object control (open/closed)
Lgic Logic events and counters
CONF General device setup: CT and VT scalings,

frequency adaptation, units, device info,
date, time, clock, etc.
Bus Communication port settings
OPT Slot info: card ID (CID) that is the name of

the card used by the relay firmware
Diag Diagnosis: various diagnostic information
2.5.9.1 Moving in the menus
Figure 3 - Moving in menus using the front panel
Main menu Submenus
ARC Arc detection settings
OK
I pick-up setting
OK OK
• To move in the main menu, press or .

• To move in the submenus, press or .
• While in the submenu, press or to jump to the root.
• To enter a submenu, press and use or for moving down or up
in the menu.
• To edit a parameter value, press and .
P3U/en M/H006 37
• Enter the password, and press .

• To go back to the previous menu, press .
• To go back to the first menu item in the main menu, press for at least three
seconds.
NOTE: To enter the parameter edit mode, enter the password. When the
value is in edit mode, its background is dark.
2.5.9.2 Local panel messages
Table 14 - Local panel messages

Value is not editable: The value can not be edited or password is
not given
Control disabled: Object control disabled due to wrong

operating level
Change causes autoboot: Notification that if the parameter is changed

the relay boots itself
2.6 Easergy Pro setting and configuration tool
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC
FLASH
Only qualified personnel should operate this equipment.

Such work should be performed only after reading this
entire set of instructions and checking the technical
characteristics of the device.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or

serious injury.
Easergy Pro is a software tool for configuring Easergy P3 relays. It has a

graphical interface where the relay settings and parameters are grouped under
seven tabs:
• General
• Measurements
• Inputs/outputs
• Protection
• Matrix
• Logs
• Communication
The contents of the tabs depend on the relay type and the selected application
mode.
Easergy Pro stores the relay configuration in a setting file. The configuration of
one physical relay is saved in one setting file. The configurations can be printed
out and saved for later use.
For more information, see the Easergy Pro user manual.
38 P3U/en M/H006
NOTE: Download the latest version of the software from se.com/ww/en/

product-range-download/64884-easergy-p3-protection-relays.
NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
After writing new settings or configurations to a device, perform a test to verify

that the relay operates correctly with the new settings.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of

the electrical installation.
P3U/en M/H006 39
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 3 Measurement functions
3 Measurement functions
Easergy P3 has various amounts of analog inputs depending on the model in use.
Table 15 introduces directly measured and calculated quantities for the power
system monitoring. Also see 2.3 Product selection guide.
The relay has two operational modes: feeder and motor. In the feeder mode, the
secondary currents are proportional to the CT primary values whereas in the
motor mode, all protection stages use the motor's nominal current values.
The current scaling impacts the following functions:

• Protection stages
• Measurements
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault location calculation
Table 15 - Measurement functions in Easergy P3
Measurements P3U10/20 P3U30 P3x3x Measurement Inaccuracy

Specification range
RMS phase ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

current of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN: ±3 %

of value
RMS ground fault ■ ■ ■ 0.003–10 x IN I ≤ 1.5 xI0N: ±0.3

overcurrent % of value or ±0.2
% of I0N
I > 1.5 xI0N: ±3 %

of value
RMS line-to-line — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x VN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

voltage
RMS phase-to- — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x VN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

neutral voltage
RMS active power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

(PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xPN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN
RMS reactive — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

power (PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xQN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xQN
RMS apparent — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

power (PF >0.5) 0.3–1.5xSN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
40 P3U/en M/H006
3 Measurement functions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

Specification range
Frequency ■ ■ ■ 16 Hz – 75 Hz ±10 mHz
Fundamental ■ ■ ■ 0.025-50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

frequency current of value or ±15 mA
values
I > 1.5 x IN: ±3 %
of value
Fundamental — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x VN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

frequency voltage
values
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

frequency active, 0.3–1.5xPN
reactive and
±3 % for range
apparent power
0.1–0.3xPN
values
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

frequency active 0.3–1.5xQN
power values
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xQN
Fundamental — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

frequency reactive 0.3–1.5xSN
power values
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
Power factor — ■ ■ 0.02–1 ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

> 0.5
Active energy — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

0.3–1.5xEPN
Reactive energy — ■ ■ ±1 %/1h for range

0.3–1.5xEQN
±3 %/1h for range

0.1–0.3xEQN
Energy transmitted — ■ ■ ±1 %/1h for range

with pulse outputs 0.3–1.5xEPN
±3 %/1h for range

0.1–0.3xEPN
Demand values: ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

phase currents of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
P3U/en M/H006 41

Specification range
Active power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xPN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN
Reactive power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x QN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xQN
±3 % for range
0.1-0.3xQN
Apparent power — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x SN ±1 % for range

demand 0.3–1.5xSN
±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xSN
Power factor — ■ ■ ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

demand > 0.5
Min. and max. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

demand values: of value or ±15 mA
phase currents
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
Min. and max. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

demand values: of value or ±15 mA
RMS phase
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
currents
value
Min. and max. — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

demand values: 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
active, reactive, SN
apparent power
and power factor ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
Maximum demand — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

values over the 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
last 31 days and SN
12 months: active,
reactive, apparent ±3 % for range
power 0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
42 P3U/en M/H006

Specification range
Minimum demand — ■ ■ ±1 % for range

values over the 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
last 31 days and SN
12 months: active,
reactive power ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
Max. and min. ■ ■ ■ 0.025–50 x IN I ≤ 1.5 x IN: ±0.5 %

values: currents of value or ±15 mA
I > 1.5 x IN ±3 % of
value
Max. and min. — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x VN ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V

values: voltages
Max. and min. ■ ■ ■ 16 Hz-75 Hz ±10 mHz

values: frequency
Max. and min. — ■ ■ ±0.1–1.5 x PN, QN, ±1 % for range

values: active, SN 0.3–1.5xPN, QN,
reactive, apparent SN
power and power
factor ±3 % for range
0.1–0.3xPN, QN,
SN
±2° or ±0.02 for PF

> 0.5
Harmonic values ■ ■ ■ 2nd–15th

of phase current
and THD
Harmonic values — ■ ■ 2nd–15th

of voltage and
THD
Voltage sags and — ■ ■ 0.005–1.7 x VN ±2° or ±0.02 for PF

swells > 0.5
NOTE: The measurement display's refresh rate is 0.2 s.
3.1 Primary, secondary and per unit scaling

Many measurement values are shown as primary values although the device is
connected to secondary signals. Some measurement values are shown as
relative values – per unit or percent. Almost all start setting values use relative
scaling.
P3U/en M/H006 43
Scaling settings
Table 16 - Phase current and ground fault overcurrent scaling parameters
Parameter Description
Nominal input (IL Rated value of the phase current input. The given thermal
side) withstand, burden and impedance are based on this value.
See Table 134 for details.
CT primary Primary current value of the IL (high-voltage) current transformer
CT secondary Secondary current value of the IL (high-voltage) current

transformer
IN1 CT primary Primary current value of the ground fault IN1 overcurrent
transformer
IN1 CT secondary Secondary current value of the ground fault IN1 overcurrent
transformer
Nominal IN1 input Selectable nominal input rating for the ground fault overcurrent
input. Select either 5A or 1A depending on which Io input is used.
The given thermal withstand, burden and impedance are based
on this value.
See Table 134 for details.
VT primary Primary voltage value of the voltage transformer (only P3U30

devices)
VT secondary Secondary voltage value of the voltage transformer (only P3U30

devices)
VTo secondary Secondary voltage value of the neutral voltage displacement

voltage transformer
Voltage The device can be connected either to zero-sequence voltage,

measurement mode line-to-line voltage or line-to-neutral voltage. Set the voltage
measurement mode according to the type of connection used.
Frequency adaptation Parameter used to set the system frequency. There are three
mode modes available: manual, auto and fixed. For more information,
see 3.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode.
Adapted frequency When the frequency adaption mode is set to manual, you can set
the frequency in the Adapted frequency field, and it is not be
updated even if the measured frequency is different.
Angle memory Time setting for the directional overcurrent stage to keep the
duration phase angle fixed if the system voltage collapses
44 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 4 - Scaling setting view in Easergy Pro
The scaling equations presented in 3.1.2 Current transformer ratio and 3.1.3
Voltage transformer ratio are useful when doing secondary testing.
3.1.1 Frequency adaptation mode
You can set the system frequency in General > Scaling in Easergy Pro.
There are three frequency adaptation modes available:
• Manual: When the adaption mode is set to manual, you can set the frequency
in the Adapted frequency field, and it will not be updated even if the
measured frequency is different. However, the relay monitors the system
frequency internally and adapts to the new frequency even if the frequency
has been set manually.
• Auto: The network frequency is automatically updated when the relay has
measured the voltage for approximately 45 seconds. The Adapted frequency
field is updated even if it has been set previously. The frequency is measured
from the voltage signals.
Table 17 - Voltage signals
Voltage measurement Voltage Voltage channel

mode
2LL+VN, 2LL+VN/LNy, 2LL VAB, VBC V1, V2

+VN/LLy
3LN, 3LN+VN, 3LN/LNy, VA, VB V1, V2

3LN/LLy
P3U/en M/H006 45
Voltage measurement Voltage Voltage channel

mode
LN+VN/y/z VA V1
LL+VN/y/z VAB V1
In P310 and P320 relays, the frequency adaptation is taken from the
measured currents.
• Fixed: The frequency is not updated based on the measured voltage and only
the set value is used. This mode is recommended to be used for the line-
differential function.
3.1.2 Current transformer ratio
NOTE: The rated value of the relay's current input, for example 5 A or 1 A,
does not have any effect on the scaling equations, but it defines the
measurement range and the maximum allowed continuous current. See Table
134 for details.
Table 18 - Primary and secondary scaling
Current (CT)
Residual current calculated
secondary → primary CTPRI

I PRI = I SEC ⋅
CTSEC
primary → secondary
CTSEC
I SEC = I PRI ⋅
CTPRI
For ground fault overcurrent to input IN, use the corresponding CTPRI and CTSEC
values. For ground fault stages using IN Calc signals, use the phase current CT
values for CTPRI and CTSEC.
Examples
1. Secondary to primary
CT = 500 / 5
Current to the relay's input is 4 A.
=> Primary current is IPRI = 4 x 500 / 5 = 400 A
2. Primary to secondary
CT = 500 / 5
The relay displays IPRI = 400 A
=> Injected current is ISEC = 400 x 5 / 500 = 4 A
Per unit [pu] scaling
For phase currents:
46 P3U/en M/H006
1 pu = 1 x IMODE = 100%, where IMODE is the rated current according to the mode.
See 1.3 Abbreviations and terms.
For ground fault overcurrents
1 pu = 1 x CTSEC for secondary side and 1 pu = 1 x CTPRI for primary side.
Phase current scaling Ground fault

overcurrent (3IN)
scaling
secondary → per unit I SEC ⋅ CTPRI I SEC

I PU = I PU =
CTSEC ⋅ I MODE CTSEC
per unit → secondary

I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC ⋅
I MODE I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC
CTPRI
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit
CT = 750 / 5
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 / 5 = 1.4 pu = 140%
2. Secondary to per unit for phase currents
CT = 750/5
IN or IMOT = 525 A
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 x 750 / (5 x 525) = 2.00 pu = 2.00 x (IN or I MOT )
= 200%
3. Per unit to secondary
CT = 750 / 5
The relay setting is 2 pu = 200%.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 = 10 A
4. Per unit to secondary for phase currents
CT = 750 / 5
IN or IMOT = 525 A
The relay setting is 2 x (IN or IMOT) = 2 pu = 200%.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 x 525 / 750 = 7 A
5. Secondary to per unit for earth fault overcurrent
Input is IN.
CT0 = 50 / 1
Current injected to the relay's input is 30 mA.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.03 / 1 = 0.03 pu = 3%
6. Secondary to per unit for ground fault overcurrent
Input is IN.
CT0 = 50 / 1
P3U/en M/H006 47
The relay setting is 0.03 pu = 3%.

Secondary current is ISEC = 0.03 x 1 = 30 mA
Input is IN Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
Currents injected to the relay's IA input is 0.5 A.
IB = IC = 0.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.5 / 5 = 0.1 pu = 10%
Input is IN Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
The relay setting is 0.1 pu = 10%.
If IB = IC = 0, then secondary current to IA is ISEC = 0.1 x 5 = 0.5 A
3.1.3 Voltage transformer ratio
NOTE: Voltage transformer scaling is based on the line-to-line voltages in all

voltage measurements modes.
Table 19 - Primary/secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages
Line-to-line Line-to-neutral
voltage voltage
measurement measurement
(LL) with VT (LN) with VT
secondary → VTPRI V = 3 ⋅ V ⋅ VTPRI

V PRI = V SEC ⋅ PRI SEC
VTSEC
primary VTSEC
primary → VTSEC V VT
V SEC = V PRI ⋅ V SEC = PRI ⋅ SEC
secondary VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples
1. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input VA or VB is 100 V.
=> Primary voltage is VPRI = 100x12000/110 = 10909 V.
2. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN”.
VT = 12000/110
Three phase symmetric voltages connected to the relay's inputs VA, VB
and VC are 57.7 V.
=> Primary voltage is VPRI = √3 x58x12000/110 = 10902 V
3. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
48 P3U/en M/H006
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays VPRI = 10910 V.
=> Secondary voltage is VSEC = 10910x110/12000 = 100 V
4. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN”.
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays VAB = VBC = VCA = 10910 V.
=> Symmetric secondary voltages at VA, VB and VC are VSEC = 10910/√3
x110/12000 = 57.7 V.
Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages
One per unit = 1 pu = 1 x VN = 100%, where VN = rated voltage of the VT.
Line-to-line voltage scaling
Voltage measurement Voltage measurement

mode = "2LL+VN", "1LL mode = "3LN"
+VN/LLy", "2LL/LLy",
"LL/LLy/LLz"
secondary → per unit V SEC VTPRI V SEC VTPRI

V PU = ⋅ V PU = 3 ⋅ ⋅
VTSEC V N VTSEC V N
per unit → secondary VN VT V

V SEC = V PU ⋅ VTSEC ⋅ V SEC = V PU ⋅ SEC ⋅ N
VTPRI 3 VT PRI
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input VA or VB is 110 V.
=> Per unit voltage is VPU = 110/110 = 1.00 pu = 1.00 x VN = 100%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the relay's inputs
VA, VB and VC are 63.5 V
=> Per unit voltage is VPU = √3 x 63.5/110 x 12000/11000 = 1.00 pu =
1.00xVN = 100%
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100%.
=> Secondary voltage is VSEC = 1.00 x 110 x 11000/12000 = 100.8 V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
VN = 11000 V
P3U/en M/H006 49
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100%.

=> Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the relay 's
inputs VA, VB and VC are VSEC = 1.00 x 110/√3 x 11000/12000 = 58.2 V
Per unit [pu] scaling of neutral overvoltage
Neutral overvoltage (VN) scaling
Voltage measurement Voltage measurement

mode = "2LL+VN", "1LL mode = "3LN"
+VN/LLy"
secondary → per unit V SEC 1 V a +V b +V c

V PU = V PU = ⋅ SEC
V 0 SEC VTSEC 3
per unit →secondary V SEC = V PU ⋅ V 0 SEC V a +V b +V c

SEC
= 3 ⋅ V PU ⋅ VTSEC
Examples
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
V0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to VN at full

ground fault.)
Voltage connected to the relay's input VC is 22 V.
=> Per unit voltage is VPU = 22/110 = 0.20 pu = 20%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input VA is 38.1 V, while VA = VB = 0.
=> Per unit voltage is VPU = (38.1+0+0)/(√3 x110) = 0.20 pu = 20%
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "2LL+VN".
V0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to VN at full

ground fault.)
The relay displays VN = 20%.
=> Secondary voltage at input VC is VSEC = 0.20 x 110 = 22 V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays VN = 20%.
=> If VB = VC = 0, then secondary voltages at VA is VSEC = √3 x 0.2 x 110 =
38.1 V
3.2 Measurements for protection functions

The relay uses root mean square (RMS) measurement for the protection stages if
not stated otherwise in the protection stage description.
50 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 5 - Example of various current values of a transformer inrush current
Load = 0%
100
rms f2/f1 (%)

5 f1 50
Relative 2nd harmoic f2/f1 (%)

Current (PU)
f2
0 0
-5
IB
-10
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30

Time (s)
All the direct measurements and most protection functions are based on
fundamental frequency values.
Figure 5 shows a current waveform and the corresponding fundamental

frequency component f1, second harmonic f2, and RMS value in a special case
where the current deviates significantly from a pure sine wave.
3.3 RMS values

RMS currents
The relay calculates the RMS value of each phase current. The minimum and
maximum RMS values are recorded and stored (see 3.6 Minimum and maximum
values).
2 2 2
I RMS = I f 1 + I f 2 + ... + I f 15
RMS voltages
The relay calculates the RMS value of each voltage input. The minimum and the
maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored (see 3.6 Minimum and
maximum values).
2 2 2
V RMS = V f1 +V f2 + ... + V f 15
3.4 Harmonics and total harmonic distortion (THD)

The relay calculates the the total harmonic distortions (THDs) as a percentage of
the currents and voltages values measured at the fundamental frequency. The
relay calculates the harmonics from the 2nd to the 15th of phase currents and
voltages. (The 17th harmonic component is also shown partly in the value of the
15th harmonic component. This is due to the nature of digital sampling.)
The harmonic distortion is calculated:
P3U/en M/H006 51
Equation 1
15
∑f
i =2
i
2
THD =
h1
f1 = Fundamental value
f2– 15 = Harmonics
Example
f1 = 100 A, f3 = 10 A, f7 = 3 A, f11 = 8 A
10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2
THD = = 13.2%
100
For reference, the RMS value is:
RMS = 100 2 + 10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2 = 100.9 A

Another way to calculate the THD is to use the RMS value as reference instead of
the fundamental frequency value. In the example above, the result would then be
13.0 %.
3.5 Demand values

The device calculates average values (demand values) of phase currents IA, IB, IC
and power values S, P and Q.
The demand time is configurable from 10 to 60 minutes with the parameter

"Demand time".
Figure 6 - Demand values
52 P3U/en M/H006
Table 20 - Demand value parameters
Parameter Value Unit Description Set15)
Time 10 – 30 min Demand time (averaging time) Set
Fundamental frequency values
IAda A Demand of phase current IA
IBda A Demand of phase current IB
ICda A Demand of phase current IC
Pda kW Demand of active power P
PFda Demand of power factor PF
Qda kvar Demand of reactive power Q
Sda kVA Demand of apparent power S
RMS values
IARMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IA
IBRMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IB
ICRMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IC
Prmsda kW Demand of RMS active power P
Qrmsda kvar Demand of RMS reactive power Q
Srmsda kVA Demand of RMS apparent power S

15) Set = An editable parameter (password needed)
3.6 Minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values are registered with time stamps since the latest
manual clearing or since the relay has been restarted. The available registered
values are listed in Table 21.
P3U/en M/H006 53
Figure 7 - Minimum and maximum values
Table 21 - Minimum and maximum measurement values
Min & Max measurement Description
IA, IB, IC Phase current, fundamental frequency

value
IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS Phase current, RMS value
IN Ground fault overcurrent, fundamental

value
VA, VB, VC, VD Voltages, fundamental frequency values
VARMS, VBRMS, VCRMS, VDRMS Line-to-neutral voltages, RMS value
VN Neutral voltage displacement, fundamental

value
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
IA da, IBda, ICda Demand values of phase currents
IAda, IBda, ICda (rms value) Demand values of phase currents, rms
values
PFda Power factor demand value
P.F. Power factor
The clearing parameter "ClrMax" is common for all these values.
54 P3U/en M/H006
Table 22 - Parameters
Parameter Value Description Set16)
ClrMax -; Clear Reset all minimum Set

and maximum
values
16) Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
3.7 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months

The maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and the last 12 months
are stored in the relay's non-volatile memory. You can view them in the Logs >
Month max setting view in Easergy Pro.
NOTE: The saving process starts every 30 minutes and it takes a while. If the
relay's auxiliary supply power is switched off before all values have been
saved, the old values remain for the unsaved ones.
Corresponding time stamps are stored for the last 31 days. The registered values
are listed in Table 23.
Figure 8 - Maximum and minimum values of the past 31 days
P3U/en M/H006 55
Figure 9 - Maximum and minimum values of the past 12 months
Table 23 - Maximum registered values of the last 31 days and 12 months
12 Max Min Descriptio 31 12

months n days months
Measur
ement
IA, IB, IC X Phase

current
(fundamental
frequency
value)
IN X Ground fault
overcurrent
S X Apparent X X
power
P X X Active power X X
Q X X Reactive X X
power
The timebase can be a value from one cycle to one minute. Also a demand value
can be used as the timebase and its value can be set between 10 and 60
minutes. The demand value menu is located under the Measurements view.
Table 24 - Parameters of the day and month registers
Timebase Parameter to select Set

the type of the
registered values
20 ms Collect min & max of

one cycle values18)
56 P3U/en M/H006
200 ms Collect min & max of

200 ms average
values
1s Collect min & max of

1 s average values
1 min Collect min & max of

1 minute average
values
demand Collect min & max of

demand values (3.5
Demand values)
ResetDays Reset the 31 day Set

registers
ResetMon Reset the 12 month Set

registers
18) This is the fundamental frequency RMS value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
3.8 Memory management of measurements

Table 25 - Memory management of measured and recorded values
Measurement Online Non- Non-

volatile19) volatile20)
RMS phase current x
RMS ground fault overcurrent x
RMS line-to-line voltage x
RMS phase-to-neutral voltage x
RMS active power x
RMS reactive power x
RMS apparent power x
Frequency x
Fundamental frequency current x

values
Fundamental frequency voltage x

values
Fundamental frequency active, x

reactive and apparent power
values
P3U/en M/H006 57

Fundamental frequency active x

power values
Fundamental frequency reactive x

power values
Power factor x
Active energy x
Reactive energy x
Energy transmitted with pulse x

outputs
Demand values: phase currents x
Active power demand x
Reactive power demand x
Apparent power demand x
Power factor demand x
Min. and max. demand values: x

phase currents

RMS phase currents

active, reactive, apparent power
and power factor
Max. demand values over the last x

31 days and 12 months: active,
Min. demand values over the last x

31 days and 12 months: active,
reactive power
Max. and min. values: currents x
Max. and min. values: voltages x
Max. and min. values: frequency x
Max. and min. values: active, x

reactive, apparent power and
power factor
Harmonic values of phase current x

and THD
Harmonic values of voltage and x

THD
Voltage sags and swells x
58 P3U/en M/H006

Engine running counter x
Events x x
Disturbance record x x
Protection stage fault values and x

events
19) Capacitor-backed-up for 5-10 days
20) RAM
3.9 Power and current direction

Figure 10 shows the concept of three-phase current direction and sign of cosφ
and power factor PF (the absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the sign is 'IND' for
inductive i.e. lagging current and 'CAP' for capacitive i.e. leading current). Figure
11 shows the same concepts on a PQ power plane.
Figure 10 - Quadrants of voltage/current phasor plane
+90°
II I
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
V REF 0°
III I IV
cap +ind
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
I: Forward capacitive power, current is leading
II: Reverse inductive power, current is leading
III: Reverse capacitive power, current is lagging
IV: Forward inductive power, current is lagging
Figure 11 - Quadrants of power plane
Q
+90°
II cap +ind I
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
S
P 0°
III IV
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
P3U/en M/H006 59
I: Forward inductive power, current is lagging
II: Reverse capacitive power, current is lagging
III: Reverse inductive power, current is leading
IV: Forward capacitive power, current is leading
Table 26 - Power quadrants
Power Current Power cosφ Power factor

quadrant related to direction PF
voltage
+ inductive Lagging Forward + +
+ capacitive Leading Forward + -
- inductive Leading Reverse - +
- capacitive Lagging Reverse - -
3.10 Symmetrical components

In a three-phase system, the voltage or current phasors may be divided into
symmetrical components.
• Positive sequence 1
• Negative sequence 2
• Zero sequence 0
Symmetrical components are calculated according to the following equations:
S 0  1 1 1   S A
 S  = 1 1 a a   S B
2
 1 3
 S 2  1 a 2 a   S C
S 0 = zero sequence component
S 1 = positive sequence component
S 2 = negative sequence component
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2
, a phase rotating constant
SA = phasor of phase A (phase current or voltage)

SB = phasor of phase B
SC = phasor of phase C
60 P3U/en M/H006
4 Control functions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
4 Control functions
4.1 Digital outputs

The digital outputs are also called controlling outputs, signaling outputs and self-
supervision outputs. Trip contacts can be controlled by using the relay output
matrix or logic functions. Also forced control is possible. To use forced control,
you must enable it in the Device/Test > Relays setting view.
Any internal signal can be connected to the digital outputs in the Matrix > Output
matrix setting view. A digital output can be configured as latched or non-latched.
The digital output connections are configured either through the Easergy Pro
setting tool or the relay's menus. Horizontal lines represent inputs and vertical
lines outputs. When the crossing line of the horizontal input signal and vertical
output line is touched, the connection changes in the following sequence:
The position of the contact can be checked in the Output matrix and Relays
setting views. A digital output can be configured as latched or non-latched.
Latched relay contacts can be set free by pressing the “enter” key of the relay or
by releasing from the Easergy Pro setting tool.
The difference between trip contacts and signal contacts is the DC breaking
capacity. The contacts are single pole single throw (SPST) normal open (NO)
type, except signal relay A1 which has a changeover contact single pole double
throw (SPDT).
Programming matrix
1. Connected (single bullet)
2. Connected and latched (single bullet rounded with another circle)
3. Not connected (line crossing is empty)

Trip contacts can be connected to protection stages or other similar purpose in
the Output matrix setting view.
Figure 12 - Output matrix view
P3U/en M/H006 61
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 4 Control functions
Figure 13 - Trip contacts assigned directly to outputs of logical operators
NOTE: Logic outputs are assigned automatically in the output matrix as well
when logic is built.
Trip contact status can be viewed and forced to operate in the Relays setting
view.
Figure 14 - Relays view
Power supply card outputs are not visible in the Relay config setting view.
Table 27 - Parameters of digital outputs
Parameter Value Unit Description Note
T1 – T7 0 Status of trip controlling output F21)
A1 0 Status of alarm signalling output F
62 P3U/en M/H006
WD 0 Status of the WD relay F
1 In Easergy Pro, it is called

"Service status output"
Force On Force flag for digital output Set22)

forcing for test purposes
Off
Names for output relays (editable with Easergy Pro only)
Description String of Names for DO on Easergy Pro Set

max. 32 screens. Default is
characte
rs
21) F = Editable when force flag is on
4.2 Digital inputs

Digital inputs are available for control purposes.
The polarity normal open (NO) / normal closed (NC) and a delay can be
configured according to the application by using the front panel or Easergy Pro.
Digital inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the input can be
checked in the Output matrix and Digital inputs setting views. The digital inputs
make it possible to change group, block/enable/disable functions, to program
logics, indicate object status, etc.
The digital inputs require an external control voltage (ac or dc). The digital inputs
are activated after the activation voltage is exceeded. Deactivation follows when
the voltage drops below threshold limit.
Digital inputs can be connected, latched or unlatched to trip contacts or other

similar purpose in Output matrix setting view.
Figure 15 - Output matrix view
P3U/en M/H006 63
Digital inputs can be assigned, latched or unlatched directly to inputs/outputs of

logical operators.
Figure 16 - Digital inputs assigned to outputs of logical operators
Digital inputs can be viewed, named and changed between NO/NC in the Digital
inputs and Names for digital inputs setting views.
Figure 17 - Digital inputs view
If inputs are energized by using ac voltage, “mode” has to be selected as ac.
All essential information on digital inputs can be found in the same location in the
Digital inputs setting view. DI on/off events and alarm display (pop-up) can be
64 P3U/en M/H006
enabled and disabled in Digital inputs setting view. Individual operation counters
are located in the same view as well.
Label and description texts can be edited with Easergy Pro according to the
demand. Labels are the short parameter names used on the local panel and
descriptions are the longer names used by Easergy Pro.
Digital input delay determines the activation and de-activation delay for the input.
Figure 18shows how the digital input behaves when the delay is set to 1 second.
Figure 18 - Digital input’s behavior when delay is set to 1 second

1 s. 1 s.
1
VOLTAGE
0
1
DIGITAL INPUT
0
Table 28 - Parameters of digital inputs
Mode dc, ac Used voltage of Set23)

digital inputs
Input Number of
DI1 – DI16
digital input.
State 0, 1 Status of digital

input 1 – digital
input x.
Polarity NO For normal open Set

contacts (NO).
NC
Active edge is 0
>1
For normal
closed contacts
(NC)
Active edge is 1
>0
Delay 0.00 – 60.00 s Definite delay Set

for both on and
off transitions
On event On Active edge Set

event enabled
Off Active edge

event disabled
P3U/en M/H006 65
Off event On Inactive edge Set

event enabled
Off Inactive edge

event disabled
Alarm display no No pop-up Set

display
yes Alarm pop-up

display is
activated at
active DI edge
Counters 0 – 65535 Cumulative (Set)

active edge
counter
NAMES for DIGITAL INPUTS (editable with Easergy Pro only)
Label String of max. Short name for Set

10 characters DIs on the local
display
Default is "DI1 –
DIx". x is the
maximum
number of the
digital input.
Description String of max. Long name for Set

32 characters DIs. Default is
"Digital input 1 –
Digital input x".
x is the
maximum
number of the
digital input.
4.3 Virtual inputs and outputs

There are virtual inputs and virtual outputs that can in many places be used like
their hardware equivalents except that they are located in the memory of the
relay. The virtual inputs act like normal digital inputs. The status of the virtual input
can be changed via the local display, communication bus and Easergy Pro. For
example setting groups can be changed using virtual inputs.
Virtual inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the input can be
checked in the Matrix > Output matrix and Control > Virtual inputs setting
views. The status is also visible on local mimic display, if so selected. Virtual
inputs can be selected to be operated with the function buttons F1 and F2, the
66 P3U/en M/H006
local mimic or simply by using the virtual input menu. Virtual inputs have similar
functions as digital inputs: they enable changing groups, block/enable/disable
functions, to program logics and other similar to digital inputs.
The activation and reset delay of the input is approximately 5 ms.
Table 29 - Virtual inputs and outputs

Number of inputs 20
Number of outputs 20
Activation time / Reset time < 5 ms
Figure 19 - Virtual inputs and outputs can be used for many purpose in the
Output matrix setting view.
Figure 20 - Virtual inputs and outputs can be assigned directly to inputs/outputs of

logical operators
Notice the difference between latched and non-latched connection.
Virtual inputs and outputs can be used for many purposes in the Output matrix
setting view.
Virtual inputs and outputs can be assigned, latched or unlatched, directly to

inputs/outputs of logical operators.
Virtual inputs
The virtual inputs can be viewed, named and controlled in the Control > Virtual
inputs setting view.
P3U/en M/H006 67
Figure 21 - Virtual inputs view
68 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 22 - Names for virtual inputs view
Table 30 - Parameters of virtual inputs
VI1-VI20 0 Status of virtual

input
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
Names for virtual inputs (editable with Easergy Pro only)
Label String of max. Short name for Set

10 characters VIs on the local
display
Default is "VIn",
n = 1–20
Description String of max. Long name for Set

32 characters VIs. Default is
"Virtual input n",
n = 1–20
P3U/en M/H006 69
Virtual outputs
In Easergy Pro, the Virtual outputs setting view is located under Control.
Figure 23 - Virtual outputs view
70 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 24 - Names for virtual outputs view
Table 31 - Parameters of virtual outputs
0 Status of virtual output F

VO1-VO20
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
NAMES for VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (editable with Easergy Pro only)
Label String of Short name for VOs on the local Set

max. 10 display
characte
rs Default is "VOn", n=1-20
Description String of Long name for VOs. Default is Set

max. 32
characte "Virtual output n", n=1-20
rs
25) Set = An editable parameter (password needed). F = Editable when force flag is on.
P3U/en M/H006 71
4.4 Matrix
The relay has several matrices that are used for configuring the relay:
• Output matrix used to link protection stage signals, digital inputs, virtual
inputs, function buttons, object control, logic output, relay's internal alarms,
GOOSE signals and release latch signals to outputs, disturbance recorder trig
input and virtual outputs
• Block matrix used to block protection stages
• Object block matrix used to inhibit object control
• Auto-recloser matrix used to control auto-recloser
• Arc matrix used to control current and light signals to arc stages and arc
stages to the high-speed outputs
Figure 25 - Blocking matrix and output matrix

Protection stages
Directly
measured Block matrix Output matrix User’s logic
I values n
n START
TRIP I
V Calculate START N
n TRIP P
S, P, Q, U
START
cosφ, tanφ, n TRIP T
BLOCK
symmetric S
INPUT
components BLOCK
etc. INPUT
BLOCK
INPUT OUTPUTS
Virtual
inputs
Digital n
inputs
n Output relays Virtual
optional
DI delay and indicators outputs
n
and
inversion n
Output contacts
4.4.1 Output matrix
There are general-purpose LED indicators – "A", "B", "C" to ”H” – available for
customer-specific indications on the front panel. Their usage is define in a
separate output matrix.
There are two LED indicators specified for keys F1 and F2. The triggering of the
disturbance recorder (DR) and virtual outputs are configurable in the output
matrix.
A digital output or indicator LED can be configured as latched or non-latched. A

non-latched relay follows the controlling signal. A latched relay remains activated
although the controlling signal releases.
There is a common "release all latches" signal to release all the latched relays.
This release signal resets all the latched digital outputs and indicators. The reset
signal can be given via a digital input, via front panel or remotely through
communication. For instructions on how to release latches, see 4.5 Releasing
latches.
72 P3U/en M/H006
Trip and alarm relays together with virtual outputs can be assigned in the output
matrix. Also automatic triggering of disturbance recorder is done in the output
matrix.
Figure 26 - Output matrix example view
4.4.2 Blocking matrix
By means of a blocking matrix, the operation of any protection stage can be

blocked. The blocking signal can originate from the digital inputs or it can be a
start or trip signal from a protection stage or an output signal from the user's
programmable logic. In Figure 27 , an active blocking is indicated with a black dot
(●) in the crossing point of a blocking signal and the signal to be blocked.
All protection stages can be blocked in the block matrix
Figure 27 - Block matrix view
The Blocked status becomes visible only when the stage is about to activate.
Figure 28 - DI input blocking connection
P3U/en M/H006 73
Figure 29 - Result for the I> stage when the DI is active and the stage exceeds its
current start value
NOTICE
RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
• The blocking matrix is dynamically controlled by selecting and deselecting

protection stages.
• Activate the protection stages first, then store the settings in a relay. After
that, refresh the blocking matrix before configuring it.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of

the electrical installation.
4.4.3 Object block matrix
The object block matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, function
buttons, protection stage outputs, logic outputs, alarm signals and GOOSE
signals to inhibit the control of objects, that is, circuit breakers, isolators and
grounding switches.
Typical signals to inhibit controlling of the objects like circuit breaker are:
• protection stage activation

• statuses of other objects
• interlocking made with logic
• GOOSE signals
These and other signals are linked to objects in the object block matrix.
There are also event-type signals that do not block objects as they are on only for
a short time, for example "Object1" open and "Object1 close" signals.
4.4.4 Auto-recloser matrix
The auto-recloser matrix is used to link digital inputs, virtual inputs, protection
stage outputs, object statuses, logic outputs, alarm signals and GOOSE signals to
control the auto-recloser. For more information, see 5.35 Auto-recloser function
(ANSI 79).
74 P3U/en M/H006
4.5 Releasing latches

You can release latches using:
• Easergy Pro
• buttons and local panel display
• F1 or F2 buttons
4.5.1 Releasing latches using Easergy Pro
1. Connect Easergy Pro to the device.
2. From the Easergy Pro toolbar, select Device > Release all latches.
Figure 30 - Releasing all latches
Alternatively, go to Control > Release latches, and click the Release button.
Figure 31 - Release latches
4.5.2 Releasing latches using buttons and local panel display
Prerequisite: You have entered the correct password
1. Press .
2. Press .
3. Select Release, and press .

All latches are released.
P3U/en M/H006 75
4.5.3 Releasing latches using F1 or F2 buttons
You can use the function buttons F1 or F2 to release all latches after configuring
this function in Easergy Pro.
• To configure F1 to release latches:
a. In Easergy Pro, go to Control > Function buttons.
b. For F1, select F1 from the Selected control drop-down menu.
Figure 32 - Function buttons view
c. Go to Control > Release latches.
d. Select F1 from the DI to release latches drop-down menu.
e. Set 1 s delay for Latch release signal pulse.
Figure 33 - Release latches view
After this, pressing the F1 button on the relay’s front panel releases all
latches.
NOTE: The latch release signal can be activated only if the latched
output is active.
4.6 Controllable objects

The relay allows controlling eight objects, that is, circuit breakers, disconnectors
and grounding switches by the "select before operate" or "direct control" principle.
Controlling is possible in the following ways:
• through the object control buttons

• through front panel and display using single-line diagram
• through the function keys
76 P3U/en M/H006
• through digital input

• through remote communication
• through Easergy Pro setting tool
• through Smart APP
The connection of an object to specific controlling outputs is done via an output

matrix (object 1–8 open output, object 1–8 close output). There is also an output
signal “Object failed” that is activated if the control of an object is not completed.
Object states
Each object has the following states:
Setting Value Description
Object state Undefined (00) Actual state of the object
Open
Close
Undefined (11)
Basic settings for objects
Each object has the following settings:
Setting Value Description
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, Open information

virtual input or virtual output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
DI for ‘obj ready’ Ready information
Max ctrl pulse length 0.02–600 s Pulse length for open and
close commands. Control
pulse stops once object
changes its state
Completion timeout 0.02–600 s Timeout of ready indication
Object control Open/Close Direct object control
If changing the states takes longer than the time defined by the “Max ctrl pulse
length” setting, the object is inoperative and the “Object failure” matrix signal is
set. Also, an undefined event is generated. “Completion timeout” is only used for
the ready indication. If “DI for ‘obj ready’” is not set, the completion timeout has no
meaning.
Output signals of objects
Each object has two control signals in matrix:
P3U/en M/H006 77
Output signal Description
Object x Open Open control signal for the object
Object x Close Close control signal for the object
These signals send control pulse when an object is controlled by digital input,
remote bus, auto-reclose etc.
4.6.1 Object control with digital inputs
Objects can be controlled with digital inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. There
are four settings for each object:
Setting Active
DI for remote open / close control In remote state
DI for local open / close control In local state
If the relay is in local control state, the remote control inputs are ignored and vice
versa. An object is controlled when a rising edge is detected from the selected
input. The length of digital input pulse should be at least 60 ms.
4.6.2 Local or remote selection
In local mode, digital outputs can be controlled via the front panel but they cannot
be controlled via a remote serial communication interface.
In remote mode, digital outputs cannot be controlled via a front panel but they can
be controlled via a remote serial communication interface.
The local or remote mode can be selected by using the front panel or via one
selectable digital input. The digital input is normally used to change a whole
station to local or remote mode. You can select the L/R digital input in the Control
> Objects setting view in Easergy Pro.
Table 32 - Local or remote selection
Action Control through Easergy Pro Control through

or SmartApp communication protocol
Local/Remote Local Remote Local Remote

switch status
CB control Yes No No Yes
Setting or Yes Yes Yes Yes

configuration
changes
Communication Yes Yes Yes Yes

configuration
Virtual inputs 26) Yes No No Yes

26) Virtual inputs have a general parameter “Check L/R selection” for disabling the L/R check.
78 P3U/en M/H006
4.6.3 Object control with Close and Trip buttons
The relay also has dedicated control buttons for objects. Close stands for object
closing and Trip controls object open command internally. Control buttons are
configured in the Control > Objects setting view.
Table 33 - Parameters of function keys
Parameter Value Unit Description Set
Object for Obj1–Obj8 Set

control buttons
Button
closes selected
object if
password is
enabled
Button
opens selected
object if
password is
enabled
Mode for control Selective Control

butons operation needs
Direct
confirmation
(select before
operate)
Control
operation is
done without
confirmation
4.6.4 Object control with F1 and F2
Objects can be controlled with the function buttons F1 and F2.
By default, the F1 and F2 buttons are configured to control F1 and F2 variables

that can further be assigned to control objects.
P3U/en M/H006 79
Table 34 - Parameters of F1 and F2
Parameter Value State Pulse Description

length 27)
F1 F1, V1-V20, 0.1 0600 s

controls F1,
ObjCtrl
V1-V20 or
ObjCtrl
parameters.
F2 F2, V1-V20, 0.1 0-600 s

controls F2,
ObjCtrl
V1-V20 and
ObjCtrl
parameters.
27) Pulse length applies to values F1 and F2 only
You can configure the button funtions in the Control > Function buttons setting
view in Easergy Pro.
Figure 34 - Function buttons view
If ObjCtrl has been selected under Selected control, the selected object is
shown under Selected object. Otherwise, this column is empty.
When selecting ObjCtrl, link the function button to the appropriate object in the
Control > Objects setting view.
Figure 35 - Ctrl object 2 view
80 P3U/en M/H006
4.7 Logic functions

The relay supports customer-defined programmable logic for boolean signals.
User-configurable logic can be used to create something that is not provided by
the relay as a default. You can see and modify the logic in the Control > Logic
setting view in the Easergy Pro setting tool.
Table 35 - Available logic functions and their memory use
Logic functions No. of gates Max. no. of input Max. no. of logic
reserved gates outputs
AND 1
OR 1
XOR 1
AND+OR 2
32
CT (Count+Reset) 2
(An input gate can 20
INVAND 2
include any number
INVOR 2 of inputs.)
OR+AND 2
RS (Reset+Set) 2
RS_D (Set D+Load 4

+Reset)
The consumed memory is dynamically shown on the configuration view in

percentage. The first value indicates the memory consumption of inputs, the
second value the memory consumption of gates and the third value the memory
consumption of outputs.
The logic is operational as long the memory consumption of the inputs, gates or
outputs remains individually below or equal to 100%.
Figure 36 - Logic and memory consumption
P3U/en M/H006 81
Truth tables
Table 36 - Truth table
Gate Symbol Truth table
AND
A Y In Out
&
A Y
0 0
1 1
A Y In Out
&
A Y
0 1
1 0
A Y In Out
&
A B Y
B
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
0 0 0
A Y In Out
& A B Y
B
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 0 1
AND+OR A In Out
& Y
>1 A B Y
B
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
82 P3U/en M/H006
CT (Count+Reset) A In Out
Count
Y
CT A B Y Y
Reset
B
Cou Rese Setti New
nt t ng
1 3 0
1 3 0
1 3 1
1 3 0
INVAND In Out
A Y
¬& A B Y
B 0 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 1 0
INVOR A Y In Out
¬>1 A B Y
B 0 0 1
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
P3U/en M/H006 83
OR A Y In Out
>1 A B Y
B
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 1
A Y In Out
>1
A B Y
B
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
A In Out
Y
B >1 A B C Y
C
0 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
A In Out
Y
B >1 A B C Y
C
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0
84 P3U/en M/H006
OR+AND A In Out
&
Y
>1 A B Y
B
0 0 0
1 1 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
RS (Reset+Set) A In Out
Set
Y
RS A B Y
Reset
B Set Reset Y
1 0 1
0 0 128)
0 0 029)
X 1 030)
28) Output = 1 (latched), if
previous state was 1, 0, 1.
29) Output = 0, if previous state
was X, 1, 0.
30) Output = 0, if RESET = 1
regardless of state of SET.
P3U/en M/H006 85
RS_D (Set+D+Load+Reset) A B C D Y
A
R Set D Loa Re Stat
Reset Load D Set

B Y
C S d set e
D D 0 0 0 0 031)
1 X X 0 1
1 X X 1 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 032)
31) Initial
state
32) Thestate remains 1 until
Reset is set active
X = Any state
If Set or D + Load are high,

the state returns to high if
Reset returns to low.
XOR In Out
A
Y
B =1 A B C Y
C
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
28) Output = 1 (latched), if previous state was 1, 0, 1.

29) Output = 0, if previous state was X, 1, 0.
30) Output = 0, if RESET = 1 regardless of state of SET.
31) Initial state
32) The state remains 1 until Reset is set active
Logic element properties
After you have selected the required logic gate in Easergy Pro, you can change
the function of the gate in the Element properties window by clicking the gate.
86 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 37 - Logic element properties
Table 37 - Settings available for the logical gates depending on the selected
element
Property Description
Element properties
Type Change the logical function of the gate
Inverted Inverts the output state of the logical gate
ON delay Time delay to activate the output after

logical conditions are met
OFF delay Time delay for how long the gate remain
active even the logical condition is reset
Count Setting for counter (CT gate only)
Reverse Use to reverse AND and OR gates (AND

+OR gate only)
Inputs
Normal - / + Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs
Inverting - / + Use to increase or decrease number of

inverted inputs. This setting is visible for
INVAND and INVOR gates only
Count Use to increase or decrease number of

count inputs (CT gate only)
Reset Use to increase or decrease number of

count inputs (CT gate only)
AND Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs for AND gates (AND+OR gate only)
P3U/en M/H006 87
Property Description
OR Use to increase or decrease number of

inputs for OR gates (AND+OR gate only)
Set Use to increase or decrease number of Set

inputs (RS_D gate only)
D Use to increase or decrease number of

Data inputs (RS_D gate only)
Load Use to increase or decrease number of

Load inputs (RS_D gate only)
Reset Use to increase or decrease number of

Reset inputs (RS_D gate only)
4.8 Local panel

Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 have one LCD matrix display.
All the main menus are located on the left side of the display. To get to a
submenu, move up and down the main menus.
Figure 38 - Local panel's main menu
4.8.1 Mimic view
The mimic view is set as the local panel's main view as default. You can modify
the mimic according to the application or disable it, if it is not needed, via the
Easergy Pro setting tool.
You can modify the mimic in the General > Mimic setting view in Easergy Pro
and disable the mimic view in the General > Local panel conf setting view.
NOTE: The mimic itself or the local mimic settings cannot be modified via the
local panel.
88 P3U/en M/H006
Figure 39 - Mimic view
C A B F I
G
D
H
E F J
I
A. To clear an object or drawing, first point an F. The remote/local selection defines whether
empty square (A) with the mouse. Then point the certain actions are granted or not. In remote
object item with the mouse. The color of the object state, it is not possible to locally enable or
item turns red. To clear the whole mimic, click on disable auto-reclosing or to control objects. The
the empty area. remote/local state can be changed in Control >
Objects.
B. Text tool G. Creates auto-reclosing on/off selection to
mimic.
C. To move an existing drawing or object, point it H. Creates virtual input activation on the local
with the mouse. The color turns green. Hold down mimic view.
the left mouse button and move the object.
D. Different type of configurable objects. The I. Describes the relay's location. Text comes
object's number corresponds to the number in from the relay info menu.
Control > Objects.
E. Some predefined drawings. J. Up to six configurable measurements.
Table 38 - Mimic functionality
Sublocation Text field Up to 9 Set

characters.
Fixed location.
Object 1–8 1–8 Double-click on Set

top of the object
to change the
control number
between 1 and
8. Number 1
corresponds to
object 1 in
General >
Objects.
P3U/en M/H006 89
Remote/Local L Local / Remote Set

mode control. R
R
stands for
remote. Remote
local state can
be changed in
General >
Objects as well.
Position can be
changed.
Auto reclosing 0 Possible to Set

enable/disable
1
auto-reclosure
localy in local
mode (L) or
remotely in
remote mode
(R). Position
can be
changed.
90 P3U/en M/H006
Measurement IA–IC Up to 6 freely Set

display 1–6 selectable
I0
measurements.
VAB, VBC, VCA,
VA, VB, VC, VN
f, P, Q, S, P.F.
CosPhi
E+, Eq+, E-, Eq-
ARStart,
ARFaill,
ARShot1–5
IFLT
Starts, Trips
I0Calc
IA–ICda, IL
Pda, Qda, Sda
fSYNC, VSYNC
IA–ICMin, A–
CMax, A–
CdaMax
VAI1–VAI5
ExtAI1–633)
Virtual input 1–4 0 Change the Set

status of virtual
1
inputs while the
password is
enabled.
Position can be
changed.
33) Requires serial communication interface and External IO protocol activated.
Set = Settable.
NOTE: The measurement view's data selection depends on the voltage

measurement mode selected in the General > Scaling setting view.
4.8.2 Local panel configuration
You can modify the local panel configuration in the General > Local panel conf
setting view in Easergy Pro.
P3U/en M/H006 91
Figure 40 - Local panel configuration view
92 P3U/en M/H006
Table 39 - Local panel configuration parameters
Display 1–5 ILA-C 20 (5 x 4) freely Set36)

configurable
IN
measurement
VAB, VBC, VCA, values can be
VA, VB, VC, VN selected
f, P, Q, S, P.F.
CosPhi
E+, Eq+, E-, Eq-
ARStart,
ARFaill,
ARShot1–5
IFLT
Starts, Trips
IN Calc
Phase
currents
IA–Cda
IA–C max
IA–C min
IA–CdaMax
Pda, Qda,
Sda
T
fSYNC,
VSYNC
VAI1–5
ExtAI1–635)
SetGrp
Display contrast 50–210 Contrast can be Set

changed in the
relay menu as
well.
Display DI1–16 Activates the Set36)

backlight control backlight of the
VI1–4
display.
VO1–6
P3U/en M/H006 93
Panel reset Value range: min Configurable Set

timeout 0.0–2000.0 delay for the
front panel to
Default value:
return to the
15.0
default screen
when the front
panel is not
used.
When this value

is zero (0.0),
this timeout
never occurs.
Default screen Value range: Default screen Set

Mimic, Meas for the front
disp1, Meas panel.
disp2, Meas
If the selected
disp3, Meas
screen would
disp4, Meas
result in a blank
disp5
screen, the title
Default value: screen is used
Mimic as the default
screen.
Backlight off 0.0–2000.0 min Configurable Set

timeout delay for
backlight to
turns off when
the relay is not
used. Default
value is 60
minutes. When
value is zero
(0.0) backlight
stays on all the
time.
Enable alarm Selected Pop-up text box Set

screen for events. pop-
Unselected
up events can
be checked
individually by
pressing enter,
but holding the
button for 2
seconds checks
all the events at
once.
94 P3U/en M/H006
AR info for Selected Auto reclosure Set

mimic display status visible on
Unselected
top of the local
mimic view.
Sync I info for Selected Synchro-check Set

mimic display status visible on
Unselected
top of the local
mimic view.
Operates
together with
auto-reclosure.
Auto LED Selected Enables Set

release automatix LED
Unselected
release
functionality.
Auto LED 0.1–600 s Default 1.5 s. Set

release enable When new
time LEDs are
latched, the
previous active
latches are
released
automatically if
the set time has
passed.
Fault value PU, Pri Fault values per Set

scaling unit or primary
scsaled.
P3U/en M/H006 95
Local MIMIC Selected Enable or Set

disable the local
Unselected
mimic (enabled
as default).
When selected,
the mimic is the
local panel's
default main
view. When
unselected, the
measurement
view is the
default main
view.
Event buffer 50–2000 Event buffer Set37)

size size. Default
setting is 200
events.
34) Set = Settable
35) Requires serial communication interface and External IO protocol activated.
36) Inputs vary according to the relay type.
37) The existing events are lost if the event buffer size is changed.
96 P3U/en M/H006
5 Protection functions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
5 Protection functions
Each protection stage can independently be enabled or disabled according to the
requirements of the intended application.
5.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent elements

The current transformer (CT) must be sized according to the rules described here
for definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) to avoid saturation
during steady-state short-circuit currents where accuracy is required.
The nominal primary current must be selected according to the maximum short-
circuit current according to Equation 2.
Equation 2
Ik
ICTpri >
100
ICTpri = CT nominal primary current

Ik = Maximum short-circuit current
The condition to be fulfilled by the CT saturation current (Isat) depends on the type
of overcurrent protection operate time.
Table 40 - Condition to be fulfilled by CT saturation current
Time delay Condition to be fulfilled
DT Isat > 1.5 x set point (Is)
IDMT Isat > 1.5 x the curve value which is the smallest of these two values:
• Isc max., maximum installation shortcircuit current
• 20 x Is (IDMT curve dynamic range)
P3U/en M/H006 97
Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 5 Protection functions
Figure 41 - Overcurrent characteristics
A B
t t
I I
Is Isat Is Isat
C D
A. DT C. Minimum (Isc max., 20 Is)

B. IDMT D. 1.5 minimum (Isc max., 20 Is)
The method for calculating the saturation current depends on the CT accuracy
class.
5.1.1 CT requirements when settings are unknown
If no other information about the settings is available, these characteristics are

suitable for most situations.
Class P accuracy class

Table 41 - CT requirements
Rated Rated burden Accuracy CT Wiring

secondary (VAct) class and secondary resistance
current (Ins) accuracy resistance (Rw)
limit factor (Rct)
1A 2.5 VA 5P20 <3Ω < 0.075 Ω
5A 7.5 VA 5P20 < 0.2 Ω < 0.075 Ω
Class PX accuracy class
Vk / (Rct + Rw) > 30 x Ins
For 1 A: Vk > 30 x (Rct + Rw); for example: 30 x 3.9 = 117 V
For 5 A: Vk > 150 x (Rct + Rw); for example: 150 x 0.53 = 79.5 V
5.1.2 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class P
A class P CT is characterized by:

• Inp: rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: rated secondary current (in A)
• accuracy class, expressed by a percentage, 5P or 10P, followed by the
accuracy limit factor (ALF), whose usual values are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
98 P3U/en M/H006
• VAct: rated burden, whose usual values are 2.5/5/7.5/10/15/30 VA

• Rct: maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω)
The installation is characterized by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary

(wiring + protection device). If the CT load complies with the rated burden, that is,
Rw x Ins2 <= VAct, the saturation current is higher than ALF x Inp.
If the resistance Rct is known, it is possible to calculate the actual CT ALF which
takes account of the actual CT load. The saturation current equals the actual ALF
x Inp.
Equation 3
Rct × Ins2 + VAct

Actual ALF = ALF ×
(Rct + Rw) × Ins2
5.1.3 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class P
The saturation current for a CT is calculated with:

• transformation ratio: 100 A/5 A
• rated burden: 2.5 VA
• accuracy class and accuracy-limit factor: 5P20
• resistance of the secondary winding: 0.1 Ω
To have an ALF of at least 20, that is, a saturation current of 20 x Inp = 2 kA, the
load resistance Rw of the CT must be less than Equation 4.
Equation 4
VAct 2.5
Rw, max = = 2 = 0.1Ω
Ins2 5
This represents 12 m (39 ft) of wire with cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14) for a
resistance per unit length of approximately 8 Ω/km (2.4 mΩ/ft). For an installation
with 50 m (164 ft) of wiring with section 2.5 mm² (AWG 14), Rw = 0.4 Ω.
As a result, the actual ALF is as presented in Equation 5.
Equation 5
Rct × Ins2 + VAct 0.1 × 25 + 2.5

Actual ALF = ALF × 2 = 20× =8
(Rct + Rw) × Ins (0.1 + 0.4) × 25
Therefore, the saturation current Isat = 8 x Inp = 800 A.
NOTE: The impedance of an Easergy P3 protection device's current inputs

(0.004 Ω) is often negligible compared to the wiring resistance.
P3U/en M/H006 99
5.1.4 Principle for calculating the saturation current in class PX
A class PX CT is characterized by:

• Inp: rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: rated secondary current (in A)
• Vk: rated knee-point voltage (in V)
• Rct: maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in Ω)
The saturation current is calculated by the load resistance Rw at the CT

secondary (wiring + protection device) as shown in Equation 6.
Equation 6
Vk Inp
Isat = ×
Rct + Rw Ins
5.1.5 Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX
Table 42 - Examples of calculating the saturation current in class PX
CT Vk Rct Rw Saturation
Transformati current
on ratio
100 A/1 A 90 V 3.5 Ω 0.4 Ω Isat = 90 / (3,5 +

0,4) / 1 x Inp =
23,08 x Inp
100 A/5 A 60 V 0.13 Ω 0.4 Ω Isat = 60 / (0,13

+ 0,4) / 5 x Inp =
22,6 x Inp
5.2 Maximum number of protection stages in one application

The relay limits the maximum number of enabled protection stages to about 30.
The exact number depends on the central processing unit's load consumption and
available memory as well as the type of the stages.
The individual protection stage and total load status can be found in the
Protection > Protection stage status setting view in the Easergy Pro setting
tool.
5.3 General features of protection stages

Setting groups
Setting groups are controlled by using digital inputs, function keys or virtual
inputs, via the front panel or custom logic. When none of the assigned inputs are
active, the setting group is defined by the parameter ‘SetGrp no control state’.
100 P3U/en M/H006

When controlled input activates, the corresponding setting group is activated as

well. If the control signal of the setting group is lost, the setting “Keep last” forces
the last active group into use. If multiple inputs are active at the same time, the
active setting group is defined by ‘SetGrp priority’. By using virtual I/O, the active
setting group can be controlled using the local panel display, any communication
protocol or the built-in programmable logic functions. All protection stages have
four setting groups.
Figure 42 - Setting groups view
Example
Any digital input can be used to control setting groups but in this example, DI1,
DI2, DI3 and DI4 are chosen to control setting groups 1 to 4. This setting is done
with the parameter “Set group x DI control” where x refers to the desired setting
group.
P3U/en M/H006 101

Figure 43 - DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4 configured to control Groups 1 to 4 respectively
Use the 'SetGrp common change' parameter to force all protection stages to
group 1, 2, 3 or 4. The control becomes active if there is no local control in the
protection stage. You can activate this parameter using Easergy Pro.
“SetGrp priority” is used to give a condition to a situation where two or more

digital inputs, controlling setting groups, are active at the same time. SetGrp
priority could have values “1 to 4” or “4 to 1”.
Figure 44 - SetGrp priority setting in the Valid Protection stages view
Assuming that DI2 and DI3 are active at the same time and SetGrp priority is set
to “1 to 4”, setting group 2 becomes active. If SetGrp priority is reversed, that is,
set to “4 to 1”, the setting group 3 becomes active.
Protection stage statuses
The status of a protection stage can be one of the followings:
• Ok = ‘-‘
The stage is idle and is measuring the analog quantity for the protection. No
power system fault detected.
• Blocked
The stage is detecting a fault but blocked for some reason.

• Start
The stage is counting the operation delay.

• Trip
102 P3U/en M/H006

The stage has tripped and the fault is still on.
The blocking reason may be an active signal via the block matrix from other
stages, the programmable logic or any digital input. Some stages also have built-
in blocking logic. For more details about the block matrix, see 4.4.2 Blocking
matrix.
Protection stage counters
Each protection stage has start and trip counters that are incremented when the
stage starts or trips. The start and trip counters are reset on relay reboot.
Forcing start or trip condition for testing purposes
There is a "Forcing flag" parameter which, when activated, allows forcing the
status of any protection stage to be "start" or "trip" for half a second. By using this
forcing feature, current or voltage injection is not necessary to check the output
matrix configuration, to check the wiring from the digital outputs to the circuit
breaker and also to check that communication protocols are correctly transferring
event information to a SCADA system.
After testing, the forcing flag is automatically reset five minutes after the last local
panel push button activity.
The force flag also enables forcing the digital outputs and the optional mA
outputs.
The force flag can be found in the Device/Test > Relays setting view.
Figure 45 - Force flag
Start and trip signals
Every protection stage has two internal binary output signals: start and trip. The
start signal is issued when a fault has been detected. The trip signal is issued
after the configured operation delay unless the fault disappears before the end of
the delay time.
The hysteresis, as indicated in the protection stage's characteristics data, means

that the signal is regarded as a fault until the signal drops below the start setting
determined by the hysteresis value.
P3U/en M/H006 103

Figure 46 - Example behavior of an over-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis_GT
hysteresis
Start level
> Start
Output matrix
Using the output matrix, you can connect the internal start and trip signals to the
digital outputs and indicators. For more details, see 4.4.1 Output matrix.
Blocking
Any protection function can be blocked with internal and external signals using
the block matrix (4.4.2 Blocking matrix). Internal signals are for example logic
outputs and start and trip signals from other stages and external signals are for
example digital and virtual inputs as well as GOOSE signals.
Some protection stages have also built-in blocking functions. For example under-
frequency protection has built-in under-voltage blocking to avoid tripping when the
voltage is off.
When a protection stage is blocked, it does not trip if a fault condition is detected.
If blocking is activated during the operation delay, the delay counting is frozen
until the blocking goes off or the start reason, that is the fault condition,
disappears. If the stage is already tripping, the blocking has no effect.
Use 100 ms safety margin delay when the downstream relay’s protection start
signal is hardwired to interlock protection stages at the upstream relay.
Dependent time operation
The operate time in the dependent time mode is dependent on the magnitude of
the injected signal. The bigger the signal, the faster the stage issues a trip signal
and vice versa. The tripping time calculation resets if the injected quantity drops
below the start level.
104 P3U/en M/H006

Definite time operation
Figure 47 - Dependent time and definite time operation curves
IDMT DT
t (s)
If (A)
The operate time in the definite time mode is fixed by the Operation delay
setting. The timer starts when the protection stage activates and counts until the
set time has elapsed. After that, the stage issues a trip command. Should the
protection stage reset before the definite time operation has elapsed, then the
stage resets.
By default, the definite time delay cannot be set to zero because the value
contains processing time of the function and operate time of the output contact.
This means that the time indicated in the Definite time setting view is the actual
operate time of the function. Use the Accept zero delay setting in the protection
stage setting view to accept the zero setting for definite time function. In this case,
the minimum operate time of the function must be tested separately.
Overshoot time
Overshoot time is the time the protection device needs to notice that a fault has
been cleared during the operate time delay. This parameter is important when
grading the operate time delay settings between devices.
Figure 48 - Overshoot time

RetardationTime
tFAULT
tRET < 50 ms
DELAY SETTING > tFAULT + tRET
TRIP CONTACTS
If the delay setting would be slightly shorter, an unselective trip might occur (the
dash line pulse).
P3U/en M/H006 105

For example, when there is a big fault in an outgoing feeder, it might start both the
incoming and outgoing feeder relay. However, the fault must be cleared by the
outgoing feeder relay and the incoming feeder relay must not trip. Although the
operating delay setting of the incoming feeder is more than at the outgoing feeder,
the incoming feeder might still trip if the operate time difference is not big enough.
The difference must be more than the overshoot time of the incoming feeder relay
plus the operate time of the outgoing feeder circuit breaker.
Figure 48 shows an overvoltage fault seen by the incoming feeder when the
outgoing feeder clears the fault. If the operation delay setting would be slightly
shorter or if the fault duration would be slightly longer than in the figure, an
unselective trip might happen (the dashed 40 ms pulse in the figure). In Easergy
P3 devices, the overshoot time is less than 50 ms.
Reset time
Figure 49 shows an example of reset time, that is, release delay when the relay is
clearing an overcurrent fault. When the relay’s trip contacts are closed, the circuit
breaker (CB) starts to open. After the CB contacts are open, the fault current still
flows through an arc between the opened contacts. The current is finally cut off
when the arc extinguishes at the next zero crossing of the current. This is the start
moment of the reset delay. After the reset delay the trip contacts and start contact
are opened unless latching is configured. The precise reset time depends on the
fault size; after a big fault, the reset time is longer. The reset time also depends
on the specific protection stage.
The maximum reset time for each stage is specified under the characteristics of
every protection function. For most stages, it is less than 95 ms.
Figure 49 - Reset time
tSET
tCB
tRESET
TRIP CONTACTS
Reset time is the time it takes the trip or start relay contacts to open after the fault
has been cleared.
Hysteresis or dead band
When comparing a measured value against a start value, some amount of

hysteresis is needed to avoid oscillation near equilibrium situation. With zero
hysteresis, any noise in the measured signal or any noise in the measurement
itself would cause unwanted oscillation between fault-on and fault-off situations.
106 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 50 - Example behavior of an over-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis_GT
hysteresis
Start level
> Start
Figure 51 - Example behavior of an under-protection with hysteresis

Hysteresis_LT
hysteresis
Start level
< Start
Time grading
When a fault occurs, the protection scheme only needs to trip circuit breakers
whose operation is required to isolate the fault. This selective tripping is also
called discrimination or protection coordination and is typically achived by time
grading. Protection systems in successive zones are arranged to operate in times
that are graded through the sequence of equipment so that upon the occurrence
of a fault, although a number of protections devices respond, only those relevant
to the faulty zone complete the tripping function.
The recommended discrimination time between two Easergy P3 devices in an MV

network is 170–200 ms. This is based on the following facts:
• Tc: circuit breaker operating time, 60 ms
• Tm: upstream protection overshoot time (retardation time), 50 ms
• δt: time delay tolerance, 25 ms
• m: safety margin, 10 ms
• Δt: discrimination time, 170–200 ms
Figure 52 - Time grading
δt TC m Tm δt
time
Δt
Recorded values of the last eight faults
There is detailed information available on the last eight faults for each protection
stage. The recorded values are specific for the protection stages and can contain
P3U/en M/H006 107

information like time stamp, fault value, elapsed delay, fault current, fault voltage,
phase angle and setting group.
NOTE: The recorded values are lost if the relay power is switched off.
Squelch limit
Current inputs have a squelch limit (noise filter) at 0.005 x IN. When the
measured signal goes below this threshold level, the signal is forced to zero.
NOTE: If ICALC is used to measure the residual current, the squelch limit for
the ICALC signal is same as for the phase currents. The I0 setting range begins
at the level of phase currents' squelch limit. This can cause instability if the
minimum setting is used with the I0 CALC mode.
5.4 Application modes

The application modes available are the feeder protection mode and the motor
protection mode. In the feeder protection mode, all current dependent protection
functions are relative to nominal current IN derived by CT ratios. The motor
protection functions are unavailable in the feeder protection mode. In the motor
protection mode all current-dependent protection functions are relative to the
motor’s nominal current IMOT. The motor protection mode enables motor
protection functions. All functions which are available in the feeder protection
mode are also available in the motor protection mode. Default value of the
application mode is the feeder protection mode.
The application mode can be changed with Easergy Pro software or from CONF
menu of the relay. Changing the application mode requires configurator password.
5.5 Current protection function dependencies

The current-based protection functions are relative to the application mode. In the
motor mode, all of the current-based functions are relative to the motor's nominal
current (IMOT) and in the feeder mode to the current transformer's nominal current
(IN).
5.6 Dependent operate time

The dependent operate time – that is, the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
type of operation – is available for several protection functions. The common
principle, formula and graphic representations of the available dependent delay
types are described in this chapter.
Dependent delay means that the operate time depends on the measured real
time process values during a fault. For example, with an overcurrent stage using
dependent delay, a bigger a fault current gives faster operation. The alternative to
dependent delay is definite delay. With definite delay, a preset time is used and
the operate time does not depend on the size of a fault.
108 P3U/en M/H006

Stage-specific dependent delay
Some protection functions have their own specific type of dependent delay.
Details of these dedicated dependent delays are described with the appropriate
protection function.
Operation modes
There are three operation modes to use the dependent time characteristics:
• Standard delays
Using standard delay characteristics by selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE,

IEEE2, RI) and a delay type (Normal inverse, Very inverse etc). See 5.6.1
Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves.
• Standard delay formulae with free parameters
selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE, IEEE2) and defining one's own
parameters for the selected delay formula. This mode is activated by setting
delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing the delay function parameters A –
E. See 5.6.2 Custom curves.
• Fully programmable dependent delay characteristics
Building the characteristics by setting 16 [current, time] points. The relay

interpolates the values between given points with second degree polynomials.
This mode is activated by the setting curve family to ‘PrgN’'. There is a
maximum of three different programmable curves available at the same time.
Each programmed curve can be used by any number of protection stages.
See 5.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
When changing the dependent time (inverse curves) operation mode

settings manually through the device HMI, change both the Curve (Curve
delay family) and Type (Delay type) setting.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.
Dependent time limitation
The maximum dependent time is limited to 600 seconds.
Local panel graph
The relay shows a graph of the currently used dependent delay on the local panel
display. The up and down keys can be used for zooming. Also the delays at 20 x
ISET, 4 x ISET and 2 x ISET are shown.
Dependent time setting error signal
If there are any errors in the dependent delay configuration, the appropriate
protection stage uses the definite time delay.
There is a signal ‘Setting Error’ available in the output matrix that indicates
different situations:
P3U/en M/H006 109

1. Settings are currently changed with Easergy Pro or local panel.
2. There is temporarily an illegal combination of curve points. For example, if

previous setting was IEC/NI and then curve family is changed to IEEE, this
causes a setting error because there is no NI type available for IEEE curves.
After changing valid delay type for IEEE mode (for example MI), the ‘Setting
Error’ signal releases.
3. There are errors in formula parameters A – E, and the relay is not able to
build the delay curve.
4. There are errors in the programmable curve configuration, and the relay is not
able to interpolate values between the given points.
Limitations
The maximum measured secondary phase current is 50 x IN and the maximum

directly measured ground fault current is 10 x I0N for ground fault overcurrent
input. The full scope of dependent delay curves goes up to 20 times the setting.
At a high setting, the maximum measurement capability limits the scope of
dependent curves according to Table 43.
Table 43 - Maximum measured secondary currents and settings for phase and
ground fault overcurrent inputs
Current input Maximum measured Maximum secondary

secondary current scaled setting enabling
dependent delay times
up to full 20x setting
IA, IB, IC and IN Calc 250 A 12.5 A
IN = 5 A 50 A 2.5 A
IN = 1 A 10 A 0.5 A
1. Example of limitation
CT = 750 / 5
CT0 = 100 / 1 (cable CT is used for ground fault overcurrent)
For overcurrent stage 50/51 - 1, Table 43 gives 12.5 A. Thus, the maximum
setting the for 50/51 - 1 stage giving full dependent delay range is 12.5 A / 5 A
= 2.5 xIN = 1875 APrimary.
For ground fault stage 50N/51N-1, Table 43 gives 0.5 A. Thus, the maximum
setting for the 50N/51N-1 stage giving full dependent delay range is 0.5 A / 1
A = 0.5 xI0N = 50 APrimary.
2. Example of limitation
CT = 750 / 5
Application mode is Motor
Rated current of the motor = 600 A
IN Calc = ( IA + IB + IC) is used for ground fault overcurrent.
At secondary level, the rated motor current is 600 / 750*5 = 4 A
110 P3U/en M/H006

For overcurrent stage 50/51 - 1, Table 43 gives 12.5 A. Thus, the maximum
setting giving full dependent delay range is 12.5 A / 4 A = 3.13 x IMOT = 1875
APrimary.
For ground fault 50N/51N-1, Table 43 gives 12.5 A. Thus, the maximum
setting for the 50N/51N-1 stage giving full dependent delay range is 12.5 A / 5
A = 2.5 x I0N = 1875 APrimary.
5.6.1 Standard dependent delays using IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI curves
The available standard dependent delays are divided in four categories called
dependent curve families: IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI. Each category contains a set
of different delay types according to Table 44.
The dependent time setting error signal activates if the delay category is changed
and the old delay type does not exist in the new category. See 5.6 Dependent
operate time for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts when the measured value is twenty times
the setting, at the latest. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
to the measurement range. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
Table 44 - Available standard delay families and the available delay types within
each family
Delay type Curve family
DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 RI
DT Definite X
time
NI Normal X X
inverse
VI Very X X X
inverse
EI Extremely X X X
inverse
LTI Long time X X

inverse
LTEI Long time X

extremely
inverse
LTVI Long time X

very
inverse
P3U/en M/H006 111

Delay type Curve family
DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 RI
MI Moderately X X
inverse
STI Short time X

inverse
STEI Short time X

extremely
inverse
RI Old ASEA X
type
RXIDG Old ASEA X

type
IEC dependent operate time
The operate time depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 7. Actually this equation can only be used to draw graphs
or when the measured value I is constant during the fault. A modified version is
implemented in the relay for real time usage.
Equation 7
kA
t= B
 I 
  − 1
 I START 
t = Operation delay in seconds
k = User’s multiplier Inv. time coefficient k
I = Measured value
ISTART = Start setting
A, B = Constants parameters according to Table 45.
There are three different dependent delay types according to IEC 60255-3,
Normal inverse (NI), Extremely inverse (EI), Very inverse (VI) and a VI extension.
In addition, there is a de facto standard Long time inverse (LTI).
Table 45 - Constants for IEC dependent delay equation
Parameter
Delay type
A B
NI Normal inverse 0.14 0.02
EI Extremely inverse 80 2
112 P3U/en M/H006

Parameter
Delay type
A B
VI Very inverse 13.5 1
LTI Long time inverse 120 1
Example of the delay type "Normal inverse (NI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu (constant current)
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.14
B = 0.02
Equation 8
0.50 ⋅ 0.14
t= 0.02
= 5.0
4
  −1
2
The operate time in this example is five seconds. The same result can be read
from Figure 53.
P3U/en M/H006 113

Figure 53 - IEC normal inverse delay
IEC NI
B inverseDelayIEC_NI
A. Delay (s) B. I / Iset
114 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 54 - IEC extremely inverse delay
IEC EI
B inverseDelayIEC_EI
P3U/en M/H006 115

Figure 55 - IEC very inverse delay
IEC VI
B inverseDelayIEC_VI
116 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 56 - IEC long time inverse delay
IEC LTI
B inverseDelayIEC_LTI
IEEE/ANSI dependent operate time
There are three different delay types according to IEEE Std C37.112-1996 (MI, VI,
EI) and many de facto versions according to Table 46. The IEEE standard defines
dependent delay for both trip and release operations. However, in the Easergy P3
relay only the trip time is dependent according to the standard but the reset time
is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 9. Actually, this equation can only be used to draw graphs
implemented in the relay for real-time usage.
Equation 9
 
 
 A 
t=k  C
+ B
  I  − 1 
  I START  
 
k = User’s multiplier
P3U/en M/H006 117

I = Measured value
A,B,C = Constant parameter according to Table 46
Table 46 - Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay equation
Delay type Parameter
A B C
LTI Long time 0.086 0.185 0.02

inverse
LTVI Long time very 28.55 0.712 2

inverse
LTEI Long time 64.07 0.250 2

extremely
inverse
MI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02

inverse
VI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 2
EI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2

inverse
STI Short time 0.16758 0.11858 0.02

inverse
STEI Short time 1.281 0.005 2

extremely
inverse
Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.0515
B = 0.114
C = 0.02
Equation 10
 
 
 0.0515
t = 0.50 ⋅ + 0.1140 = 1.9
  4  0.02 
  −1 
  2  
118 P3U/en M/H006

The operate time in this example is 1.9 seconds. The same result can be read
from Figure 60.
Figure 57 - ANSI/IEEE long time inverse delay
IEEE LTI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTI
P3U/en M/H006 119

Figure 58 - ANSI/IEEE long time very inverse delay
IEEE LTVI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTVI
120 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 59 - ANSI/IEEE long time extremely inverse delay
IEEE LTEI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_LTEI
P3U/en M/H006 121

Figure 60 - ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse delay
IEEE MI
B inverseDelayIEEE1_MI
122 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 61 - ANSI/IEEE short time inverse delay
IEEE STI
B inverseDelayIEEE1 STI
P3U/en M/H006 123

Figure 62 - ANSI/IEEE short time extremely inverse delay
IEEE STEI
B inverseDelayIEEE1 STEI
IEEE2 dependent operate time
Before the year 1996 and ANSI standard C37.112 microprocessor relays were
using equations approximating the behavior of various induction disc type relays.
A quite popular approximation is Equation 11 which in Easergy P3 relays is called
IEEE2. Another name could be IAC because the old General Electric IAC relays
have been modeled using the same equation.
There are four different delay types according to Table 47. The old
electromechanical induction disc relays have dependent delay for both trip and
release operations. However, in Easergy P3 relays, only the trip time is
dependent and the reset time is constant.
The operate delay depends on the measured value and other parameters
according to Equation 11. Actually, this equation can only be used to draw graphs
implemented in the relay for real-time usage.
124 P3U/en M/H006

Equation 11
 
 
 B D E 
t = k A + + 2
+ 3
 I 
  − C   I − C   I − C  

  I START   I START 

I
 START
 
 
I = Measured value
ISTART = User’s start setting
A, B, C, D = Constant parameter according to Table 47.
Table 47 - Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay equation
Parameter
Delay type
A B C D E
MI Moderately 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271

inverse
NI Normally 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -0.1899 9.1272

inverse
VI Very 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505

inverse
EI Extremely 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222

inverse
Example of the delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8
D = -0.08
E = 0.127
P3U/en M/H006 125

Equation 12
 
 
0.6791 − 0.08 0.127 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.1735 + + + = 0.38
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
from Figure 63.
Figure 63 - IEEE2 moderately inverse delay
IEEE2 MI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_MI
126 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 64 - IEEE2 normal inverse delay
IEEE2 NI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_NI
P3U/en M/H006 127

Figure 65 - IEEE2 very inverse delay
IEEE2 VI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_VI
128 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 66 - IEEE2 extremely inverse delay
IEEE2 EI
B inverseDelayIEEE2_EI
RI and RXIDG type dependent operate time
These two dependent delay types have their origin in old ASEA (nowadays ABB)
ground fault relays.
The operate delay of types RI and RXIDG depends on the measured value and
other parameters according to Equation 13 and Equation 14. Actually, these
equations can only be used to draw graphs or when the measured value I is
constant during the fault. Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real-
time usage.
Equation 13 Equation 14
k I
t RI = t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln
0.236 k I START
0.339 −
 I 
 
 I START 
t = Operate delay in seconds
I = Measured value
P3U/en M/H006 129

Example of the delay type RI
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
Equation 15
0.5
t RI = = 2.3
0.236
0.339 −
4
 
2
from Figure 67.
Example of the delay type RXIDG

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
Equation 16
4
t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln = 3.9
0.5 ⋅ 2
from Figure 68.
130 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 67 - RI dependent delay
RI
B inverseDelayRI
P3U/en M/H006 131

Figure 68 - RXIDG dependent delay
5.6.2 Custom curves
This mode is activated by the setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing
the delay function constants, that is, the parameters A – E. The idea is to use the
standard equations with one’s own constants instead of the standardized
constants as in the previous chapter.
Example of the GE-IAC51 delay type:
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
ISTART = 2 pu
A = 0.2078
B = 0.8630
C = 0.8000
D = - 0.4180
E = 0.1947
132 P3U/en M/H006

Equation 17
 
 
 0.8630 − 0.4180 0.1947 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.2078 + + + = 0.37
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
The operate time in this example is 0.37 seconds.
The resulting time/current characteristic of this example matches quite well the
characteristic of the old electromechanical IAC51 induction disc relay.
The dependent time setting error signal actives if interpolation with the given
parameters is not possible. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts at the latest when the measured value is
twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
5.6.3 Programmable dependent time curves
Programming dependent time curves requires Easergy Pro setting tool and
rebooting the unit.
The [current, time] curve points are programmed using Easergy Pro PC program.
There are some rules for defining the curve points:
• the configuration must begin from the topmost line
• the line order must be as follows: the smallest current (longest operate time)
on the top and the largest current (shortest operate time) on the bottom
• all unused lines (on the bottom) should be filled with [1.00 0.00s]
Here is an example configuration of curve points:
Point Current I/ISTART Operate delay
1 1.00 10.00 s
2 2.00 6.50 s
3 5.00 4.00 s
4 10.00 3.00 s
5 20.00 2.00 s
6 40.00 1.00 s
7 1.00 0.00 s
8 1.00 0.00 s
P3U/en M/H006 133

Point Current I/ISTART Operate delay
9 1.00 0.00 s
10 1.00 0.00 s
11 1.00 0.00 s
12 1.00 0.00 s
13 1.00 0.00 s
14 1.00 0.00 s
15 1.00 0.00 s
16 1.00 0.00 s
The dependent time setting error signal activates if interpolation with the given
points fails. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay starts at the latest when the measured value is
twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at high setting values due
134 P3U/en M/H006

5.7 Synchronism check (ANSI 25)
ANSI 25 Feeder Motor
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The relay includes a function that checks the synchronism before giving or
enabling the circuit breaker close command. The function monitors the voltage
amplitude, frequency and phase angle difference between two voltages. Since
there are two stages available, it is possible to monitor three voltages. The
voltages can be busbar and line or busbar and busbar (bus coupler).
Figure 69 - Synchronism check function
Close
Request
cmd
Side 1 V1= V2 & Sync fail
Side 2 f 1 = f2
φ1= φ2 & & CB close
Register
V1 event
V2 & ≥1 Sync OK
Timeout Settings Sync Voltage Bypass

mode mode
The synchronism check stage includes two separate synchronism criteria that can
be used separately or combined:
• voltage only
• voltage, frequency, and phase
The voltage check simply compares voltage conditions of the supervised objects.
The supervised object is considered dead (not energized) when the measured
voltage is below the Vdead setting limit. Similarly, the supervised object is
considered live (energized) when the measured voltage is above the Vlive setting
limit. Based on the measured voltage conditions and the selected voltage check
criteria, synchronism is declared.
When the network sections to be connected are part of the same network, the
frequency and phase are the same. Therefore, the voltage check criteria is safe to
use without frequency and phase check.
The frequency and phase check compares the voltages, frequency and phase of
the supervised objects. Synchronism is declared if the voltages are above the
Vlive limit and all three difference criteria are within the given limits. This
synchronism check is dynamic by nature, and the object close command is given
at a certain moment of time, depending on the selected mode of operation.
When two networks are running at slightly different frequencies, there is also a
phase difference between these two networks. Because of the different frequency,
P3U/en M/H006 135

the phase angle tends to rotate. The time for one cycle depends on the frequency
difference. The stress for electrical components is lowest when two networks are
connected at zero phase difference.
In the “Sync” mode, the circuit breaker closing is aimed at the moment of zero
phase difference. Therefore, the close command is advanced by the time defined
by the CB close time setting. In the “Async” mode, the circuit breaker closing is
aimed at the moment when the synchronism conditions are met, that is, when the
phase difference is within the given phase difference limit.
When two network sections to be connected are from different sources or

generators, the voltage criteria alone is not safe, so also frequency and phase
check must be used.
When two networks with different frequencies are to be connected, the request
timeout setting must be long enough to allow the synchronism criteria to be met.
For example, if the frequency difference is 0.1 Hz, the synchronism criteria is met
only once in ten seconds.
The synchronism check stage starts from an object close command that
generates a request to close the selected circuit breaker when the synchronism
conditions are met. The synchronism check stage provides a "request" signal that
is active from the stage start until the synchronism conditions are met or the
request timeout has elapsed. When the synchronism conditions are not met within
the request timeout, a “fail” pulse is generated. The fail pulse has a fixed length of
200 ms. When the synchronism conditions are met in a timely manner, the object
close command is initiated for the selected object. This signal is purely internal
and not available outside the synchronism check stage. When the synchronism
conditions are met, the “OK” signal is always active. The activation of the bypass
input bybasses the synchronism check and declares synchronism at all times.
The request, OK, and fail signals are available in the output matrix.
The synchronized circuit breaker close execution order is shown in Figure 70.
Figure 70 - Synchronism check execution order
1 2 3
A B C
4 5
A. Synchronism check stage

B. Object
C. Circuit breaker (physical)
1. Object close command from mimic, digital inputs or communication protocol
2. Synchronism declared
3. Circuit breaker close command
4. Sync fail signal if request timeout elapsed before synchronism conditions met
5. Object fail signal if CB failed to operate
136 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 71 - Synchronism check function principle
A B
1
C D
1. Sync request
2. Sync OK
3. Object close command
A. The object close command given (mimic or bus) actually only makes a sync request.
B. The sync request ends when the synchronism conditions are met and CB command is given or
if the request timeout elapsed.
C. If the request timeout elapsed before synchronism conditions are met, sync fail pulse is
generated.
D. Normal object close operation
The synchronism check function is available when one of the following analog
measurement modules and a suitable measuring mode are in use:
Table 48 - Voltage measuring modes
Voltage measuring mode Number of synchrocheck stages
3LN+LLy 1
3LN+LNy 1
2LL+VN+LLy 1
2LL+VN+LNy 1
LL+VN+LLy+LLz 2
LN+VN+LNy+LNz 2
Connections for synchronism check
The voltage used for checking the synchronism is always line-to-line voltage VAB
even when VA is measured. The sychronism check stage 1 always compares VAB
with VABy. The compared voltages for the stage 2 can be selected (VAB/VABy,
VAB/VABz, VABy/VABz). See 9.7 Voltage system configuration.
NOTE: To perform its operation, the synchronism check stage 2 converts the
voltages LNy and LNz to line-to-line voltage VAB. As such, the measured
voltage for LNy and LNz must be VA-N.
NOTE: The wiring of the secondary circuits of voltage transformers to the

relay terminal depends on the selected voltage measuring mode.
See the synchronism check stage's connection diagrams in See 9.7 Voltage
system configuration.
P3U/en M/H006 137

Characteristics
Table 49 - Synchronism check function (25)
Synchronism check mode (SMODE) Off; Async; Sync 38) 39) 40)
Voltage check mode (VMODE) DD; DL; LD; DD/DL; DD/LD; DL/LD;
DD/DL/LD 41) 42) 43) 44)
CB closing time 0.04–0.6 s
VDEAD limit setting 10–120% VN
VLIVE limit setting 10–120% VN
Frequency difference 0.01–1.00 Hz
Voltage difference 1–60% VN
Phase angle difference 2°–90°
Request timeout 0.1–600.0 s
Stage operation range 46.0–64.0 Hz
Reset ratio (V) 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- voltage ±3% VN
- frequency ±20 mHz
- phase angle ±2° (when Δf < 0.2 Hz, else ±5°)
- operate time ±1% or ±30 ms

38) Off – Frequency and phase criteria not in use
39) Async – dF, dU and d angle criteria are used. Circuit breaker close is aimed at the moment when
the phase angle is within phase angle difference limit. Slip frequency dF determines how much the
close command needs to be advanced to make the actual connection at the moment when the phase
angle is within the phase angle limit
40) Sync mode – d , d and d angle criteria are used. Circuit breaker close is aimed at the moment
F U
when the phase angle becomes zero. Slip frequency dF determines how much the close command
needs to be advanced to make the actual connection at zero phase angle.
41) The first letter refers to the reference voltage and the second letter to the comparison voltage.
42) D means that the side must be “dead” when closing (dead = The voltage is below the dead voltage
limit setting).
43) L means that the side must be “live” when closing (live = The voltage is higher than the live voltage
limit setting).
44) Example: DL mode for stage 1: The U12 side must be “dead” and the U12y side must be “live”.
138 P3U/en M/H006

5.8 Undervoltage (ANSI 27)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
Undervoltage protection is used to detect voltage dips or sense abnormally low

voltages to trip or trigger load shedding or load transfer. The function measures
the three line-to-line voltages, and whenever the smallest of them drops below the
start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If
the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
Blocking during voltage transformer fuse failure
As all the protection stages, the undervoltage function can be blocked with any
internal or external signal using the block matrix. For example if the secondary
voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a fuse failure
(See the voltage transformer supervision function in 6.8 Voltage transformer
supervision (ANSI 60FL)). The blocking signal can also be a signal from the
custom logic (see 4.7 Logic functions).
Low-voltage self blocking
The stages can be blocked with a separate low-limit setting. With this setting, the
particular stage is blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages
drops below the given limit. The idea is to avoid unwanted tripping when the
voltage is switched off. If the operate time is less than 0.08 s, the blocking level
setting should not be less than 15% for the blocking action to be fast enough. The
self blocking can be disabled by setting the low-voltage block limit equal to zero.
Figure 72 - Example of low-voltage self blocking
A
K K K
I
B
C
J J
H J
D
G
L L F
A. VLLmax = max (VAB, VBC, VCA)

B. Deadband
C. V< setting
P3U/en M/H006 139

D. Block limit
E. V< undervoltage state
F. Time
G. The maximum of the three line-to-line voltages VLLmax is below the block limit. This is not
regarded as an undervoltage situation.
H. The voltage VLLmax is above the block limit but below the start level. This is an undervoltage
situation.
I. The voltage is OK because it is above the start limit.
J. This is an undervoltage situation.
K. The voltage is OK.
L. The voltage VLLmax is under the block limit and this is not regarded as an undervoltage situation.
Three independent stages
There are three separately adjustable stages: 27-1, 27-2 and 27-3. All these
stages can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for all stages.
Characteristics
Table 50 - Undervoltage (27–1)
Start value 20–120% VN (step 1%)
Definite time characteristic:
- Operate time 0.0845) – 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis (reset ratio) 1.001–1.200 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0–80% VN
Start time Typically 60 ms
Release delay 0.06–300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Overshoot time < 50 ms
Reset ratio (Block limit) 0.5 V or 1.03 (3%)
Reset ratio 1.03 (depends on the hysteresis setting)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of the set value
- Blocking ±3% of set value or ±0.5 V
- Operate time ±1% or ±30 ms

45) This
is the instantaneous time, that is, the minimum total operate time including the fault detection
time and the operate time of the trip contacts. Use the Accept zero delay setting in the protection
stage setting view in Easergy Pro to accept the zero operate time setting for the DT function.
140 P3U/en M/H006

Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

46) This

Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

47) This
P3U/en M/H006 141

5.9 Directional power (ANSI 32)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The directional power function can be used, for example, to disconnect a motor if
the supply voltage is lost and thus prevent power generation by the motor. It can
also be used to detect loss of load of a motor.
The directional power function is sensitive to active power. For the directional
power function, the start value is negative. For the underpower function, a positive
start value is used. Whenever the active power goes under the start value, the
stage starts and issues a start signal. If the fault situation stays on longer than the
delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
The start setting range is from -200% to +200% of the nominal apparent power
SN. The nominal apparent power is determined by the configured voltage and
current transformer values.
Equation 18
S n = VTRated Pr imary ⋅ CTRated Pr imary ⋅ 3
There are two identical stages available with independent setting parameters.
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for all stages.
Characteristics
Table 53 - Directional power stages 32-1, 32-2

Start value -200.0 to +200.0% SN (step 0.5)
Definite time function:
- Operate time 0.3–300.0 s (step 0.1)
Reset time < 500 ms
142 P3U/en M/H006

Reset ratio 1.05
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±3% of set value or ±0.5% of rated value
- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or ±150 ms
NOTE: When the start setting is +1 to +200% , an internal block is activated if

the maximum voltage of all phases drops below 5% of rated.
P3U/en M/H006 143

5.10 Phase undercurrent (ANSI 37)
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The phase undercurrent stage measures the fundamental component of the

phase currents.
The stage I< can be configured for definite time characteristic.
The undercurrent stage protects rather the relay driven by the motor, for example
a submersible pump, than the motor itself.
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for each stage.
Characteristics
Table 54 - Phase undercurrent I< (37)
Current setting range 20 – 70 %IN or %IMOT (step 1%)
Definite time characteristic: -
- operate time 0.3 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)
Block limit 15 % (fixed)
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio >1.05
Accuracy: -
- Starting ±2% of set value or ±0.5% of the rated

value
- Operate time
±1 % or ±150 ms
NOTE: Stage Blocking is functional when all phase currents are below the
block limit.
144 P3U/en M/H006

5.11 Broken conductor (ANSI 46BC)
ANSI Feeder Motor

46BC
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The purpose of the unbalance stage is to detect unbalanced load conditions, for
example a broken conductor of a heavy-loaded overhead line if there is no ground
fault. The operation of the unbalanced load function is based on the negative
phase sequence component I2 related to the positive phase sequence component
I1. This is calculated from the phase currents using the method of symmetrical
components. The function requires that the measuring inputs are connected
correctly so that the rotation direction of the phase currents are as in 9.6.7
Connection examples. The unbalance protection has definite time operation
characteristic.
Equation 19
I2
K2 =
I1
I1 = IA + aIB + a2IC
I2 = IA + a2IB + aIC
Equation 20
, a phasor rotating constant
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2
Characteristics
Table 55 - Broken conductor (46BC) in feeder mode
Settings:
- Setting range I2 / I1> 2–70% (step 1%)
- Operate time 1.0–600.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time < 450 ms
P3U/en M/H006 145

Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±1% - unit

146 P3U/en M/H006

5.12 Negative sequence overcurrent (ANSI 46)
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
Negative sequence overcurrent in a motor causes double frequency currents in

the rotor. This warms up the surface of the rotor, and the available thermal
capacity of the rotor is much less than the thermal capacity of the whole motor.
Thus, RMS-current-based overload protection (see 5.16 Thermal overload (ANSI
49 RMS)) is not capable of protecting a motor against negative sequence
overcurrent.
The negative sequence overcurrent protection is based on the negative sequence

of the base frequency phase currents. Both definite time and dependent time
characteristics are available.
Dependent time delay
The dependent time delay is based on the following equation:
Equation 21
K1
T= 2
 I2 
  − K 22
 I MOT 
T = Operate time
K1 = Delay multiplier
I2 = Measured and calculated negative sequence phase current of fundamental

frequency
K2 = Start setting I2 > in pu. The maximum allowed degree of unbalance.
Example
K1 = 15 s
I2 = 22.9 % = 0.229 x IMOT
K2 = 5 % = 0.05 x IMOT
15
t= 2
= 300.4
 0.229  2
  − 0.05
 1 
P3U/en M/H006 147

The operate time in this example is five minutes.
More stages (definite time delay only)
If more than one definite time delay stages are needed for negative sequence
overcurrent protection, the freely programmable stages can be used (5.39
Programmable stages (ANSI 99)).
Figure 73 - Dependent operation delay of negative sequence overcurrent I2 >

(ANSI 46). The longest delay is limited to 1000 seconds (=16min 40s).
CurrentUnbalanceChar
2000
1000
500 K2 = 2 % K 2 = 40 % K 2 = 70 %
200
100 K1 = 50 s
A 50
K2 = 2 % K 2 = 40 % K 2 = 70 %
20
10
5
K1 = 1 s
2
1
0 20 40 60 80 100
B
A. Operate time (s) B. Negative sequence current I2%
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available.
Characteristics
Table 56 - Negative sequence overcurrent I2 > (46) in motor mode 46–1
Start value 2–70% (step 1%)
Dependent time characteristic:
- 1 characteristic curve Inv
- Time multiplier 1–50 s (step 1)
- Upper limit for dependent time 1000 s
Reset time < 450 ms
148 P3U/en M/H006

Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
NOTE: The stage is operational when all secondary currents are above 250
mA.
P3U/en M/H006 149

5.13 Incorrect phase sequence (ANSI 47)
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The incorrect phase sequence detection prevents the motor from being started to
wrong direction, thus protecting the load.
When the ratio between negative and positive sequence current exceeds 80%
and the average of three phase currents exceeds 0.2 x IMOT in the start-up
situation, the phase sequence stage starts and trips 100 ms after start-up.
Setting groups
This stage has one setting group.
Characteristics
Table 57 - Incorrect phase sequence I2>> (47)
Setting: 80 % (fixed)
Operate time <120 ms
Reset time < 105 ms
NOTE: Stage is blocked when motor has been running for 2 seconds.
Stage is operational only when least one of the currents is above 0.2 x IMOT
150 P3U/en M/H006

5.14 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (ANSI 47)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
This protection stage can be used to detect voltage unbalance and phase
reversal situations. It calculates the fundamental frequency value of the negative
sequence component V2 based on the measured voltages (for calculation of V2,
see 3.10 Symmetrical components).
Whenever the negative sequence voltage V2 raises above the user's start setting
of a particular stage, this stage starts, and a start signal is issued. If the fault
situation remains on longer than the user's operate time delay setting, a trip signal
is issued.
Blocking during VT fuse failure
Like all the protection stages, the negative sequence overvoltage can be blocked
with any internal or external signal using the block matrix, for example, if the
secondary voltage of one of the measuring transformers disappears because of a
fuse failure (See VT supervision function in 6.8 Voltage transformer supervision
(ANSI 60FL)).
The blocking signal can also be a signal from the user's logic (see 4.7 Logic
functions).
There are three separately adjustable stages: 47-1, 47-2, and 47-3. Both stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available for all stages. Switching between setting
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs (mimic display,
communication, logic) and manually.
Characteristics
Table 58 - Negative sequence overvoltage protection (47)
Start value: 47-1, 47-2, 47-3 2–120%
Operate time 0.08–300 s
P3U/en M/H006 151

Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
152 P3U/en M/H006

5.15 Motor start-up supervision (ANSI 48)
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The motor start-up supervision IST> protects the motor against prolonged direct-
on-line (DOL) starts caused by, for example, a stalled rotor, too high inertia of the
load or too low voltage. It measures the fundamental frequency component of the
phase currents.
The IST> stage can be configured for definite operate time or dependent operate
time characteristic. For a weak voltage supply, the dependent characteristic is
useful allowing more start time when a voltage drop decreases the start current
and increases the start time. Equation 22 defines the dependent operate time.
Figure 74 shows an example of the dependent characteristic.
Figure 74 - Example of a dependent operate time delay of the motor start-up

supervision stage
Istart = 6 pu, rated start current

Tstart = 15 s, maximum allowed start time
Time (s)
Tstart
Current (pu) Istart
If the measured current is less than the specified start current ISTART, the operate
time is longer than the specified start time TSTART and vice versa.
Equation 22
2
I 
T =  START TSTART
 I MEAS 
T = Dependent operate time
P3U/en M/H006 153

ISTART = Rated start current of the motor “Nom motor start current IMOTST. The
default setting is 6.00xIMOT.
IMEAS = Measured current
TSTART = Maximum allowed start time “Inv. time coefficient” k> for the motor at
rated voltage
The start setting “Motor start detection current” IST > is the start detection level of
the start current. When the current has been less than 10% of IMOT and then
within 200 milliseconds exceeds the setting IST >, the motor start-up supervision
stage starts to count the operate time TSTART. When the current drops below 120
% x IMOT, the motor start-up supervision stage releases. The motor start-up
supervision is only active during the starting of the motor.
Block diagram
Figure 75 - Block diagram of motor start-up supervision IST>
Istlohko
Im1
Im2 MAX > ts tr
& G
Im3
& H
A t
>1 I
& H
B C D E F
A. Block F. Enable events

B. Motor nominal start current G. Start
C. Delay H. Register event
D. Definite / dependent time I. Trip
E. Dependent delay
Motor status view
There are three possible statuses for a motor.
• Motor stopped: the motor average current is less than 10% of the motor
nominal current (IMOT).
• Motor starting: To reach the starting position, the motor has to be stopped for
at least 500 ms before starting. The average motor current has to increase
above the motor start detection current (setting value) within 200 ms. The
motor remains starting as long as the terms for turning into running condition
are not fulfilled.
• Motor running: The motor can change to the running position from both
stopped and starting position. The low limit for motor running is 20% and the
high limit 120% of IMOT.
154 P3U/en M/H006

The motor status can be viewed via Easergy Pro software or via the device's front
panel (Mstat). The starting and running statuses can be found on the output and
block matrix. Therefore, it is possible to use these signals for tripping or indication
and for blocking purposes.
Figure 76 - Motor status via Easergy Pro and local panel
Figure 77 - Motor status in output and block matrix
Normal starting sequence
The default value for the motor start detection is six times the motor nominal
value. The motor current is
IA+IB+IC
3
P3U/en M/H006 155

Figure 78 - Normal starting sequence
G
A
B H
C
E
D
F
A. Motor start detection current

B. Motor running high limit (120% of IMOT)
C. Motor stopped limit (10% of IMOT)
D. Motor current
E. Stopped for 500 ms before starting
F. Motor current exceeds the start detection current (200 ms)
G. Starting
H. Running
Soft start
Frequency converter drives and soft starter applications do not initiate the motor
start signal because of the low current during motor start. The motor changes
directly from stopped to running position when the current increases to a certain
level.
The motor current is
IA+IB+IC
3
Figure 79 - Soft starting sequence
F
A
B
D
C
E
A Motor running limit (20% of IMOT)

B. Motor stopped limit (10% of IMOT)
C. Motor current
D. Stopped for 500 ms
E. Motor current exceeds the motor running limit (200 ms)
F. Running
156 P3U/en M/H006

Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 59 - Motor start-up supervision (48) in motor mode
Setting range: -
- Motor start detection current, IST> 1.30–10.00 x IMOT (step 0.01)
- Nominal motor start current, IMOTST 1.50–10.00 x IMOT (step 0.01)
Delay type DT, INV
Definite time characteristic (DT): -
- operate time 1.0–300.0 s (step 0.1) 48)
Dependent time characteristic (INV): -
- operate delay 1.0–300.0 s (step 0.1)
- dependent time coefficient, k 1.0–200.0 s (step 0.1)
Minimum motor stop time to activate motor 500 ms

start-up supervision
Maximum current raise time from motor 200 ms

stop to start
Motor stopped limit 0.10 x IMOT
Motor running lower limit 0.20 x IMOT
Motor running limit after starting 1.20 x IMOT
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio <0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or at ±30 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms

48) This
is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the fault detection
time and operation time of the trip contacts.
NOTE: Motor stopped and running limits are based on the average of three
phase currents.
P3U/en M/H006 157

5.16 Thermal overload (ANSI 49 RMS)
ANSI 49M Feeder Motor ANSI 49F Feeder Motor
P3U10 x P3U10 x
P3U20 x P3U20 x
P3U30 x P3U30 x
Description
The thermal overload function (ANSI 49F) protects cables in the feeder mode
against excessive heating.
The thermal overload function (ANSI 49M) protects the motor in the motor mode
against excessive heating.
Thermal model
The temperature is calculated using RMS values of phase currents and a thermal
model according IEC60255-149. The RMS values are calculated using harmonic
components up to the 15th.
Trip time:
2
I 2 − IP
t = τ ⋅ ln
I 2 − a2
Alarm (alarm 60% = 0.6):
a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE ⋅ alarm
Trip:
a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
Reset time:
2
I
t = τ ⋅ Cτ ⋅ ln 2 P 2
a −I
Trip release:
a = 0.95 × k × I MODE
Start release (alarm 60% = 0.6):
a = 0.95 × k × I MODE × alarm
T = Operate time
= Thermal time constant tau (setting value). Unit: minute
ln = Natural logarithm function
I =Measured RMS phase current (the max. value of three phase currents)
158 P3U/en M/H006

k = Overload factor (Maximum continuous current), i.e. service factor (setting

value).
kΘ = Ambient temperature factor (permitted current due to tamb).
Ip = Preload current, I P = θ × k × I MODE (If temperature rise is 120% -> θ = 1.2). This
parameter is the memory of the algorithm and corresponds to the actual
temperature rise.
IMODE = The rated current (IN or IMOT)
Cτ = Relay cooling time constant (setting value)
Time constant for cooling situation (ANSI 49F)
If the cable cooling is slower than in normal operational conditions a coefficient Cτ

can be used as cooling time constant, when current is less than 0.3 x IN.
Time constant for cooling situation (ANSI 49M)
If the motor's fan is stopped, the cooling is slower than with an active fan.
Therefore, there is a coefficient Cτ for thermal constant available to be used as
cooling time constant when the current is less than 0.3 x IMOT.
Heat capacitance, service factor and ambient temperature
The trip level is determined by the maximum allowed continuous current IMAX
corresponding to the 100% temperature rise ΘTRIP for example the heat
capacitance of the motor (ANSI 49M) or cable (ANSI 49F). IMAX depends of the
given service factor k and ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and
IMAX70 according the following equation.
I MAX = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
The value of ambient temperature compensation factor kΘ depends on the

ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and IMAX70. See Figure 80.
Ambient temperature is not in use when kΘ = 1. This is true when
• IMAX40 is 1.0
• Samb is “n/a” (no ambient temperature sensor)
• ΘAMB is +40 °C.
Figure 80 - Ambient temperature correction of the overload stage T>
k
1.2
IMAX40
1.0
0.8 IMAX70
0.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 (°C)
AMB
50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176 (°F)
P3U/en M/H006 159

Example of the thermal model behavior
Figure 80 shows an example of the thermal model behavior. In this example, =

30 minutes, k = 1.06 and kΘ = 1 and the current has been zero for a long time
and thus the initial temperature rise is 0%. At time = 50 minutes, the current
changes to 0.85 x IN or x IMOT and the temperature rise starts to approach value
(0.85/1.06)2 = 64% according to the time constant. At time = 300 min, the
temperature is nearly stable, and the current increases to 5% over the maximum
defined by the rated current and the service factor k. The temperature rise starts
to approach value 110%. At about 340 minutes, the temperature rise is 100% and
a trip follows.
Initial temperature rise after restart
When the relay is switched on, an initial temperature rise of 70% is used.
Depending on the actual current, the calculated temperature rise then starts to
approach the final value.
Alarm function
The thermal overload stage is provided with a separately settable alarm function.
When the alarm limit is reached, the stage activates its start signal.
Figure 81 - Example of the thermal model behavior

thermbeh
Temperature rise
Θoverload
Θmax
Θalarm
Reset ratio=95%
Θp
Settings:
τ = 30 minutes
k = 1.06
Θalarm = 90%
Alarm
Trip
I/IN 1.6 min

IMAX = k*IN IOVERLOAD = 1.05*IMAX
45 min
IP = 0.85*IN
Time
100 min 200 min 300 min 400 min 500 min
Setting groups
160 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 60 - Thermal overload(49F/49M)
Maximum continuous current 0.1–2.40 x IN or IMOT(step 0.01)
Alarm setting range 60–99% (step 1%)
Time constant τ 2–180 min (step 1)
Cooling time coefficient 1.0–10.0 x τ (step 0.1)
Max. overload at +40°C 70–120 %IN or %IMOT (step 1)
Max. overload at +70°C 50–100 %IN or %IMOT (step 1)
Ambient temperature -55 – 125°C (step 1°)
Reset ratio (Start & trip) 0.95
Operate time inaccuracy Relative inaccuracy ±5% or absolute

inaccuracy 1 s of the theoretical value
P3U/en M/H006 161

5.17 Breaker failure (ANSI 50BF)
ANSI Feeder Motor

50BF
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The circuit breaker failure protection stage (CBFP) can be used to operate any
upstream circuit breaker (CB) if the programmed output matrix signals, selected
to control the main breaker, have not disappeared within a given time after the
initial command. The supervised output contact is defined by the “Monitored Trip
Relay” setting. An alternative output contact of the relay must be used for this
backup control selected in the Output matrix setting view.
The CBFP operation is based on the supervision of the signal to the selected
output contact and the time. The following output matrix signals, when
programmed into use, start the CBFP function:
• protection functions
• control functions
• supporting functions
• GOOSE signals (through communication)
If the signal is longer than the CBFP stage’s operate time, the stage activates
another output contact defined in the Output matrix setting view. The output
contact remains activated until the signal resets. The CBFP stage supervises all
the signals assigned to the same selected output contact.
In Figure 82, both the trip and CBFP start signals activate simultaneously (left
picture). If T> trip fails to control the CB through T1, the CBFP activates T3 after
the breaker failure operate time.
Figure 82 - Trip and CBFP start signals in the Output matrix view
NOTE: For the CBFP, always select the ”Connected” crossing symbol in the
Output matrix setting view.
162 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 61 - Breaker failure (50BF)
Relay to be supervised T1–T7 (depending on the order code)
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time ±20 ms
P3U/en M/H006 163

5.18 Breaker failure 1 and 2 (ANSI 50BF)
ANSI Feeder Motor

50BF
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Easergy P3 has two identical Breaker failure 1 (ANSI 50BF) and Breaker failure 2
(ANSI 50BF) stages.
Description
Power system protection should always have some sort of backup protection
available. Backup protection is intended to operate when a power system fault is
not cleared or an abnormal condition is not detected in the required time because
of a failure or the inability of the primary protection to operate or failure of the
appropriate circuit breakers to trip. Backup protection may be local or remote.
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBFP) is part of the local backup protection.
CBFP provides a backup trip signal to an upstream circuit breaker (CB) when the
CB nearest to fault fails to clear fault current. The CB may fail to operate for
several reasons, for example burnt open coil or a flashover in the CB.
Figure 83 - CBFP implementation
A. CBFP trip C. Re-trip

B. Normal trip
Two separate stages are provided to enable re-trip and CBFP trip commands.
The first stage can be used to give re-trip command (for example to control
second/backup open coil of the main CB) while the second stage can give
dedicated CBFP trip command to an upstream circuit breaker. Select the required
outputs for re-trip and CBFP trip through the output matrix.
164 P3U/en M/H006

Block diagram
Figure 84 - Breaker failure 2 operation
A I
IA
IB Imax > &
IC
& J
I0 > & ≥ t K
B
C & & J
D
&
E
F G H
A. Condition 1 G. Delay setting

B. Condition 2 H. Enable events setting
C. Condition 3 I. Start
D. Condition 4 J. Event register
E. Block K. Trip
F. Zero-current setting
CBFP operation
The CBFP function can be enabled and disabled with the Enable for BF2
selection. The CBFP function activates when any of the selected start signals
becomes and stays active.
The CBFP operation can be temporarily blocked by the stage block signal from
the block matrix. When the stage is blocked by the block signal, the stage timer
stops but it does not reset. The stage timer continues its operation when the block
signal is disabled. When the block signal is active, the stage output signals are
disabled.
The CBFP stage provides the following events:

• start on
• start off
• trip on
• trip off
Events can be activated via the Enable events setting view.
Condition selectors
The CBFP function has four condition selectors that can be used separately or all
together to activate and reset the CBFP function.
The four condition selectors are almost identical. The only difference is that
condition selectors 1 and 2 are for all protection functions that benefit from zero-
current detection for resetting the CBFP as described in section Zero-current
detector, and selectors 3 and 4 are for all the protection functions that do not
benefit from zero-current detection for CBFP.
P3U/en M/H006 165

Condition selector 4 can be used to support selectors 1, 2 and 3. For example, if

there are too many stages to be monitored in condition set 1, condition selector 4
can be used to monitor the output contacts. Monitoring digital inputs is also
possible if the backup protection is based on external current relay, for example.
The only CBFP reset criteria for condition set 4 are the monitored input and
output signals.
Figure 85 - Start signal and reset condition setting view for Condition 1
Separate zero-current detection with dedicated start settings exists for phase
overcurrent and ground fault overcurrent signals. Zero-current detection is
independent of the protection stages.
The condition criteria, available signals and reset conditions are listed in Table 62.
NOTE: The start signal can be selected for each condition in advance from
the pull-down menu even if the concerned stage is not enabled. For the CBFP
activation, the concerned stage must be enabled from the protection stage
menu and the stage has to start to activate the CBFP start signal.
Table 62 - CBFP condition selectors
Criteria Start signal Reset condition
Condition 1 50/51-1, 50/51-2, 50/51-3, Reset by CB status: DI1 –

37, 46, 87M-1, 87M-2, 67-1, DIx (1, F1, F2, VI1-20,
67-2, 67-3, 67-4, 49RMS, VO1–20, GOOSE_NI1–64,
68F2, 21/40-1, 21/40-2, POC1–16, Obj1-8Op
68F5, SOTF
Monitored stage: On/Off
Condition 2 50N/51N-1, 50N/51N-2, Zero-current detection:

50N/51N-3, 50N/51N-4, On/Off
50N/51N-5, 67N-1, 67N-2,
67N-3
166 P3U/en M/H006

Criteria Start signal Reset condition
Condition 3 64S, 59-1, 59-2, 59-3, 27-1, Reset by CB status: DI1 –

27-2, 27-3, 27P-1, 27P-2, DIx (1, F1, F2, VI1-20,
59N-1, 59N-2, 32-1, 32-2, VO1–20, GOOSE_NI1–64,
40, 21G-1, 21G-2,Pgr1-8, POC1–16, Obj1-8Op
81U-1, 81U-2, 81-1,81-2,
Monitored stage: On/Off
81R, 24, Pslip
Condition 4 Outputs: A1, T1-Tx (1
Inputs: DI1 – DIx (1, F1, F2,

VI1-20, VO1 – 20,
GOOSE_NI1 – 64, POC1 –
16
In addition to the selection of the start signal, the CBFP reset condition needs to
be selected.
If no reset conditions are selected, the stage uses Reset by monitored stage as
the reset condition. This prevents a situation where the stage never releases.
The reset condition Reset by CB status is useful if the current is already zero
when the CB is opened (for example unloaded CB).
When more than one selection criteria are selected, AND condition is used, for
example “zero current detection” AND “object open”. See Figure 84 for details.
Stage timer
The operate delay timer is started by a signal activated by the monitored stages
(condition selectors). The operate time delay is a settable parameter. When the
given time delay has elapsed, the stage provides a trip signal through the output
matrix and the event codes.
The timer delay can be set between 40 and 200 ms.
Zero-current detector
The zero-current detector is an undercurrent condition to reset the CBFP function

when all phase currents are below the start (pick-up) setting value. This separate
undercurrent condition is needed to properly detect successful CB operation. For
example, in a CB failure condition where one or more CB poles are partly
conducting when the CB is open, the fault current can be small enough to reset
the primary protection stage (for example overcurrent stage), in which case the
CBFP does not operate. When a separate undercurrent limit is used, CBFP reset
can be performed only when the fault current really is zero or near zero instead of
relying on the protection stage reset.
P3U/en M/H006 167

Figure 86 - Zero-current detector setting view
The setting range of the zero-current detector is always associated with the CT
nominal value, even in case of motor and transformer protection. The setting
range minimum depends on the relay accuracy. Instead of zero, a small minimum
value can be accepted. See Table 63.
CBFP coordination
The CBFP delay setting has to be coordinated according to the CB operation time
and the reset time of protection stages monitored by the CBFP function as
described in Figure 87.
Figure 87 - CBFP coordination
B
C E F
D G
A
H I
A. Fault occurrence F. Protection stage reset time + safety margin

B. Normal fault clearing time G. CBFP trip
C. Protection delay H. CBFP stage operate delay (CB operate time + protection stage
reset time + safety margin)
D. CBFP stage start I. CB operate time
E. CB operate time J. Total fault clearing time in case of failed CB operation but
successful CBFP operation
168 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 63 - Breaker failure 2 (ANSI 50BF)
Zero-current detection:
- Phase overcurrent 0.05–0.2 x In
- Ground fault overcurrent 0.005–20 x p.u.
- Operate time 0.04–0.2 s
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time ±20 ms
P3U/en M/H006 169

5.19 Switch-on-to-fault (ANSI 50HS)
ANSI Feeder Motor

50HS
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The switch-on-to-fault (SOTF) protection function offers fast protection when the
circuit breaker (CB) is closed manually against a faulty line. Overcurrent-based
protection does not clear the fault until the intended time delay has elapsed.
SOTF gives a trip signal without additional time delay if the CB is closed and a
fault is detected after closing the CB.
Figure 88 - Switch-on-to-fault function operates when the CB has detected open

and the fault current reaches start setting value
E
A
G
B
C
F
D
A. Start setting
B. Maximum of IA, IB, IC
C. Low limit 0.02 x IN
D. SOTF trip
E. Switch-on-to-fault does not activate if the CB has not been in open position before the fault.
Open CB detection is noticed from the highest phase current value which has to be under a fixed
low-limit threshold (0.02 x IN). Opening of the CB can be detected also with digital inputs (Dead
line detection input = DI1 – DIx, VI1 – VIx). The default detection input is based on the current
threshold, so the dead line detection input parameter has value “–“.
F. Dead line detection delay defines how long the CB has to be open so that the SOTF function is
active. If the set time delay is not fulfilled and the highest phase current value (maximum of IA, IB,
IC) rises over the start setting, the SOTF does not operate.
G.If the highest phase current value of IA, IB, IC goes successfully under the low limit and rises to a
value between the low limit and the start value, then if the highest phase current value rises over
the start setting value before the set SOTF active after CB closure time delay has elapsed, the
SOTF trips. If this time delay is exceeded, the SOTF does not trip even if the start setting value is
exceeded.
Setting groups
170 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 64 - Switch-on-to-fault SOTF (50HS)
Current input IL or I’L
Start value 1.00–3.00 x IN (step 0.01)
Dead line detection delay 0.00–60.00 s (step 0.01)
SOTF active after CB closure 0.10–60.00 s (step 0.01)
Operate time < 30 ms (When IM/ISET ratio > 1.5)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy ±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
P3U/en M/H006 171

5.20 Phase overcurrent (ANSI 50/51)
ANSI Feeder Motor

50/51
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
Phase overcurrent protection is used against short-circuit faults and heavy

overloads.
The overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency component of the
phase currents. The protection is sensitive to the highest of the three phase
currents. Whenever this value exceeds the user's start setting of a particular
stage, this stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on
longer than the operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Block diagram
Figure 89 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage 50/51-1
3vlsblock
Im1
Im2 MAX > ts tr
& H
Im3
& I
A t
>1 J
& I
B C D E F G
A. Block F. Multiplier
B. Setting I>s G. Enable events
C. Delay H. Start
D. Definite / dependent time I. Register event
E. Dependent time characteristics J. Trip
172 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 90 - Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage 50/51-2 and

50/51-3
3vIssblock
Im1
Im2 MAX > & E
Im3 ts tr
& F
A
t
G
& F
B C D
A. Block E. Start
B. Setting I>>s F. Register event
C. Delay G. Trip
D. Enable events
There are three separately adjustable overcurrent stages: 50/51-1, 50/51-2 and
50/51-3. The first stage 50/51-1 can be configured for definite time (DT) or
dependent operate time (IDMT) characteristic. The stages 50/51-2 and 50/51-3
have definite time operation characteristic. By using the definite delay type and
setting the delay to its minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI 50) operation is
obtained.
Figure 89 shows a functional block diagram of the 50/51-1 overcurrent stage with
definite time and dependent time operate time. Figure 90 shows a functional block
diagram of the 50/51-2 and 50/51-3 overcurrent stages with definite time
operation delay.
Dependent operate time
Dependent operate time means that the operate time depends on the amount the
measured current exceeds the start setting. The bigger the fault current is, the
faster is the operation. The dependent time delay types are described in 5.6
Dependent operate time. The relay shows the currently used dependent operate
time curve graph on the local panel display.
The maximum measured secondary current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of
dependent curves with high start settings. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for
more information.
P3U/en M/H006 173

Include harmonics setting
The 50/51-1 and 50/51-2 (50/51) overcurrent protection stages have a setting
parameter to include harmonics. When this setting is activated, the overcurrent
stage calculates the sum of the base frequency and all measured harmonics. This
feature is used to determine the signal's true root mean square value to detect the
signal's real heating factor. The operate time is 5 ms more when harmonics are
included in the measurement. Activate the "Include harmonics" setting if the
overcurrent protection is used for thermal protection and the content of the
harmonics is known to exist in the power system.
Cold load and inrush current handling
See 6.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 65 - Phase overcurrent stage 50/51-1 (50/51)
Start value 0.05–5.00 x IN or x IMOT (step 0.01)
Definite time function: DT49)
IDMT function:
- Delay curve family (DT), IEC, IEEE, RI Prg
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…, depends on the
- Inv. time coefficient k family50)
- RI curve 0.025–20.0
0.025–20.0
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Transient overreach, any τ < 10%
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25 ms**

49) This is the instantaneous time, that is, the minimum total operate time including the fault detection
50) EI = Extremely Inverse, NI = Normal Inverse, VI = Very Inverse, LTI = Long Time Inverse, MI=
Moderately Inverse
174 P3U/en M/H006

Start value 0.10 – 20.00 x IN or x IMOT (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 – 1800.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
- Starting
±1% or ±25 ms
- operate time
51) This
Start value 0.10–40.00 x IN or x IMOT (step 0.01)
Instant operate time:
IM / ISET ratio > 1.5 <30 ms
IM / ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5 < 50 ms
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio > 1.5) ±1% or ±15 ms
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5) ±1% or ±25 ms
52) This
P3U/en M/H006 175

5.21 Ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 50N/51N)
ANSI Feeder Motor

50N/51N
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The purpose of the nondirectional ground fault overcurrent protection is to detect

ground faults in low-impedance grounded networks. In high-impedance grounded
networks, compensated networks and isolated networks, nondirectional ground
fault overcurrent can be used as backup protection.
The nondirectional ground fault overcurrent function is sensitive to the

fundamental frequency component of the ground fault overcurrent 3IN. The
attenuation of the third harmonic is more than 60 dB. Whenever this fundamental
value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a start
signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time
Block diagram
Figure 91 - Block diagram of the ground fault stage overcurrent 50N/51N-1
i0s1
A > ts tr
& I
& J
B t
>1 K
& J
C D E F G H
A. I0 G. Multiplier
B. Block H. Enable events
C. Setting I0>s I. Start
D. Delay J. Register event
E. Definite / inverse time K. Trip
F. Inverse time characteristics
176 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 92 - Block diagram of the ground fault stages overcurrent 50N/51N-2, 50N/
51N-3, 50N/51N-4
I0ssblock
A > ts tr
& F
& G
B
t
H
& G
C D E
A. I0 E. Enable events
B. Block F. Start
C. Setting I0>>s G. Register event
D. Delay H. Trip
Input signal selection
Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:
• Input IN for all networks other than solidly grounded.
• Calculated signal IN Calc for solidly and low-impedance grounded networks. IN
Calc = IA + IB + IC.
Intermittent ground fault detection
Short ground faults make the protection to start but do not cause a trip. A short
fault means one cycle or more.
Intermittent ground faults are commonly caused by a lightning or temporary

contact with foreign objects. A typical reason for an intermittent ground fault is a
branch of a tree occasionally touching the overhead line's phase wire.
Intermittent transient ground fault detection
Intermittent transient ground faults happen in compensated networks when the

insulation fails and creates a very short, typically < 1ms, arcing fault from the
phase wire to ground where the energy of the network capacitances leads
through the arc flash fault to the ground. There is a dedicated stage IoINT> (ANSI
67NI) to detect and selectively clear such faults.
When starting happens often enough, transient intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the operation delay
counter is not cleared between adjacent faults, and finally the stage trips.
Five or eight independent nondirectional ground fault overcurrent stages
There are five separately adjustable ground fault overcurrent stages: 50N/51N-1,
50N/51N-2, 50N/51N-3,50N/51N-4 and 50N/51N-5. The first stage50N/51N-1 can
P3U/en M/H006 177

be configured for definite time (DT) or dependent time operation characteristic

(IDMT). The other stages have definite time operation characteristic. By using the
definite delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an instantaneous (ANSI
50N) operation is obtained.
Using the directional ground fault overcurrent stages (5.31 Directional ground
fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)) in nondirectional mode, three more stages with
dependent operate time delay are available for nondirectional ground fault
Dependent operate time (50N/51N-1 > stage only)
Dependent delay means that the operate time depends on the amount the
measured current exceeds the start setting. The bigger the fault current is, the
faster is the operation. Accomplished dependent delays are available for the 50N/
51N-1 stage. The relay shows a scaleable graph of the configured delay on the
local panel display.
The maximum measured secondary ground fault overcurrent is 10 x I0N and the
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of dependent
curves with high start settings.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 68 - Ground fault overcurrent 50N/51N-1 (50N/51N)
Input signal I0 (input X1:7–8 or input X1:7–9)
IN Calc = (IA + IB + IC)
Start value 0.005–8.00 pu (when I0) (step 0.001)
0.005–20.0 pu (when IN Calc)
- Operate time 0.0453) –300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI..., depends on the
0.025–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
178 P3U/en M/H006

Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated

value
- Starting (Peak mode)
±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Operate time at definite time function
±1% or ±25 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function
±5% or at least ±25 ms 53)
Moderately Inverse
Table 69 - Ground fault overcurrent 50N/51N-2, 50N/51N-3, 50N/51N-4 (50N/

51N)
Input signal I0 (input X1:7–8 or input X1:7–9)
IN Calc = (IA + IB + IC)
Start value 0.01–8.00 pu (When I0) (step 0.01)
0.005–20.0 pu (When IN Calc) (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 55) – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:

value
- Operate time
±1% or ±25 ms
55) This
Table 70 - Ground fault overcurrent 50N/51N-5 (50N/51N)
Input signal I0 (input X1:7 – 8 or input X1:7 – 9)
Start value 0.01–8.00 pu (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.0356)– 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
P3U/en M/H006 179

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:

value
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio > 1.5)
±1% or ±15 ms
- Operate time DT (IM/ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5)
±1% or ±25 ms
56) This
5.21.1 Ground fault phase detection
The ground fault overcurrent stage (ANSI 50N/51N) and directional ground fault
overcurrent stage (ANSI 67N) have an inbuilt detection algorithm to detect a faulty
phase. This algorithm is meant to be used in radial-operated distribution
networks. The faulty phase detection can be used in solidly-grounded,
impedance-grounded or resonant-grounded networks.
Operation
The faulty phase detection starts from the ground fault stage trip. At the moment
of stage start, the phase currents measured prior to start are registered and
stored as prior-to-fault currents. At the moment of trip, phase currents are
registered again. Finally, faulty phase detection algorithm is performed by
comparing prior-to-fault currents to fault currents. The algorithm also uses positive
sequence current and negative sequence current to detect faulty phase.
The detection algorithm can be enabled and disabled by selecting or unselecting

a checkbox in the protection stage settings. Correct network grounding
configuration must be selected in the stage settings, too. In the ground fault
overcurrent stage settings, you can select between RES and CAP network
grounding configuration. This selection has no effect on the protection itself, only
on the faulty phase detection. In the directional ground fault overcurrent stage
settings, the detection algorithm uses the same network grounding type as
selected for protection. RES is used for solidly-grounded, impedance-grounded
and resonant-grounded networks. CAP is only used for isolated networks.
The detected faulty phase is registered in the protection stage fault log (and also
in the event list and alarm screen). Faulty phase is also indicated by a line alarm
and line fault signals in the output matrix.
Possible detections of faulty phases are A-N, B-N, C-N, AB-N, AC-N, BC-N, ABC-
N, and REV. If the relay protection coordination is incorrect, REV indication is
given in case of a relay sympathetic trip to a reverse fault.
180 P3U/en M/H006

5.22 Capacitor bank unbalance (ANSI 51C)
ANSI 51C Feeder Motor
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
NOTE: Configure the capacitor bank unbalance protection through the ground
fault overcurrent stages 50N/51N-3 and 50N/51N-4.
Description
The relay enables capacitor, filter and reactor bank protection. The capacitor
unbalance protection requires an IA current to polarize the unbalance
measurement. Use the ground fault overcurrent input for the unbalance current
measurement of a double-wye connected ungrounded bank.
The relay enables capacitor, filter and reactor bank protection with its five current
measurement inputs. The fifth input is typically useful for unbalance current
measurement of a double-wye connected ungrounded bank.
The unbalance protection is highly sensitive to internal faults of a bank because of

the sophisticated natural unbalance compensation. The location method enables
easy maintenance monitoring for a bank.
This protection scheme is specially used in double-wye-connected capacitor

banks. The unbalance current is measured with a dedicated current transformer
(like 5A/5A) between two starpoints of the bank.
As the capacitor elements are not identical and have acceptable tolerances, there
is a natural unbalance current between the starpoints of the capacitor banks. This
natural unbalance current can be compensated to tune the protection sensitive
against real faults inside the capacitor banks.
Figure 93 - Typical capacitor bank protection application with Easergy P3 relays

P3x3x_Capbank
8/E/1:1
IA 5A
8/E/1:2
8/E/1:3
IB 5A
8/E/1:4
8/E/1:5
IC 5A
8/E/1:6
8/E/1:7 I01 5A
8/E/1:8
I01 1A
8/E/1:9
8/E/1:10 I02 1A
8/E/1:11
I02 0,2A
8/E/1:12
P3U/en M/H006 181

Compensation method
The method of unbalance protection is to compensate for the natural unbalance

current. The compensation is triggered manually when commissioning. The
phasors of the unbalance current and one phase current are then recorded. This
is because one polarizing measurement is needed. When the phasor of the
unbalance current is always related to IA, the frequency changes or deviations
have no effect on the protection. After the recording, the measured unbalance
current corresponds to the zero-level and therefore, the setting of the stage can
be very sensitive.
Compensation and location
The most sophisticated method is to use the compensation method described

above with an add-on feature that locates the branch of each faulty element (the
broken fuse).
This feature is implemented to the stage 50N/51N-4, while the other stage 50N/
51N-3 can still function as normal unbalance protection stage with the
compensation method. Normally, the 50N/51N-4 could be set as an alarming
stage while stage 50N/51N-3 trips the circuit breaker.
The stage 50N/51N-4 should be set based on the calculated unbalance current
change of one faulty element. You can calculate this using the following formula:
Equation 23
V L− N V L− N
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C1 ) −1 (2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C2 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
C1 = Capacitor unit capacitance (μF)
C2 = Capacitor unit capacitance, after one element fails (μF)
However, the setting must be 10% smaller than the calculated value, since there
are some tolerances in the primary equipment as well as in the relay
measurement circuit. Then, the time setting of 50N/51N-4 is not used for tripping
purposes. The time setting specifies, how long the relay must wait until it is
certain that there is a faulty element in the bank. After this time has elapsed, the
stage 50N/51N-4 makes a new compensation automatically, and the measured
unbalance current for this stage is now zero. Note, the automatic compensation
does not affect the measured unbalance current of stage 50N/51N-3.
182 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 94 - Natural unbalance compensation and a single capacitor fault
90
3I0
A
180 0
B
270
A. The natural unbalance is compensated for.

B. When the IN current increases above the set start value (normally 90% of a single capacitor
unit) according to the angle ratio between IN and IA, it is decided in which branch and phase the
fault occurred. The fault is memorised and compensation is completed automatically. After the set
amount of faults, the stage trips.
If there is an element failure in the bank, the algorithm checks the phase angle of
the unbalance current related to the phase angle of the phase current IA. Based
on this angle, the algorithm can increase the corresponding faulty elements
counter (there are six counters).
Figure 95 - How a failure in different branches of the bank affects the IN

measurement
Easergy P3 H I
G C
A B
F D
E
A. Branch 1 F. Phase 2 fault in branch 1

B. Branch 2 G. Phase 1 fault in branch 2
C. IA as reference H. Phase 3 fault in branch 1
D. Phase 1 fault in branch 1 I. Phase 2 fault in branch 2
E. Phase 3 fault in branch 2
You can set for the stage 50N/51N-4 the allowed number of faulty elements. For
example, if set to three elements, the fourth fault element will issue the trip signal.
The fault location is used with internal fused capacitor and filter banks. There is
no need to use it with fuseless or external fused capacitor and filter banks, nor
with the reactor banks.
P3U/en M/H006 183

Application example
An application example is presented below. Each capacitor unit has 12 elements

in parallel and four elements in series.
Figure 96 - 131.43 μF Y-Y connected capacitor bank with internal fuses
12kV A
I B
I0
A. 12 in parallel B. Four in series
Characteristics
Table 71 - Capacitor bank unbalance50N/51N-3 and 50N/51N-4 (51C)
Start value 0.01‑20.0 pu (step 0.01)
Operate time 0.04‑300 s (step 0.01)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:

value
- Operate time
±1% or ±25 ms
5.22.1 Taking unbalance protection into use
1. To enable the capacitor bank protection:
– in Easergy Pro, in the Protection > 50N/51N-4 Unbalance setting view,

select Location for Compensation mode.
184 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 97 - Enabling unbalance protection
– via the Easergy P3 device's front panel: go to the 50N/51N-4 menu, scroll
right to 1 SET 50N/51N, and select Location for CMode.
2. To save the natural unbalance:
– in Easergy Pro, in the Protection > 50N/51N-4 Unbalance setting view,

select Get for Save unbalance current.
Figure 98 - Saving the unbalance current
– via the device's front panel: go to the 50N/51N-4 menu, scroll right to
SET2 50N/51N, and select Get for SaveBal.
NOTE: CMode has to be selected as Location before proceeding to

this step.
3. Set the start value for both branches.

Total capacitance of the bank is 131.43 μF. In each phase, there are three
capacitor units (1+2), so the capacitance of one unit is 43.81 μF. Failure of
one element inside the capacitor unit makes the total capacitance decrease to
41.92 μF (Ohm’s law). This value is important when calculating the start
value.
Equation 24
V L− N V L− N
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C1 ) −1
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ C 2 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
6928 6928
−
(2 ⋅ π ⋅ 50 ⋅ 43.81 ⋅ 10 −6 ) −1 (2 ⋅ π ⋅ 50 ⋅ 43.81 ⋅ 10 −6 ) −1
3I 0 =
3
3I 0 = 1.37 A
Failure of one element inside the bank on the left branch causes
approximately 1.37 ampere unbalance current at the star point. On the right
branch, there are two capacitor units in parallel, and therefore, a failure of one
P3U/en M/H006 185

element causes only 0.69 ampere unbalance. A different start value for each
branch is necessary. Set the start value to 80% of the calculated value.
4. Test the operation of the unbalance protection.
Figure 99 - Testing the operation of the unbalance protection
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
A. Phase 2 fault in branch 2 C. Set operation delay

B. IA as reference
Conduct testing by injecting current to channels IA and IN1 of the relay. In the
example above, 0.69 A primary current is injected to the IN1 channel. IN1 is
leading the phase current IA by 60 degrees. This means the fault has to be on
the right branch and in phase 2. Compensation happens automatically after
the set operate time until the allowed total amount of failed units is exceeded
(Max. allowed faults). In this application, the fourth failed element would cause
the stage to trip.
NOTE: If branch 1 faults occur in branch 2, change the polarity of the IN

input. Clear the location counters when the commissioning of the relay
has been completed.
5. Clear the location counters by clicking the Clear button.
186 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 100 - Clearing location counters
P3U/en M/H006 187

5.23 Locked rotor (ANSI 51LR)
ANSI Feeder Motor

51LR
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The locked rotor protection stage Ilr> measures the fundamental frequency
component of the phase currents and calculates the average of the measured
three phase currents (= phase current IL).
The locked rotor stage protects the motor when too heavy load or a mechanical
failure of the motor causes rotor jam during the motor running condition.
The stage's start setting is relative to the motor's nominal starting current. The
nominal starting current can be configured in the Motor start-up supervision stage
(ANSI 48).
The locked rotor stage can be configured for definite time or dependent time
operation characteristic. Equation 25 defines the dependent operate time.
Equation 25
2
I 
T =  START  k
 IMEAS 
T = Dependent operate time
ISTART = Nominal motor starting current
IMEAS = Average of measured phase currents during fault
k = Dependent time coefficient
When the calculated average phase current IL exceeds the defined start setting,
the locked rotor protection stage starts operation delay calculation. The stage
releases when the average phase current IL drops below the start setting. The
stage operation is automatically blocked when the motor status is “starting”. For
details of the criteria for motor status, see Motor status view.
188 P3U/en M/H006

Block diagram
Figure 101 - Block diagram of the locked rotor protection stage Ilr>
Im1
Im2 AVG > & I
Im3
& J
A
t
>1 K
& J
B C D E F G H
A. Block G. Inverse delay

B. Motor nominal start current H. Enable events
C. Start setting Ilr> I. Start
D. Motor starting J. Register event
E. Delay K. Trip
F. Definite / inverse time
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 72 - Locked rotor (51LR) in motor mode
Start value 10 – 100 %IMOTSt (step 0.1%)
Delay type DT, INV
Definite time characteristic (DT): -
- Operate time 1.0 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)57)
Dependent time characteristic (INV): -
- Dependent time coefficient, k 1.0 – 200.0 s (step 0.1)
Reset time <95 ms
P3U/en M/H006 189

Reset ratio <0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or at ±30 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms

57) This
time and operation time of the trip contacts.
190 P3U/en M/H006

5.24 Voltage-dependent overcurrent (ANSI 51V)

NOTE: The voltage-dependent overcurrent stage can be configured to be
either voltage-restrained or voltage-controlled.
ANSI 51V Feeder Motor
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The voltage-dependent overcurrent stage 51V is typically used for generator

short-circuit protection in applications where the static excitation system of the
generator is fed only from the generator terminals. Other possible applications are
conditions where the fault current level depends on the sources feeding the fault.
In close-by short circuits, the fault current rapidly decreases, thus jeopardizing the
operation of the high-set short circuit protection. The operation can be secured
using the voltage-dependent overcurrent function.
The voltage-dependent overcurrent stage operates with definite time

characteristic. The start current IV> and the operate time t> can be set by the
user.
Voltage-restained overcurrent principle
The current start limit of the voltage-restrained overcurrent function is conditional

to the control voltage (fundamental frequency component positive sequence
voltage V1).
Figure 102 - Characteristics of the voltage-restrained overcurrent function IV>
V
V V V
When the generator terminal or busbar voltage falls below the set voltage level,
the start current level of the overcurrent stage 51V also starts falling linearly
controlled by the control voltage according to the characteristic curve.
P3U/en M/H006 191

Voltage-controlled overcurrent principle
When the setting parameters are selected according to Figure 103, the function is
said to be voltage-controlled.
NOTE: The overcurrent function can be used as a normal high-set

overcurrent stage 50/51-3if IY1 and IY2 are set to 100%.
Figure 103 - Voltage-controlled overcurrent characteristics
V
V V V
The voltage setting parameters VX1 and VX2 are proportional to the rated voltage
of the generator or busbar. They define the voltage limits, within which the start
current of the overcurrent unit is restrained. The multipliers IY1 and IY2 are used
for setting the area of change of the start level of the overcurrent function in
proportion to the UX1 and VX2 settings.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 73 - Voltage-dependent overcurrent (51V)
Settings:
- 0.50–4.00 x IGN
- VX1, VX2 0–150%
- IY1, IY2 0–200% IV>
- Operate time 0.0858)–300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
192 P3U/en M/H006

Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of set value

58) This
time and operate time of the trip contacts.
P3U/en M/H006 193

5.25 Overvoltage (ANSI 59)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
Overvoltage protection is used to detect too high system voltages or to check that
there is sufficient voltage to authorize a source transfer.
The overvoltage function measures the fundamental frequency component of the
line-to-line voltages regardless of the voltage measurement mode (9.7 Voltage
system configuration). By using line-to-line voltages any line-to-neutral over-
voltages during ground faults have no effect. (The ground fault protection
functions take care of ground faults.) Whenever any of these three line-to-line
voltages exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this stage starts and a
start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than the operate time
In solidly grounded, four-wire networks with loads between phase and neutral
voltages, overvoltage protection may be needed for line-to-neutral voltages, too.
In such applications, the programmable stages can be used. 5.39 Programmable
stages (ANSI 99).
There are three separately adjustable stages: 59-1, 59-2, and 59-3. All the stages
can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
Configurable release delay
The 59–1 stage has a settable reset delay that enables detecting intermittent
faults. This means that the time counter of the protection function does not reset
immediately after the fault is cleared, but resets after the release delay has
elapsed. If the fault appears again before the release delay time has elapsed, the
delay counter continues from the previous value. This means that the function
eventually trips if faults are occurring often enough.
Configurable hysteresis
The dead band is 3% by default. This means that an overvoltage fault is regarded
as a fault until the voltage drops below 97% of the start setting. In a sensitive
alarm application, a smaller hysteresis is needed. For example, if the start setting
is about only 2% above the normal voltage level, the hysteresis must be less than
2%. Otherwise, the stage does not release after fault.
194 P3U/en M/H006

Block diagram
Figure 104 - Block diagram of the three-phase overvoltage stages 59-1, 59-2, and
59-3
3vus
VmA
VmB MAX > & G
ts tr
VmC
& H
A
t
I
& H
B C D E F
A. Blocking F. Enable events

B. Setting U>s G. Start
C. Hysteresis H. Event register
D. Release delay I. Trip
E. Delay
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 74 - Overvoltage stage 59–1 (59)
- operate time 0.0859)– 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1 – 20.0%, step 0.1%)
Release delay 0.06–300.00 s (step 0.02)
Reset time < 95 ms
P3U/en M/H006 195

Inaccuracy:

59) This
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:
60) This
Hysteresis 0.99–0.800 (0.1–20.0%, step 0.1%)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy:

61) This
196 P3U/en M/H006

5.26 Capacitor overvoltage (ANSI 59C)
ANSI 59C Feeder Motor
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
The usual design of capacitor banks allows a continuous sinusoidal voltage of

100% or rated nominal voltage at nominal frequency in line with normal operation
limits of the power systems. A short-time overvoltage is permitted but the
capacitor bank has to be disconnected from the power system to avoid
overloading the capacitors.
Description
This protection stage calculates the voltages of a three-phase Y-connected

capacitor bank using the measured currents of the capacitors. No voltage
measurements are needed.
Especially in filter applications, there are harmonics and depending on the phase
angles the harmonics can increase the peak voltage. This stage calculates the
worst-case overvoltage in per-unit values using the Equation 26 (IEC 60871-1).
Harmonics up to 15th are taken into account.
Equation 26
XC 15
In
VC =
V CLN
∑n
n =1
where
Equation 27
1
XC =
2πfC
VC = Amplitude of a pure fundamental frequency sine wave voltage, whose peak

value is equal to the maximum possible peak value of the actual voltage –
including harmonics – over a Y-coupled capacitor.
XC = Reactance of the capacitor at the measured frequency
VCLN =Rated voltage of the capacitance C.
n = Order number of harmonic. n = 1 for the base frequency component. n = 2 for

2nd harmonic etc.
IN = nth harmonic of the measured phase current. n = 1 – 15.
f = Average measured frequency.
P3U/en M/H006 197

c = Single phase capacitance between phase and starpoint. This is the setting
value CSET.
Equation 26 gives the maximum possible voltage, while the actual voltage
depends on the phase angles of the involved harmonics.
The protection is sensitive to the highest voltage of the three phase-to-neutral

voltages. Whenever this value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this
stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the definite operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Reactive power of the capacitor bank
The rated reactive power is calculated as follows:
Equation 28
Q N = 2πf N V CLN
2
C SET
QN = Rated reactive power of the three-phase capacitor bank
fN = Rated frequency. 50 Hz or 60 Hz. This is detected automatically or in special

cases given by the user with parameter adapted frequency.
VCLN = Rated voltage of a single capacitor
CSET = Capacitance setting which is equal to the single phase capacitance

between phase and the star point.
Three separate capacitors connected in wye (III Y)
In this configuration, the capacitor bank is built of three single-phase sections

without internal interconnections between the sections. The three sections are
externally connected to a wye (Y). The single-phase-to-starpoint capacitance is
used as the setting value.
Equation 29
C SET = C NamePlate
CNamePlate is the capacitance of each capacitor.
198 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 105 - Capacitor bank built of three single-phase units connected in wye (III
Y). Each capacitor is 100 µF and this value is also used as the setting value.
UcFig1
UN = 10 kV
f = 50 Hz
IA IB IC
UN = 10 kV/√3 UN = 10 kV/√3 UN = 10 kV/√3

Q50Hz = 1.05 Mvar Q50Hz = 1.05 Mvar Q50Hz = 1.05 Mvar
Q60Hz = 1.26 Mvar Q60Hz = 1.26 Mvar Q60Hz = 1.26 Mvar
C = 100 μF C = 100 μF C = 100 μF
CSET = 100 μF
Q = 3.14 Mvar
Three-phase capacitor connected internally in wye (Y)
In this configuration, the capacitor bank consists of a three-phase capacitor

connected internally to a wye (Y).
The single-phase-to-starpoint capacitance is used as the setting value.
Equation 30
C SET = 2C AB
CAB is the name plate capacitance which is equal to capacitance between phases
A and B.
The reactive power is calculated using Equation 28.
Figure 106 - Three-phase capacitor bank connected internally in wye (Y).

Capacitance between phases A and B is 50 µF and the equivalent phase-to-
neutral capacitance is 100 µF whose value is also used as the setting value.
UcFig2
VN = 10 kV
f = 50 Hz
IA IB IC
A B C
VN = 10 kV
Q50Hz = 3.14 Mvar
Q60Hz = 3.77 Mvar
CSET = 100 μF CAB = 50 μF
CAB = 50 μF 3 x 100 μF
Q = 3.14 Mvar
Overvoltage and reactive power calculation example
The capacitor bank is built of three separate 100 µF capacitors connected in wye
(Y). The rated voltage of the capacitors is 8000 V, the measured frequency is
50.04 Hz and the rated frequency is 50 Hz.
P3U/en M/H006 199

The measured fundamental frequency current of phase A is:
IA = 181 A
and the measured relative 2nd harmonic is
2% = 3.62 A
and the measured relative 3rd harmonic is
7% = 12.67 A
and the measured relative 5th harmonic is
5% = 9.05 A
According to Figure 105, the line-to-star point capacitance is:
CSET = 100 µF (Figure 105).
The rated power is (Equation 28):

QN = 2011 kvar
According to Equation 27, the reactance is:
X = 1/(2π x 50.04 x 100*10-6) = 31.806Ω
According to Equation 26, a pure fundamental voltage VC having a peak value

equal to the highest possible voltage with similar harmonic content as the
measured reactive capacitor currents is:
VCA = 31.806*(181/1 + 3.62/2 + 12.67/3 + 9.05/5) = 6006 V
And in per-unit values:
VCA = 6006/8000 = 0.75 pu
The phases B and C are calculated similarly. The highest of the three values is
compared to the start setting.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 77 - Capacitor overvoltage VC> (59C)
Overvoltage setting range 0.10–2.50 pu (1 pu = VCLN)
Capacitance setting range 1.00–650.00 μF
Rated phase-to-star point capacitor voltage 100–260000 V

= 1 pu
200 P3U/en M/H006

Start time Typically 1.0 s
Reset time <2.0 s
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Time ±1% or ±1 s
P3U/en M/H006 201

5.27 Neutral overvoltage (ANSI 59N)
ANSI 59N Feeder Motor
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The neutral overvoltage protection is used as unselective backup for ground faults
and also for selective ground fault protections for motors having a unit transformer
between the motor and the busbar.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the neutral
overvoltage. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more than 60 dB. This is
essential because third harmonics exist between the neutral point and ground
also when there is no ground fault.
Whenever the measured value exceeds the start setting of a particular stage, this
stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the operate time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Measuring the neutral overvoltage
The neutral overvoltage is either measured with three voltage transformers (for
example broken delta connection), one voltage transformer between the motor's
neutral point and ground or calculated from the measured phase-to-neutral
voltages according to the selected voltage measurement mode (see 9.7 Voltage
system configuration):
• When the voltage measurement mode is 3LN: the neutral displacement

voltage is calculated from the line-to-line voltages and therefore a separate
neutral displacement voltage transformer is not needed. The setting values
are relative to the configured voltage transformer (VT) voltage/√3
• When the voltage measurement mode contains "+VN": The neutral
displacement voltage is measured with voltage transformer(s) for example
using a broken delta connection. The setting values are relative to the VTN
secondary voltage defined in configuration.
• Connect the VN signal according to the connection diagram to achieve correct
polarization.
There are three separately adjustable stages: 59N-1, 59N-2, and 59N-3. All
stages can be configured for the definite time (DT) operation characteristic.
202 P3U/en M/H006

Block diagram
Figure 107 - Block diagram of the neutral overvoltage stages 59N-1, 59N-2,
59N-3
U0sblock
A > ts tr
& G
& H
B
t
I
& H
C D E F
A. U0 F. Enable events
B. Blocking G. Start
C. Setting U0>s H. Register event
D. Release delay I. Trip
E. Delay
Setting groups
There are four setting groups available for both stages.
Characteristics
Table 78 - Neutral overvoltage stage 59N-1 (59N)
Start value 1–60% V0N (step 1%)
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:

value
- Starting VN Calc (3LN mode)
±1 V
- Operate time
±1% or ±150 ms
P3U/en M/H006 203

Table 79 - Neutral overvoltage stage 59N-2 (59N)
Start value 1–60% V0N (step 1%)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:

value
±1 V
- Operate time
±1% or ±30 ms
Table 80 - Neutral overvoltage stage U0 >>> (59N-3)
Start value 1–60% V0N
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:

value
±1 V
- Operate time
±1% or ±25 ms
204 P3U/en M/H006

5.28 Restricted high-impedance ground fault (ANSI 64REF,

64BEF)
The high-impedance REF/BEF protection function is based on an external
connection of a stabilizing resistor and a voltage limiting varistor connection to the
I0 input of Easergy P3 devices. The CT requirement, stabilizing resistor and
voltage limiting varistor calculations are explained in a separate Application Note
(P3APS17016EN).
P3U/en M/H006 205

5.29 Motor restart inhibition (ANSI 66)
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The simplest way to start an asynchronous motor is just to switch the stator
windings to the supply voltages. However, every such start heats up the motor
considerably because the initial currents are significantly above the rated current.
If the motor manufacturer has defined the maximum number of starts within an
hour or the minimum time between two consecutive starts, this stage is easy to
apply to prevent too frequent starts.
When the current has been less than 10 % of the motor nominal current and then
exceeds the value Motor start detection current of IST> (Motor start-up supervision
stage, ANSI 48), the situation is recognized as a motor start. After the recognition
of the motor start, if the current drops to less than 10 % of the motor nominal
current, the stage considers the motor to be stopped.
The motor restart inhibition stage provides an N> alarm signal when the second
last start has been done and remains active until the maximum amount of motor
starts have been reached or one hour of time has passed.
The N> motor start inhibit signal activates after starting the motor and remains
active a period of time that is defined for parameter Min time between motor
starts. After the given time has passed, the inhibit signal returns to inactive state.
When the stage's start counter reaches the value defined for Max. motor starts/
hour, the N> motor start inhibit signal activates and remains active until one hour
has passed.
Set the parameter Def. elap time from motor start to 120 min if the ANSI 66
stage is required to give permission to start the motor immediately after the relay
is powered. If this setting is 0 min, the motor is not started until the Min time
between motor starts delay has elapsed.
The motor restart inhibition stage's correlation to the output contacts is defined in
the output matrix menu. See 4.4.1 Output matrix.
Figure 108 shows an application for preventing too frequent starting using the N>
stage. Closed coil wire has been connected through the normal close (NC)
contact of the signal relay A1, and A1 is controlled with the N> start inhibit signal.
Whenever the N> motor start inhibit signal becomes active, it prevents circuit
breaker closing.
206 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 108 - Application for preventing too frequent starting using the N> stage
+ +
- -
STOP Open Close START
Coil Coil
M
+
Easergy P3
Output matrix
T1 A1
I> start
I> trip
N> alar m
N> motor start inhibi t
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 81 - Motor restart inhibition N> (66)
Settings: -
- Max. motor starts 1 – 20
- Min. time between motor starts 62) 0.0–100 min. (step 0.1 min)
- Def. elap. (default elapsed) time from 0 or 120 min

motor start
62) If
Min. time between motors starts is set to zero, this function is disabled, that is, the minimum time
between successive motor starts is not considered.
P3U/en M/H006 207

5.30 Directional phase overcurrent (ANSI 67)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
Directional overcurrent protection can be used for directional short circuit

protection. Typical applications are:
• Short-circuit protection of two parallel cables or overhead lines in a radial
network.
• Short-circuit protection of a looped network with single feeding point.
• Short-circuit protection of a two-way feeder, which usually supplies loads but
is used in special cases as an incoming feeder.
• Directional overcurrent protection in low impedance grounded networks. In
this case, the device has to connected to line-to-neutral voltages instead of
line-to-line voltages. In other words, the voltage measurement mode has to be
"3LN" See chapter 9.7 Voltage system configuration)..
The stages are sensitive to the amplitude of the highest fundamental frequency
current of the three measured phase currents.
In line-to-line and in three-phase faults, the fault angle is determined by using

angles between positive sequence of currents and voltages. In line-to-neutral
faults, the fault angle is determined by using fault-phase current and the healthy
line to line voltage. For details of power direction, see 3.9 Power and current
direction.
A typical characteristic is shown in Figure 109. The base angle setting is -30°.
The stage starts if the tip of the three phase current phasor gets into the grey
area.
NOTE: If the maximum possible ground fault current is greater than the used
most sensitive directional overcurrent setting, connect the relay to the line-to-
neutral voltages instead of line-to-line voltages to get the right direction for
ground faults, too. For networks having the maximum possible ground fault
current less than the over current setting, use 67N, the directional ground fault
stages.
Voltage memory
An adjustable 0.2–3.2 second cyclic buffer storing the phase-to-ground voltages is

used as the voltage memory. The stored phase angle information is used as
direction reference if all the line-to-line voltages drop below 1% during a fault. To
adjust the voltage memory, set the Angele memory duration parameter in the
Scalings setting view in Easergy Pro.
208 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 109 - Example of the directional overcurrent function's protection area
Im +90°
2°
-ind. +cap.
SET
VALUE
0° +res.
-res. ILOAD Re
TRIP AREA
BASE ANGLE= -30°

IFAULT
-cap. +ind.
-90° ldir_angle2
Three modes are available: dirctional, non-direct, and directional+back-up (Figure

110). In the non-directional mode, the stage is acting just like an ordinary
overcurrent 50/51 stage.
Directional+back-up mode works the same way as the directional mode, but it has
undirectional backup protection in case a close-up fault forces all voltages to
about zero. After the angle memory hold time, the direction would be lost.
Basically the directional+backup mode is required when operate time is set longer
than voltage memory setting and no other undirectional back-up protection is in
use.
Figure 110 - Difference between directional mode and non-directional mode. The
grey area is the trip region.
+90° +90°
-ind. +cap. -ind. +cap.
2°
DIRECTIONAL NON-DIRECTIONAL
SET SET
VALUE 0° VALUE 0°
-res. +res. -res. +res.
BASE ANGLE= 0°
TRIP AREA TRIP AREA
-cap. +ind. -cap. +ind.
-90° -90°
An example of the bi-directional operation characteristic is shown in Figure 111.

The right side stage in this example is the stage 67-1 and the left side is 67-2.
The base angle setting of the 67-1 is 0° and the base angle of 67-2 is set to -180°.
P3U/en M/H006 209

Figure 111 - Bi-directional application with two stages 67-1 and 67-2
+90°
ind. +cap.
4°
67-2 TRIP AREA
SET SET
VA LUE VA LUE 0°
res. +res.
BASE ANGLE = °
BASE ANGLE = 180°
67-1 TRIP AREA
cap. +ind.
90° ldir_modeBiDir 15%
When any of the three phase currents exceeds the setting value and, in
directional mode, the phase angle including the base angle is within the active
±88° wide sector, the stage starts and issues a start signal. If this fault situation
remains on longer than the delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Four independent stages
There are four separately adjustable stages available:67-1, 67-2, 67-3, and 67-4.
Stages 67-1 and 67-2 an be configured for definite time or dependent time
characteristic. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for details of the available
dependent delays.
Stages 67-3 and 67-4 have definite time (DT) operation delay. The relay shows a
scaleable graph of the configured delay on the local panel display.
The maximum measured secondary current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of
dependent curves with high start settings. See 5.6 Dependent operate time for
more information.
Setting groups
210 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 82 - Directional phase overcurrent 67-1, 67-2 (67)
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 2 VSECONDARY
Base angle setting range -180° – +179°
Operate angle ±88°
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…depends on the
0.025–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Reset ratio (angle) 2°
Angle memory duration 0.2–3.2 s
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1–5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle
±2° V>5 V
±30° V= 0.1–5.0 V
±1% or ±25 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function
±5% or at least ±30 ms63)
Moderately Inverse
P3U/en M/H006 211

Table 83 - Directional phase overcurrent 67–3, 67–4 (67)
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 2 VSECONDARY
Base angle setting range -180° – +179°
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Angle memory duration 0.2–3.2 s
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle
±2° V> 5 V
±30° V = 0.1–5.0 V
±1% or ±25 ms
65) This
212 P3U/en M/H006

5.31 Directional ground fault overcurrent (ANSI 67N)
ANSI 67N Feeder Motor
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The directional ground fault overcurrent is used in networks or motors where a

selective and sensitive ground fault protection is needed and in applications with
varying network structure and length.
The ground fault protection is adapted for various network ground systems.
The function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component of the ground

fault overcurrent and neutral voltage displacement voltage and the phase angle
between them. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more than 60 dB.
Whenever the size of IN and VN and the phase angle between IN and VN fulfils the
start criteria, the stage starts and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the operate time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Polarization
The neutral overvoltage, used for polarization, is measured by energizing input

VN, that is, the angle reference for IN. Connect the VN signal according to the
connection diagram. Alternatively, the VN can be calculated from the line-to-line
voltages internally depending on the selected voltage measurement mode (see
9.7 Voltage system configuration):
• 3LN/LLY and 3LN/LNY: the neutral voltage displacement voltage is calculated

from the line-to-line voltages and therefore, no separate neutral voltage
displacement voltage transformers are needed. The setting values are relative
to the configured voltage transformer (VT) voltage/√3.
• 3LN+VN, 2LL+VN, 2LL+VN+LLy, 2LL+VN+LNy, LL+VN+LLy+LLz, and LN+VN
+LNy+LNz: the neutral overvoltage is measured with voltage transformer(s)
for example using a broken delta connection. The setting values are relative
to the VTN secondary voltage defined in the configuration.
NOTE: Connect the VN signal according to the connection diagram to achieve

correct polarization. Connect the negative VN , -VN to the relay.
Modes for different network types
The available modes are:

• ResCap
This mode consists of two sub modes, Res and Cap. A digital signal can be
used to dynamically switch between these two submodes. When the digital
input is active (DI = 1), Cap mode is in use and when the digital input is
inactive (DI = 0), Res mode is in use. This feature can be used with
compensated networks when the Petersen coil is temporarily switched off.
◦ Res
P3U/en M/H006 213

The stage is sensitive to the resistive component of the selected IN signal.

This mode is used with compensated networks (resonant grounding) and
networks grounded with a high resistance. Compensation is usually
done with a Petersen coil between the neutral point of the main
transformer and ground. In this context, high resistance means that the
fault current is limited to be less than the rated phase current. The trip
area is a half plane as drawn in Figure 113. The base angle is usually set
to zero degrees.
◦ Cap
The stage is sensitive to the capacitive component of the selected IN

signal. This mode is used with ungrounded networks. The trip area is a
half plane as drawn in Figure 113. The base angle is usually set to zero
degrees.
• Sector
This mode is used with networks grounded with a small resistance. In this
context, "small" means that a fault current may be more than the rated phase
currents. The trip area has a shape of a sector as drawn in Figure 114. The
base angle is usually set to zero degrees or slightly on the lagging inductive
side (negative angle).
• Undir
This mode makes the stage equal to the non directional stage 50N/51N-1.
The phase angle and VN amplitude setting are discarded. Only the amplitude
of the selected IN input is supervised.
Input signal selection
Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs and signals:
• Input IN for all networks other than solidly grounded.

• Calculated signal IN Calc for solidly and low-impedance grounded networks. IN
Calc = IA + IB + IC = 3IN.
Intermittent ground fault detection
Short ground faults make the protection start but does not cause a trip. A short
fault means one cycle or more. For shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent
ground faults in compensated networks, there is a dedicated stage I0INT> 67NI.
When starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the operation delay
counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and finally the stage trips.
There are three separately adjustable stages: 67N-1, 67N-2, and 67N-3. All the
stages can be configured for definite time delay (DT) or dependent time delay
operate time.
Accomplished dependent delays are available for all stages 67N-1, 67N-2, and
67N-3.
214 P3U/en M/H006

The relay shows a scalable graph of the configured delay on the local panel
display.
The maximum measured secondary ground fault overcurrent is 10 x I0N and the
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope of dependent
curves with high start settings.
Block diagram
Figure 112 - Block diagram of the directional ground fault overcurrent stages
67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-3
I0fiisblock
A Isinφ
> & I
Icosφ
& J
B
C K
> t
& J
D E F G H
A. I0 G. Delay
B. Block H. Enable events
C. V0 I. Start
D. Choise Icosφ (Res) / Isinφ (Cap) J. Register event
E. Setting Iφ > s K. Trip
F. Setting I0 > s
Figure 113 - Operation characteristics of the directional ground fault protection in

Res and Cap mode
Iosin φ
67N-1
I0
Iocos φ
-V0
67N-1
Res mode can be used with compensated networks. Cap mode is used with ungrounded networks.
P3U/en M/H006 215

Figure 114 - Operation characteristics examples of the directional ground fault

stages in the sector mode
+90º +90º
Angle offset = -15º +55º Angle offset = +32º
Sector = ±70º Sector = ±120º
I0
TRIP AREA +152º +32º
I0φ> 120º
70º 0º 0º
-V0 120º -V0
70º I0φ>
-15º
I0
TRIP AREA
-85º -88º
IoDir_SectorAdj
The drawn IN phasor is inside the trip area. The angle offset and half sector size are user’s
parameters.
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 84 - Directional ground fault overcurrent 67N-1, 67N-2 (67N)
Start value 67N-1 0.005–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs

other than IN Calc)
Start value 67N-2 0.01–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs other
than IN Calc)
Start voltage 1–100% V0N (step 1%)
Input signal 67N-1: IN, IN Calc or IN Peak
67N-2: IN or IN Calc
Note: IN Calc = (IA + IB + IC)
Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
Base angle setting range -180°–179°
- Operate time 0.1066) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
216 P3U/en M/H006

IDMT function:
0.025–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting VN & IN (rated value IN= 1–5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting VN & IN (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value I0n= 1–10A) value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting VN & IN (IN Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when V> 1V and IN> 5% of I0N or > 50

mA
else ±20°
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms66)

Moderately Inverse
Table 85 - Directional ground fault overcurrent 67N-3 (67N)
Start value 0.01–20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs other

than IN Calc)
Start voltage 1–100% V0N (step 1%)
Input signal I0φ>>>: IN or IN Calc
Note: IN Calc (= IA + IB + IC)
Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
Base angle setting range -180° – 179°
P3U/en M/H006 217

Operation angle ±88°
- Operate time 0.0468) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
IDMT function:
0.05–20.0, except
0.50–20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting VN & IN (rated value In= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting VN & IN (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value I0n= 1 – 10A) value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting VN & IN (IN Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when V> 1V and IN> 5% of I0N or > 50

mA
else ±20°
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms68)

Moderately Inverse
5.31.1 Ground fault phase detection
The ground fault overcurrent stage (ANSI 50N/51N) and directional ground fault
overcurrent stage (ANSI 67N) have an inbuilt detection algorithm to detect a faulty
phase. This algorithm is meant to be used in radial-operated distribution
networks. The faulty phase detection can be used in solidly-grounded,
impedance-grounded or resonant-grounded networks.
218 P3U/en M/H006

Operation
The faulty phase detection starts from the ground fault stage trip. At the moment
of stage start, the phase currents measured prior to start are registered and
stored as prior-to-fault currents. At the moment of trip, phase currents are
registered again. Finally, faulty phase detection algorithm is performed by
comparing prior-to-fault currents to fault currents. The algorithm also uses positive
sequence current and negative sequence current to detect faulty phase.
The detection algorithm can be enabled and disabled by selecting or unselecting

a checkbox in the protection stage settings. Correct network grounding
configuration must be selected in the stage settings, too. In the ground fault
overcurrent stage settings, you can select between RES and CAP network
grounding configuration. This selection has no effect on the protection itself, only
on the faulty phase detection. In the directional ground fault overcurrent stage
settings, the detection algorithm uses the same network grounding type as
selected for protection. RES is used for solidly-grounded, impedance-grounded
and resonant-grounded networks. CAP is only used for isolated networks.
The detected faulty phase is registered in the protection stage fault log (and also
in the event list and alarm screen). Faulty phase is also indicated by a line alarm
and line fault signals in the output matrix.
Possible detections of faulty phases are A-N, B-N, C-N, AB-N, AC-N, BC-N, ABC-
N, and REV. If the relay protection coordination is incorrect, REV indication is
given in case of a relay sympathetic trip to a reverse fault.
P3U/en M/H006 219

5.32 Transient intermittent ground fault (ANSI 67NI)

NOTE: This stage requires direct VN measurement, and the voltage
transformer scalings mode must contain V0 selection.
ANSI 67NI Feeder Motor
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The directional transient intermittent ground fault protection is used to detect short
transient intermittent faults in compensated cable networks. The transient faults
are self-extinguished at some zero crossing of the transient part of the fault
current IFault and the fault duration is typically only 0.1 ms – 1 ms. Such short
intermittent faults can not be correctly recognized by normal directional ground
fault function using only the fundamental frequency components of IN and VN.
Although a single transient fault usually self extinguishes within less than one
millisecond, in most cases a new fault happens when the phase-to-ground
voltage of the faulty phase has recovered.
Figure 115 - Typical phase-to-ground voltages, ground fault overcurrent of the

faulty feeder and the neutral overvoltage VN during two transient ground faults in
phase L1. In this case, the network is compensated.
EFtransientFig3
VA
VB
VC
Time (ms)
Direction algorithm
The function is sensitive to the instantaneous sampled values of the ground fault
overcurrent and neutral overvoltage. The selected voltage measurement mode
has to include a direct VN measurement with a voltage transformer.
IN start sensitivity
The sampling time interval of the relay is 625 μs at 60 Hz (32 samples/cycle). The
IN current spikes can be quite short compared to this sampling interval.
220 P3U/en M/H006

Fortunately, the current spikes in cable networks are high and while the anti-alias
filter of the relay attenuates the amplitude, the filter also makes the pulses wider.
Thus, when the current pulses are high enough, it is possible to detect pulses that
have a duration of less than twenty percent of the sampling interval. Although the
measured amplitude can be only a fraction of the actual peak amplitude, it does
not disturb the direction detection because the algorithm is more sensitive to the
sign and timing of the IN transient than to the absolute amplitude of the transient.
Although the sensitivity of the IN start is not critical, there is a selection between
two fixed settings values of IN. A sensitive start setting can be used in small
networks with lower residual current.
Co-ordination with 59N-1 backup protection
Especially in a fully compensated situation, the neutral overvoltage backup

protection stage 59N-1 for the bus may not release between consecutive faults,
and the 59N-1 might finally do an unselective trip if the transient intermittent stage
67NI does not operate fast enough. The actual operate time of the 67NI stage is
very dependent on the behavior of the fault and the intermittent time setting. To
make the co-ordination between 59N-1 and 67NI more simple, the start signal of
the transient stage67NI in an outgoing feeder can be used to block the 59N-1
backup protection.
Co-ordination with the normal directional ground fault protection based on

fundamental frequency signals
The transient intermittent ground fault current stage 67NI should always be used
together with the normal directional ground fault overcurrent protection stages
67N-1, 67N-2. The transient stage 67NI may in worst case detect the start of a
steady ground fault in wrong direction but does not trip because the peak value of
a steady state sine wave IN signal must also exceed the corresponding base
frequency component's peak value to make the 67NI to trip.
The operate time of the transient stage 67NI should be lower than the settings of
any directional ground fault overcurrent stage to avoid any unnecessary trip from
the 67N-1, 67N-2 stages .The start signal of the 67NI stage can be also used to
block 67N-1, 67N-2 stages of all parallel feeders.
Auto reclosing
The start signal of any 67N-1 stage initiating auto reclosing (AR) can be used to
block the 67NI stage to avoid the 67NI stage with a long intermittent setting to
interfere with the AR cycle in the middle of discrimination time.
Usually the 67NI stage itself is not used to initiate any AR. For transient faults, the
AR does not help because the fault phenomena itself already includes repeating
self-extinguishing.
Operate time, peak amount counter and intermittent time co-ordination
The algorithm has four independently-settable parameters:

• operation delay
• required amount of peaks
• residual voltage limit
• intermittent time
P3U/en M/H006 221

All requirements need to be satisfied before the stage issues a trip signal. Also,
the residual voltage requirement needs to be satisfied at the moment of trip.
There is also a settable reset delay: to ensure that the stage does not release
before the circuit breaker has operated. The setting range for the required amount
of peaks is 1–20 s and the setting range for the operational delay is 0.02–300 s.
The reset delay setting range is 0.06–300 s. The intermittent time setting is 0.01–
300 s. If, for example, the setting for peaks is set to 2 and the setting for operation
delay to 160 ms and intermittent time to 200 ms, then the function starts
calculating the operation delay from the first peak and after the second peak in 80
ms peak amount criteria is satisfied and when 160 ms comes full, the operate
time criteria is satisfied and the stage issues trip (Figure 116). If the second peak
does not come before the operational delay comes full, the stage is released after
the intermittent time has come full. But if the second peak comes after the operate
time has come full but still inside intermittent time, then a trip is issued instantly
(Figure 117). If the intermittent time comes full before the operation delay comes
full, the stage is released (Figure 118). There are a of couple limitations to avoid
completely incorrect settings. The algorithm assumes that peaks cannot come
more often than 10 ms, so if the peak amount is set to 10, then the operation
delay does not accept a value smaller than 100 ms and also, if the operational
delay is set to 40 ms, then it is not possible to set a peak amount setting higher
than 4. This is not fail proof but prohibits the usage of settings that can never be
satisfied.
Figure 116 - Set peak amount is satisfied and operate time comes full inside
intermittent time setting. Stage issues a trip.
Uo
Io
Intermittent time = 0.2 s
Operation time = 0.16 s Reset delay = 0.1 s

TRIP
Setting for minimum number of peaks = 2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time (s)
222 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 117 - Peak amount is not satisfied when operation delay comes full but last
required peak comes during intermittent time. Stage issues instant trip when peak
amount comes satisfied.
Uo
Io

Intermittent time
Operation time = 0.16 s Reset delay = 0.1 s

T R I P Setting for minimum number of peaks = 3
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

Time (s)
Figure 118 - Peak amount is satisfied but intermittent time comes full before
operate time comes full. Stage is released.
Uo
Io

Intermittent time
Operation time = 0.3 s

TRIP Setting for minimum number of peaks = 2 No trip!
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

Time (s)
P3U/en M/H006 223

Block diagram
Figure 119 - Block diagram of the directional transient intermittent ground fault
stage 67NI
i0tBlock
A
I0 I0
O
B P > L
& P
C
DIV
D >
R n M Q
U0 U0
E > & Trig

N & P
F
G H I J K
A. I0 samples J. Enable events

B. I0 peak K. Clear
C. I0 fundamental frequency amplitude L. Transient algorithm
D.V0 samples M. Counter
E. V0 fundamental frequency amplitude N. TOF
F. Block O. Start
G.Setting V0 pickup P. Register event
H. Setting Operation delay peak amount Q. Trip
I. Setting Intermittent time
Setting groups
Characteristics
Table 86 - Transient intermittent ground fault 67NI (67NI)
Input selection for IN peak signal IN Connectors X1:7 – 8 or X1:7 – 9
Direction selection Forward
Reverse
IN peak start level (fixed) 0.1 pu @ 50 Hz
VN start level 1–60% V0N (step 1%)
Definite operate time 0.02–300.00 s (step 0.02)
Intermittent time 0.01–300.00 s (step 0.01)
Reset time 0.06–300 s
224 P3U/en M/H006

Reset ratio (hysteresis) for VN <0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% for UN. No inaccuracy defined for IN
- Time transients
±1% or ±30 ms (The actual operate time

depends of the intermittent behavior of the
fault and the intermittent time setting.)
P3U/en M/H006 225

5.33 Second harmonic inrush detection (ANSI 68F2)
ANSI 68F2 Feeder Motor
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
This stage can be used to block other stages and to indicate possible primary
faults in the power distribution network. The ratio between the second harmonic
component and the fundamental frequency component is measured on all the
phase currents. When the ratio in any phase exceeds the setting value, the stage
gives a start signal. After a settable delay, the stage gives a trip signal.
The start and trip signals can be used for blocking the other stages.
The trip delay is irrelevant if only the start signal is used for blocking.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms to ensure a
proper blocking.
Block diagram
Figure 120 - Block diagram of the second harmonic inrush detection stage
2ndHarm
Im1
Im2 MAX > & E
Im3 ts tr
& F
A
t
G
& F
B C D
A. Block E. Start
B. Setting 2nd harmonics F. Register event
C. Delay G. Trip
D. Enable events
226 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 87 - Second harmonic inrush detection (68F2)
Settings:
- Start value 10–100 % (step 1%)
Inaccuracy:
NOTE: The amplitude of second harmonic content has to be at least 2% of

the nominal of CT. If the nominal current is 5 A, the 100 Hz component needs
to exceed 100 mA.
P3U/en M/H006 227

5.34 Fifth harmonic detection (ANSI 68H5)
ANSI Feeder Motor

68H5
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
Overexcitation of a transformer creates odd harmonics. The fifth harmonic

detection stage can be used detect overexcitation. This stage can also be used to
block some other stages.
The ratio between the fifth harmonic component and the fundamental frequency
component is measured on all the phase currents. When the ratio in any phase
exceeds the setting value, the stage activates a start signal. After a settable delay,
the stage operates and activates a trip signal.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms to ensure a
proper blocking.
Characteristics
Table 88 - Fifth harmonic detection (68H5)
Settings:
- Setting range over exicitation 10–100% (step 1%)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2%- unit
228 P3U/en M/H006

5.35 Auto-recloser function (ANSI 79)
P3U10 x
P3U20 x
P3U30 x
Description
The Easergy P3 protection relays include a sophisticated auto-recloser (AR)

function. The AR function is normally used in feeder protection relays that are
protecting an overhead line. Most of the overhead line faults are temporary in
nature.
The AR function uses the object control function to control objects. All other object
control methods are in simultaneous use, including object failure monitoring. If the
circuit breaker (CB) control fails or another function controls the CB, the AR
sequence stops.
Purpose
Normal protection functions detect the fault and then trigger the AR function. After
tripping the circuit breaker, the AR function can reclose the CB. Normally, the first
reclose (or shot) is so short in time that consumers cannot notice anything.
However, the fault is cleared and the feeder will continue in normal service.
AR working principles
Even though the basic principle of AR is very simple, there are a lot of different
timers and parameters that have to be set.
In Easergy P3 relays, there are five shots. A shot consists of open time (so called
“dead” time) and closed time (so called “burning” time or discrimination time). A
high-speed shot means that the dead time is less than one second. The time-
delayed shot means longer dead times up to two to three minutes.
There are four AR lines for each shot (1–5). Enable the desired line (AR1‑4) to
trig the required shot. If none of the AR lines are selected but the AR function is
enabled, the AR makes a final trip. A line means an initialization signal for AR.
Normally, start or trip signals of protection functions are used to initiate an AR
sequence. Each AR line has a priority. AR1 has the highest and AR4 has the
lowest priority. This means that if two lines are initiated at the same time, AR
follows only the highest priority line. A very typical configuration of the lines is that
the instantaneous overcurrent stage initiates the AR1 line, time-delayed
overcurrent stage the AR2 line and ground fault protection use lines AR3 and
AR4.
The AR matrix in Figure 121 describes the start and trip signals forwarded to the
AR function
P3U/en M/H006 229

Figure 121 - Auto-recloser matrix
A B C D E F G H I
M
|>>s
|>t
|>s
J N 0...300 s 0...300 s
On
On
0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s P
O
Off 0...300 s 0...300 s
On
K
Q R
A. AR matrix J. Shot 1
B. Ready (wait for AR request) K. Shot 2
C. Enable L. Shot 3...5
D. Start delay M. Critical
E. Open CB N. AR 1
F. Dead time O. AR 2
G. Close CB P. Reclaim time succeeded. Move back to shot 1.
H. Discrimination time Q. If critical signal is activated during discrimination time, make final
trip
I. Reclaim time R. If new AR request is activated during reclaim time, continue on
next shot
After the start delay, the CB is opened if it is closed. When the CB opens, a dead
time timer is started. Each shot from 1 to 5 has its own dead time setting.
After the dead time, the CB is closed and a discrimination time timer is started.
Each shot from 1 to 5 has its own discrimination time setting. If a critical signal is
activated during the discrimination time, the AR function makes a final trip. The
CB opens and the AR sequence is locked. Closing the CB manually clears the
“locked” state.
After the discrimination time has elapsed, the reclaim time timer starts. If any AR
signal is activated during the reclaim time or the discrimination time, the AR
function moves to the next shot. The reclaim time setting is common for every
shot.
If the reclaim time runs out, the AR sequence is successfully executed and the
AR function moves to ready state and waits for a new AR request in shot 1.
Configure the protection stage’s start signal to initiate the AR function. A trip
signal from the protection stage can be used as a backup. If something fails in the
AR function, the trip signal opens the CB. The delay setting for the protection
stage should be longer than the AR start delay and discrimination time.
If a critical signal is used to interrupt an AR sequence, the discrimination time

setting should be long enough for the critical stage, usually at least 100 ms.
Manual closing
When CB is closed manually with the local panel, remote bus, digital inputs etc,
the reclaim state is activated. Within the reclaim time, all AR requests are ignored.
The protection stages take care of tripping. Trip signals of protection stages must
be connected to a trip relay in the output matrix.
230 P3U/en M/H006

Manual opening
Manual CB open command during AR sequence stops the sequence and leaves
the CB open.
Reclaim time setting
• Use shot-specific reclaim time: No
This reclaim time setting defines reclaim time between different shots during a
sequence and also the reclaim time after manual closing.
• Use shot-specific reclaim time: Yes
This Reclaim time setting defines the reclaim time only for manual control.
The reclaim time between different shots is defined by shot-specific reclaim
time settings.
Support for two circuit breakers
The AR function can be configured to handle two controllable objects. Objects 1–

8 can be configured to CB1 and any other controllable object can be used as
CB2. The object selection for CB2 is made with the Breaker 2 object setting.
Switching between the two objects is done with a digital input, virtual input, virtual
output or by choosing Auto CB selection. AR controls CB2 when the input
defined by the Input for selecting CB2 setting is active (except when using auto
CB selection when operated CB 1 or 2 is that which was last in closed state).
Control is changed to another object only if the current object is not closed.
AR shots blocking
Each AR shot can be blocked with a digital input, virtual input or virtual output.
The blocking input is selected with the Block setting. When selected input is
active, the shot is blocked. A blocked shot is treated like it does not exist and AR
sequence jumps over it. If the last shot in use is blocked, any AR request during
reclaiming of the previous shot causes the final tripping.
Starting AR sequence
Each AR request has its own separate starting delay counter. The AR whose
starting delay has elapsed first is selected. If more than one delay elapses at the
same time, an AR request of the highest priority is selected. AR1 has the highest
priority and AR4 has the lowest priority. First shot is selected according to the AR
request. Next AR opens the CB and starts counting dead time.
AR shot 2-5 starting or skipping
Each AR request line can be enabled to any combination of the five shots. For
example, making a sequence of Shot 2 and Shot 4 for AR request 1 is done by
enabling AR1 only for those two shots.
NOTE: If AR sequence is started at shot 2 – 5, the starting delay is taken from

the discrimination time setting of the previous shot. For example, if Shot 3 is
the first shot for AR2, the starting delay for this sequence is defined by
discrimination time of Shot 2 for AR2.
P3U/en M/H006 231

Critical AR request
A critical AR request stops the AR sequence and causes final tripping. The critical
request is ignored when the AR sequence is not running.
The critical request is accepted during dead time and discrimination time.
Shot active matrix signals
When a starting delay has elapsed, an active signal is set for the first shot. If
successful reclosing is executed at the end of the shot, the active signal is reset
after the reclaim time. If the reclosing was not successful or a new fault appears
during the reclaim time, the active signal is reset for the current shot and an active
signal is set for the next shot (if there are any shots left before the final trip).
AR running matrix signal
This signal indicates dead time. The signal is set after CB is opend. When dead
time ends, the signal is reset and CB is closed.
Final trip matrix signals
There are five final trip signals in the matrix, one for each AR request (1 to 4 and
1 critical). When a final trip is generated, one of these signals is set according to
the AR request which caused the final tripping. The final trip signal stays active for
0.5 seconds and then resets automatically.
DI to block AR setting
This setting is useful with an external synchro-check relay. This setting only
affects re-closing the CB. Re-closing can be blocked with a digital input, virtual
input or virtual output. When the blocking input is active, CB is not closed until the
blocking input becomes inactive again. When blocking becomes inactive, the CB
is controlled close immediately.
Figure 122 - Example sequence of two shots. After shot 2, the fault is cleared.
Discrimination
Discrimination
Dead Time2
Dead Time1
Start delay1
Reclaim
time1
time2
time
50/51-1 setting
Current
Open command
CB
Close command
CB
CBclose
state
CBopen
state
232 P3U/en M/H006

1. The current exceeds the 50/51-1 setting; the start delay from shot 1 starts.
2. After the start delay, an OpenCB relay output closes.
3. A CB opens. The dead time from shot 1 starts, and the OpenCB relay output
opens.
4. The dead time from shot 1 runs out; a CloseCB controlling output closes.
5. The CB closes. The CloseCB controlling output opens, and the discrimination
time from shot 1 starts. The current is still over the I> setting.
6. The discrimination time from the shot 1 runs out; the OpenCB relay output
closes.
7. The CB opens. The dead time from shot 2 starts, and the OpenCB relay
output opens.
8. The dead time from shot 2 runs out; the CloseCB controlling output closes.
9. The CB closes. The CloseCB controlling output opens, and the discrimination
time from shot 2 starts. The current is now under I> setting.
10. Reclaim time starts. After the reclaim time the AR sequence is successfully
executed. The AR function moves to wait for a new AR request in shot 1.
P3U/en M/H006 233

5.36 Overfrequency and underfrequency (ANSI 81)
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
Frequency protection is used for load sharing and shedding, loss of power system
detection and as a backup protection for overspeeding.
The frequency function measures the frequency from the two first voltage inputs.
At least one of these two inputs must have a voltage connected to be able to
measure the frequency. Whenever the frequency crosses the start setting of a
particular stage, this stage starts, and a start signal is issued. If the fault remains
on longer than the operating delay setting, a trip signal is issued. For situations
where no voltage is present, an adapted frequency is used.
Protection mode for 81–1 and 81–2 stages
These two stages can be configured either for overfrequency or for

underfrequency.
Undervoltage self-blocking of underfrequency stages
The underfrequency stages are blocked when the biggest of the three line-to-line
voltages is below the low-voltage block limit setting. With this common setting,
LVBlk, all stages in underfrequency mode are blocked when the voltage drops
below the given limit. The idea is to avoid purposeless alarms when the voltage is
off.
Initial self-blocking of underfrequency stages
When the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages has been below the block limit,
the underfrequency stages are blocked until the start setting has been reached.
Four independent frequency stages
There are four separately adjustable frequency stages: 81–1, 81–2, 81U–1,
81U-2. The two first stages can be configured for either overfrequency or
underfrequency usage. So totally four underfrequency stages can be in use
simultaneously. Using the programmable stages even more can be implemented
(chapter 5.39 Programmable stages (ANSI 99)). All the stages have definite
operate time delay (DT).
Setting groups
234 P3U/en M/H006

Characteristics
Table 89 - Overfrequency and underfrequency 81–1, 81–2 (81H/81L)
Frequency measuring area 16.0–75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. range 45.0–65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0–70.0 Hz (step 0.01)
Low-voltage blocking 10–100% Vn
Suitable frequency area for low voltage

blocking is 45 – 65 Hz. Low voltage
blocking is checking the maximum of line to
line voltages.
-Operate time 0.1070) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)
Start time < 100 ms
Reset time <120 ms
Reset ratio (f> and f>>) <0.998
Reset ratio (f< and f<<) >1.002
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±20 mHz
- Starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V

70) This
NOTE: If the relay restarts for some reason, there is no trip even if the
frequency is below the set limit during the start-up (Start and trip is blocked).
To cancel this block, frequency has to rise above the set limit.
Table 90 - Underfrequency 81U–1, 81U–2 (81L)
Input signal VA – Vc
Frequency measuring area 16.0–75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. range 45.0–65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0–64.0 Hz
Low-voltage blocking 10–100% Vn
Suitable frequency area for low voltage

blocking is 45–65 Hz. Low voltage blocking
is checking the maximum of line to line
voltages.
P3U/en M/H006 235

- operate time 0.1071) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)
Undervoltage blocking 2–100 %
Start time < 100 ms
Reset time < 120 ms
Reset ratio 1.002
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±20 mHz
- starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V

71) This
236 P3U/en M/H006

5.37 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI 81R)
ANSI 81R Feeder Motor
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The rate of change of frequency (ROCOF or df/dt) function is used for fast load
shedding, to speed up operate time in overfrequency and underfrequency
situations and to detect loss of grid. For example, a centralized dedicated load
shedding relay can be omitted and replaced with distributed load shedding, if all
outgoing feeders are equipped with Easergy P3 relays.
A special application for ROCOF is to detect loss of grid (loss of mains, islanding).
The more the remaining load differs from the load before the loss of grid, the
better the ROCOF function detects the situation.
Frequency behavior during load switching
Load switching and fault situations may generate change in frequency. A load
drop may increase the frequency and increasing load may decrease the
frequency, at least for a while. The frequency may also oscillate after the initial
change. After a while, the control system of any local generator may drive the
frequency back to the original value. However, in case of a heavy short-circuit
fault or if the new load exceeds the generating capacity, the average frequency
keeps on decreasing.
Figure 123 - An example of definite time df/dt operate time. At 0.6 s, which is the
delay setting, the average slope exceeds the setting 0.5 Hz/s and a trip signal is
generated.
FREQUENCY ROCOF1_v3
(Hz)
Settings:
df/dt = 0.5 Hz/s
1. t = 0.60 s
0
Hz 0.5
/s Hz tMin = 0.60 s
/s
0.7
2.0
5H
z/s
Hz
TIME
/s
(s)
START
TRIP
ROCOF implementation
The ROCOF function is sensitive to the absolute average value of the time
derivate of the measured frequency |df/dt|. Whenever the measured frequency
slope |df/dt| exceeds the setting value for 80 ms time, the ROCOF stage starts
and issues a start signal after an additional 60 ms delay. If the average |df/dt|,
P3U/en M/H006 237

since the start moment, still exceeds the setting, when the operation delay has
elapsed, a trip signal is issued. In this definite time mode the second delay
parameter "minimum delay, tMIN" must be equal to the operation delay parameter
"t".
If the frequency is stable for about 80 ms and the time t has already elapsed
without a trip, the stage resets.
ROCOF and overfrequency and underfrequency stages
One difference between the overfrequency and underfrequency and the df/dt
function is the speed. Often a df/dt function can predict an overfrequency or
underfrequency situation and is thus faster than a simple overfrequency or
underfrequency function. However, in most cases, standard overfrequency and
underfrequency stages must be used together with ROCOF to ensure tripping
also if the frequency drift is slower than the slope setting of ROCOF.
Definite operate time characteristics
Figure 123 shows an example where the df/dt start value is 0.5 Hz/s and the
delay settings are t = 0.60 s and tMIN = 0.60 s. Equal times t = tMIN gives a definite
time delay characteristic. Although the frequency slope fluctuates, the stage does
not release but continues to calculate the average slope since the initial start. At
the defined operate time, t = 0.6 s, the average slope is 0.75 Hz/s. This exceeds
the setting, and the stage trips.
At slope settings less than 0.7 Hz/s, the fastest possible operate time is limited
according to the Figure 124.
Figure 124 - At very sensitive slope settings the fastest possible operate time is
limited.
ROCOF5_v3
Fastest possible operation time setting (s)
Slope setting df/dt (Hz/s)
Dependent operate time characteristics
By setting the second delay parameter tMIN smaller than the operate time delay t,
a dependent type of operate time characteristic is achieved.
Figure 126 shows one example, where the frequency behavior is the same as in
the first figure, but the tMIN setting is 0.15 s instead of being equal to t. The
238 P3U/en M/H006

operate time depends on the measured average slope according to the following
equation:
Equation 31
s SET ⋅ t SET
t TRIP =
s
tTRIP = Resulting operate time (seconds).
sSET = df/dt i.e. slope setting (hertz/seconds).
tSET = Operate time setting t (seconds).
s = Measured average frequency slope (hertz/seconds).
The minimum operate time is always limited by the setting parameter tMIN. In the
example, the fastest operate time, 0.15 s, is achieved when the slope is 2 Hz/s or
more. The leftmost curve in Figure 125 shows the dependent characteristics with
the same settings as in Figure 126.
Figure 125 - Three examples of possible dependent df/dt operate time

characteristics. The slope and operation delay settings define the knee points on
the left. A common setting for tMin has been used in these three examples. This
minimum delay parameter defines the knee point positions on the right.
Slope and delay settings

0.5 Hz/s 1 Hz/s 1.5 Hz/s
ROCOF6_v3
Operation time (s)
Setting for minimum delay

tMin= 0.15 s
Measured slope |df/dt| (Hz/s)
P3U/en M/H006 239

Figure 126 - An example of dependent df/dt operate time. The time to trip will be
0.3 s, although the setting is 0.6 s, because the average slope 1 Hz/s is steeper
than the setting value 0.5 Hz/s.
FREQUENCY ROCOF3_v3
(Hz)
50.0 Settings:
df/dt = 0.5 Hz/s
t = 0.60 s
1.
0.5 tMin = 0.15s
0
Hz
H
/s
z/
s
0.7
2.0
5H
z/s
Hz/
TIME
49.7 (s)
s
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60
START
TRIP
Settings groups
Characteristics
Table 91 - Rate of change of frequency 81R (81R)
Start setting df/dt 0.2–10.0 Hz/s (step 0.1 Hz/s)
Definite time delay (t> and tMin> are equal):
- Operate time t> 0.1472) – 10.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Dependent time delay (t> is more than

tMin>):
0.1472) – 10.00 s (step 0.02 s)
- Minimum operate time tMin>
Reset time 150 ms
Reset ratio 1
Inaccuracy:
- Starting 10% of set value or ±0.1 Hz/s
- Operate time(overshoot ≥ 0.2 Hz/s) ±35 ms, when area is 0.2 – 1.0 Hz/s
72) This
NOTE: ROCOF stage is using the same low voltage blocking limit as the
frequency stages.
240 P3U/en M/H006

5.38 Lockout (ANSI 86)
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The lockout feature, also called latching, can be programmed for outputs in the
Output matrix setting view. Any protection stage start or trip, digital input, logic
output, alarm and GOOSE signal connected to the following outputs can be
latched when required:
• output contacts T1 – T7, A1

• LEDs on the front panel
• virtual outputs VO1- VO20
Figure 127 - The lockout programmed for LED A and 50/51-2 trip signals
In Figure 127, the latched signal is identified with a dot and circle in the matrix
signal line crossing.
The lockout can be released through the display or via the Easergy Pro. See
Chapter 4 Control functions.
Storing latch states
In the General > Release latches setting view, select the Store latch state
setting to configure latched states of relay outputs, virtual outputs, binary outputs
(BO) and high-speed outputs (HSO) to be stored. If some of these outputs are
latched and in “on” state, and the device is restarted, their status is set back to
“on” after restart.
P3U/en M/H006 241

Figure 128 - Store latch setting view
242 P3U/en M/H006

5.39 Programmable stages (ANSI 99)
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
For special applications the user can built own detection stages by selecting the
supervised signal and the comparison mode.
The following parameters are available:
• Priority: Protection task execution cycle. If operate times less than 80

milliseconds are needed, select 10 ms. For operate times under one second,
20 ms is recommended. For longer operation times and THD signals, 100 ms
is recommended.
• Time-base for input value A: ”Instant” is the latest available value of the
measurement. The other ones are average values of the measurement during
the given time. The average values are calculated for different purposes all
the time, for example, the 200 ms value is used to update the local display.
NOTE: Pay attention to selecting these timing values. For example,

having a short operate time but 1 minute time base does not necessarily
give the expected result. Using long time bases gives the possibility to use
a filtered value to avoid unnecessary operations.
• Coupling A: The selected supervised signal in “>” and “<” mode. The
available signals are shown in the table below.
• Coupling B: The selected supervised signal in "Diff" and "AbsDiff" mode. This
selection becomes available once "Diff" or "AbsDiff" is chosen for Coupling A.
• Compare condition: Compare mode. ‘>’ for over or ‘<’ for under comparison,
“Diff” and “AbsDiff” for comparing Coupling A and Coupling B.
• AbsDiff | d |: Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the difference is
greater than the start setting.
• Diff d: Coupling A – coupling B. The stage activates if the sign is positive and
the difference greater than the start setting.
• Start: Limit of the stage. The available setting range and the unit depend on
the selected signal.
• Operation delay: Definite time operation delay
• Hysteresis: Dead band (hysteresis). For more information, see 5.3 General
features of protection stages.
• No Compare limit for mode < : Only used with compare mode under (‘<’).
This is the limit to start the comparison. Signal values under NoCmp are not
regarded as fault.
Table 92 - Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages
IA, IB, IC Phase currents (RMS values)
VAB, VBC, VCA Line-to-line voltages
P3U/en M/H006 243

IN Ground fault overcurrent
VA, VB, VC Line-to-neutral voltages
VN Neutral displacement voltage
f Frequency
P Active power
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
Cos Phi Cosine φ
IN Calc Phasor sum IA + IB + IC
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
I2/I1 Relative negative sequence current
I2/In Negative sequence current in pu
V1 Positive sequence overvoltage
V2 Negative sequence overvoltage
V2/V1 Relative negative sequence voltage
IAVG Average (IA + IB + IC) / 3
Tan Phi Tangent φ [= tan(arccosφ)]
PRMS Active power RMS value
QRMS Reactive power RMS value
SRMS Apparent power RMS value
THDILA Total harmonic distortion of IA
THDILB Total harmonic distortion of IB
THDILC Total harmonic distortion of IC
THDUA Total harmonic distortion of input VA
THDUB Total harmonic distortion of input VB
THDUC Total harmonic distortion of input VC
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker
244 P3U/en M/H006

IA RMS IA RMS for average sampling
IB RMS IB RMS for average sampling
IC RMS IC RMS for average sampling
ILmin, ILmax Minimum and maximum of phase currents
VLLmin, VLLmax Minimum and maximum of line voltages
VLNmin, VLNmax Minimum and maximum of line-to-neutral

voltages
VAI1, VAI2, VAI3, VAI4, VAI5 Virtual analog inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (GOOSE)
Eight independent stages
The relay has eight independent programmable stages. Each programmable

stage can be enabled or disabled to fit the intended application.
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available.
See 5.3 General features of protection stages for more details.
P3U/en M/H006 245

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 6 Supporting functions
6 Supporting functions
6.1 Event log

The event log is a buffer of event codes and time stamps including date and time.
For example, each start-on, start-off, trip-on or trip-off of any detection stage has
a unique event number code. Such a code and the corresponding time stamp is
called an event.
As an example, a typical event of programmable stage trip event is shown in
Table 93.
Table 93 - Example of Pgr1 stage trip on event and its visibility in local panel and
communication protocols
EVENT Description Local panel Communication

protocols
Code: 01E02 Channel 1, event 2 Yes Yes
Prg1 trip on Event text Yes No
2.7 x In Fault value Yes No
2007-01-31 Date Yes Yes
08:35:13.413 Time Yes Yes
Type: U12, U23, U31 Fault type Yes No
Events are the major data for a SCADA system. SCADA systems are reading
events using any of the available communication protocols. The Event log can
also be scanned using the front panel or Easergy Pro. With Easergy Pro, the
events can be stored to a file especially if the relay is not connected to any
SCADA system.
Only the latest event can be read when using communication protocols or
Easergy Pro. Every reading increments the internal read pointer to the event
buffer. (In case of communication interruptions, the latest event can be reread any
number of times using another parameter.) On the local panel, scanning the event
buffer back and forth is possible.
Event enabling/masking
An uninteresting event can be masked, which prevents it to be written in the event

buffer. By default, there is room for 200 latest events in the buffer. The event
buffer size can be modified from 50 to 2000. The existing events are lost if the
event buffer size is changed.
You can make this modification in the Local panel conf setting view.
An indication screen (popup screen) can also be enabled in this same menu in
Easergy Pro. The oldest event is overwritten when a new event occurs. The
shown resolution of a time stamp is one millisecond, but the actual resolution
depends on the particular function creating the event. For example, most
246 P3U/en M/H006

6 Supporting functions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
detection stages create events with 5 ms, 10 ms or 20 ms resolution. The

absolute accuracy of all time stamps depends on the relay's time synchronization.
See 6.4 System clock and synchronization for system clock synchronizing.
Event buffer overflow
The normal procedure is to poll events from the relay all the time. If this is not
done, the event buffer could reach its limits. In that case, the oldest event is
deleted and the newest displayed with OVF (overflow) code on the front panel.
Table 94 - Setting parameters for events
Parameter Value Description Note
Count Number of events
ClrEv - Clear event buffer Set
Clear
Order Old-New Order of the event Set

buffer for local
New-Old
display
FVScal Scaling of event fault Set

value
PU Per unit scaling
Pri Primary scaling
Display On Indication dispaly is Set

enabled
Alarms Off
No indication display
Sync Controls event time

format
On Event time shown

normally if relay is
Off
synchronized
Event time is shown

in brakets if relay is
not synchronized
FORMAT OF EVENTS ON THE LOCAL DISPLAY
Code: CHENN CH = event channel, NN=event code

(channel number is not shown in case
channel is zero)
Event description Event channel and code in plain text
P3U/en M/H006 247

Parameter Value Description Note
yyyy-mm-dd Date
(for available date formats, see 6.4 System

clock and synchronization)
hh:mm:ss.nnn Time
6.2 Disturbance recording

The disturbance recorder (DR) can be used to record all the measured signals,
that is, currents, voltage and the status information of digital inputs (DI) and digital
outputs (DO). If the sample rate is slower than 1/10 ms, also the calculated
signals like active power, power factor, negative sequence overcurrent and so on
can be recorded. For a complete list of signals, see Table 95.
The available recording channels depend on the voltage measurement mode, too.
If a channel is added for recording and the added signal is not available because
of the used settings, the signal is automatically rejected from the recording
channel list.
NOTE: When protection stages are enabled or disabled or the recorder

signals or recording time changed, the disturbance recordings are deleted
from the relay's memory. Therefore, before activating or deactivating stages,
store the recordings on your PC.
Triggering the recording
The recording can be triggered by any start or trip signal from any protection
stage, by a digital input, logic output or GOOSE signals. The triggering signal is
selected in the output matrix (vertical signal DR). The recording can also be
triggered manually. All recordings are time-stamped.
Reading recordings
The recordings can be uploaded with Easergy Pro program. The recording is in
COMTRADE format. This also means that other programs can be used to view
and analyse the recordings made by the relay.
Number of channels
A maximum of 24 records can be stored. Up to 12 channels per record can be

stored. Both the digital inputs and the digital outputs (including all inputs and
outputs) use one channel out of the total of 12.
248 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 129 - Recorder channels
Parameters
Table 95 - Disturbance recording parameters
Mode Behavior in memory full situation: Set73)
Saturated No more recordings are accepted
Overflow The oldest recording is overwritten
SR Sample rate Set
32/cycle Waveform
16/cycle Waveform
8/cycle Waveform
1/10ms One cycle value74)
1/20ms One cycle value 75)
1/200ms Average
1/1s Average
1/5s Average
1/10s Average
1/15s Average
P3U/en M/H006 249

1/30s Average
1/1min Average
Time s Recording length Set
PreTrig % Amount of recording data before the trig moment Set
MaxLen s Maximum time setting.
This value depends on the sample rate, number and type

of the selected channels and the configured recording
length.
ReadyRec Readable recordings
Status Status of recording
- Not active
Run Waiting a triggering
Trig Recording
FULL Memory is full in saturated mode
ManTrig -, Trig Manual triggering Set
ReadyRec n/m n = Available recordings / m = maximum number of

recordings
The value of 'm' depends on the sample rate, number and

type of the selected channels and the configured
recording length.
74) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 10 ms.
75) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
Table 96 - Disturbance recording parameters
Parameter Value Unit Description Average Wave-

form
ClrCh -, Clear Remove all channels
AddCh Add one channel. The maximum number of

channels used simultaneously is 12.
IA, IB, IC Phase current X X
IN Measured ground fault overcurrent X X
VAB, VBC, VCA Line-to-line voltage X X
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-neutral voltage X X
250 P3U/en M/H006


form
VN Neutral displacement voltage X X
f Frequency X
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power X
P.F. Power factor X
CosPhi cosφ X
IN Calc Phasor sum Io = (IA+IB+IC)/3 X
I1 Positive sequence current X
I2 Negative sequence current X
I2/I1 Relative current unbalance X
I2/IN Negative sequence overcurrent [x IN] X
V1 Positive sequence voltage X
V2 Negative sequence voltage X
V2/V1 Relative negative sequence voltage X
IAVG Average (IA + IB + IC) / 3 X
Vphase Average line-to-neutral voltage X
Vline Average line-to-lines voltages X
DI Digital inputs: DI1–20, F1, F2, BIOin, VI1-4, Arc1, X X

Arc2
DI_2 Digital inputs: DI21–40 X X
DI_3 Virtual inputs: VI5–20, A1–A5, VO1–VO6 X X
DO Digital outputs: T1–15 X X
DO_2 Rest of the outputs X X
DO_3 Virtual outputs, VO7–VO20 X X
TanPhi tanφ X
THDIA, Total harmonic distortion of IA, IB or IC X

THDIB,
THDIC
P3U/en M/H006 251


form
THDUa, Total harmonic distortion of Va, Vb or Vc X

THDUb,
THDUc
Qrms Reactive power rms value X
Srms Apparent power rms value X
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker X
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker X
UABy Voltage behind circuit breaker X X
UABz Voltage behind 2nd circuit breaker X X
IARMS, IA, IB or IC RMS for average sampling X

IBRMS,
ICRMS
Starts Protection stage start signals X X
Trips Protection stage trip signals X X
NOTE: The selection of signals depends on the relay type, the used voltage
connection and the scaling mode.
Characteristics
Table 97 - Disturbance recording
Mode of recording Saturated / Overflow
Sample rate: -
- Waveform recording 32/cycle, 16/cycle, 8/cycle
- Trend curve recording 10, 20, 200 ms
1, 5, 10, 15, 30 s
1 min
Recording time (one record) 0.1 s–12 000 min (According recorder
setting)
Pre-trigger rate 0–100%
Number of selected channels 0–12
File format IEEE Std C37.111-1999
The recording time and the number of records depend on the time setting and the
number of selected channels.
252 P3U/en M/H006

6.2.1 Configuring the disturbance recorder
NOTE: The DR configuration can only be edited when connected to the

device via Easergy Pro
1. To select the channels and sample rate for the disturbance recorder:
a. In Easergy Pro, go to General > Disturbance recorder.
b. Click the recorder channels you want to add.
c. Click the Sample rate drop-down list, and select the desired rate.
2. To download the disturbance recorder file, select Tools > Download

disturbance records.
NOTE: The default (pre-configured) settings for DR are:

◦ all analog inputs supported by the device
◦ DI, DO
◦ Sampling rate: 32 s/c
◦ Recording length: 1 s'
◦ Output matrix: connection in every trip line to DR
Figure 130 - Configuring the disturbance recorder
3. To write the setting to the device, on the Easergy Pro toolbar, select Write
settings > Write all settings.
NOTE: To save the relay's configuration information for later use, also
save the Easergy Pro setting file on the PC. Use WaweWin or another
customer preferred tool to analyze disturbance recorder file.
4. To save the setting file on your PC:
a. On the Easergy Pro toolbar, click the Save icon. The Save a file window
opens.
b. Browse to the folder where you want to save the file. Type a descriptive
file name, and click Save.
P3U/en M/H006 253

NOTE: By default, the setting file *.epz is saved in the Easergy Pro
folder.
6.3 Cold load start and magnetizing inrush

Cold load start
A situation is regarded as cold load when all the three phase currents have been
below a given idle value and then at least one of the currents exceeds a given
start level within 80 ms. In such a case, the cold load detection signal is activated
for the time set as Maximum time or until the measured signal returns below the
value set as Pickup current. This signal is available for the output matrix and
blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs of the output matrix setting group control is
possible.
Application for cold load detection
Right after closing a circuit breaker, a given amount of overload can be allowed
for a given limited time to take care of concurrent thermostat-controlled loads. The
cold load start function does this, for example, by selecting a more coarse setting
group for overcurrent stages. It is also possible to use the cold load detection
signal to block any set of protection stages for a given time.
Magnetizing inrush detection
Magnetizing inrush detection is quite similar to the cold load detection but it also
includes a condition for second harmonic content of the currents. When all phase
currents have been below a given idle value and then at least one of them
exceeds a given start level within 80 ms and the second harmonic ratio to
fundamental frequency, If2/If1, of at least one phase exceeds the given setting, the
inrush detection signal is activated. This signal is available for the output matrix
and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs of the output matrix setting group
control is possible.
By setting the second harmonic start parameter for If2/If1 to zero, the inrush signal
will behave equally with the cold load start signal.
Application for inrush current detection
The inrush current of transformers usually exceeds the start setting of sensitive
overcurrent stages and contains a lot of even harmonics. Right after closing a
circuit breaker, the start and tripping of sensitive overcurrent stages can be
avoided by selecting a more coarse setting group for the appropriate overcurrent
stage with an inrush detect signal. It is also possible to use the detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
254 P3U/en M/H006

NOTE: Inrush detection is based on the fundamental component calculation

which requires a full cycle of data for analyzing the harmonic content.
Therefore, when using the inrush blocking function, the cold load start starting
conditions are used for activating the inrush blocking when the current rise is
noticed. If a significant ratio of second harmonic components is found in the
signal after the first cycle, the blocking is continued. Otherwise, the second-
harmonic-based blocking signal is released. Inrush blocking is recommended
to be used on time-delayed overcurrent stages while the non-blocked instant
overcurrent stage is set to 20 % higher than the expected inrush current. By
this scheme, a fast reaction time in short circuit faults during the energization
can be achieved while time-delayed stages are blocked by the inrush function.
Figure 131 - Functionality of cold load / inrush current feature.
A C D
Pick-up
Idle
Cold load
A. No activation because the current has not been under the set IDLE current.
B. Current dropped under the IDLE current level but now it stays between the IDLE current and the
start current for over 80 ms.
C. No activation because the phase two lasted longer than 80 ms.
D. Now we have a cold load activation which lasts as long as the operate time was set or as long
as the current stays above the start setting.
Characteristics
Table 98 - Magnetizing inrush detection
Cold load settings:
- Current input IL or I’L
- Idle current 0.01–0.50 x IN
- Start current 0.30–10.00 x IN
- Maximum time 0.0176) – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inrush settings:
- Start for 2nd harmonic 0–99%

76) This
6.4 System clock and synchronization

Description
The relay's internal clock is used to time-stamp events and disturbance

recordings.
P3U/en M/H006 255

The system clock should be externally synchronised to get comparable event time
stamps for all the relays in the system.
The synchronizing is based on the difference of the internal time and the
synchronizing message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and the internal time is
corrected softly towards a zero deviation.
Time zone offsets
Time zone offset (or bias) can be provided to adjust the relay's local time. The
offset can be set as a Positive (+) or Negative (-) value within a range of -15.00 to
+15.00 hours and a resolution of 0.01/h. Basically, resolution by a quarter of an
hour is enough.
Daylight saving time (DST)
The relay provides automatic daylight saving adjustments when configured. A

daylight saving time (summer time) adjustment can be configured separately and
in addition to a time zone offset.
Figure 132 - System clock view
Daylight time standards vary widely throughout the world. Traditional daylight/
summer time is configured as one (1) hour positive bias. The new US/Canada
DST standard, adopted in the spring of 2007 is one (1) hour positive bias, starting
at 2:00am on the second Sunday in March, and ending at 2:00am on the first
Sunday in November. In the European Union, daylight change times are defined
relative to the UTC time of day instead of local time of day (as in U.S.) European
customers, carefully check the local country rules for DST.
The daylight saving rules for Finland are the relay defaults (24-hour clock):
256 P3U/en M/H006

• Daylight saving time start: Last Sunday of March at 03.00

• Daylight saving time end: Last Sunday of October at 04.00
Figure 133 - DST end and begin rules
To ensure proper hands-free year-around operation, automatic daylight time

adjustments must be configured using the “Enable DST” and not with the time
zone offset option.
Adapting the auto-adjust function
During tens of hours of synchronizing, the relay learns its average deviation and
starts to make small corrections by itself. The target is that when the next
synchronizing message is received, the deviation is already near zero.
Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" show the adapted correction time interval of this
±1 ms auto-adjust function.
Time drift correction without external sync
If any external synchronizing source is not available and the system clock has a
known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the clock deviation by editing
the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The following equation can be used if the
previous "AAIntv" value has been zero.
604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further trimming is still
needed, the following equation can be used to calculate a new auto-adjust
interval.
1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8
The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative drift multiplied
by 1000 if some other period than one week has been used. For example, if the
drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) =
0.0306 ms/s.
P3U/en M/H006 257

Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the relay's clock is leading sixty-one
seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero, the parameters are set
as
AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9.9 s
61
With these parameter values, the system clock corrects itself with –1 ms every
9.9 seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the relay's clock has been lagging five seconds in
nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading, then the parameters are set as
1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600
AvDrft = Lead
When the internal time is roughly correct – the deviation is less than four seconds
– no synchronizing or auto-adjust turns the clock backwards. Instead, if the clock
is leading, it is softly slowed down to maintain causality.
Table 99 - System clock parameters
Date Current date Set
Time Current time Set
Style Date format Set
y-d-m Year-Month-Day
d.m.y Day.Month.Year
m/d/y Month/Day/Year
77)
SyncDI Possible values The digital input
depends on the used for clock
types of I/O synchronization.
cards
- DI not used for

synchronizing
Minute pulse
DI1 – DI6
input
258 P3U/en M/H006

TZone -15.00 – UTC time zone Set

+15.00 78) for SNTP
synchronization.
Note: This is a
decimal number.
For example for
state of Nepal
the time zone
5:45 is given as
5.75
DST No; Yes Daylight saving Set

time for SNTP
SySrc Clock
synchronization
source
Internal No sync
recognized
since 200s
DI Digital input
SNTP Protocol sync
SpaBus Protocol sync
ModBus Protocol sync
ModBus TCP Protocol sync
ProfibusDP Protocol sync
IEC101 Protocol sync
IEC103 Protocol sync
DNP3 Protocol sync
IRIG timecode
B00379)
MsgCnt 0 – 65535, The number of

received
0 – etc.
synchronization
messages or
pulses
P3U/en M/H006 259

Dev ±32767 ms Latest time

deviation
between the
system clock
and the
received
synchronization
SyOS ±10000.000 s synchronization Set

correction for
any constant
deviation in the
synchronizing
source
AAIntv ±1000 s Adapted auto- Set80)

adjust interval
for 1 ms
correction
AvDrft Lead; Lag Adapted Set 80)

average clock
drift sign
FilDev ±125 ms Filtered

synchronization
deviation
77) Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity such that the leading edge is the synchronizing
edge.
78) A range of -11 h – +12 h would cover the whole ground but because the International Date Line
does not follow the 180° meridian, a more wide range is needed.
79)
80) If external synchronization is used, this parameter is set automatically.
Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
Synchronization with DI
The clock can be synchronized by reading minute pulses from digital inputs,
virtual inputs or virtual outputs. The sync source is selected with the SyncDI
setting. When a rising edge is detected from the selected input, the system clock
is adjusted to the nearest minute. The length of the digital input pulse should be at
least 50 ms. The delay of the selected digital input should be set to zero.
Synchronization correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated with the
SyOS setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays or transfer delays
of communication protocols. A positive value compensates a lagging external
sync and communication delays. A negative value compensates any leading
offset of the external synch source.
260 P3U/en M/H006

Sync source
When the relay receives new sync message, the sync source display is updated.
If no new sync messages are received within the next 1.5 minutes, the relay
switches over to internal sync mode.
Sync source: IRIG-B003
IRIG-B003 synchronization is supported with a dedicated communication (See

12.2 Accessories).
IRIG-B003 input clock signal voltage level is TLLThe input clock signal originated
in the GPS receiver must be taken to multiple relays trough an IRIG-B distribution
module. This module acts as a centralized unit for a point-to-multiple point
connection.
NOTE: Daisy chain connection of IRIG-B signal inputs in multiple relays must
be avoided.
Figure 134 - Easergy P3 relays with IRIG-B synchronization capability
B
C
P3U P3x3x
A. Antenna C. IRIG-B signal from clock

B. GPS clock D. IRIG-B distribution module
The recommended cable must be shielded and either of coaxial or twisted pair
type. Its length must not exceed 10 meters.
Deviation
The time deviation means how much the system clock time differs from the sync
source time. The time deviation is calculated after receiving a new sync message.
The filtered deviation means how much the system clock was really adjusted.
Filtering takes care of small deviation in sync messages.
P3U/en M/H006 261

Auto-lag/lead
The relay synchronizes to the sync source, meaning that it starts automatically
leading or lagging to stay in perfect sync with the master. The learning process
takes a few days.
6.5 Voltage sags and swells

Description
The power quality of electrical networks has become increasingly important.

Sophisticated loads (for example computers) require an uninterruptible supply of
“clean” electricity. The Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 protection platform
provides many power quality functions that can be used to evaluate and monitor
the quality and alarm on the basis of the quality. One of the most important power
quality functions is voltage sag and swell monitoring.
Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 provides separate monitoring logs for sags
and swells. The voltage log is triggered if any voltage input either goes under the
sag limit (V<) or exceeds the swell limit (V>). There are four registers for both
sags and swells in the fault log. Each register contains start time, phase
information, duration and the minimum, average and maximum voltage values of
each sag and swell event. Furthermore, it contains the total number of sags and
swells counters as well as the total number of timers for sags and swells.
The voltage power quality functions are located under the submenu “V”.
Table 100 - Setting parameters of sags and swells monitoring
Parameter Value Unit Default Description
V> 20 – 150 % 110 Setting value of

swell limit
V< 10 – 120 % 90 Setting value of

sag limit
Delay 0.04 – 1.00 s 0.06 Delay for sag

and swell
detection
SagOn On; Off - On Sag on event
SagOff On; Off - On Sag off event
SwelOn On; Off - On Swell on event
SwelOf On; Off - On Swell off event
262 P3U/en M/H006

Table 101 - Recorded values of sags and swells monitoring
Parameter Value Unit Description
Recorded Count - Cumulative sag

values counter
Total - Cumulative sag

time counter
Count - Cumulative
swell counter
Total - Cumulative
swell time
counter
Sag / swell logs Date - Date of the sag/

1–4 swell
Time - Time stamp of

the sag/swell
Type - Voltage inputs

that had the
sag/swell
Time s Duration of the

sag/swell
Min1 % VN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 1
Min2 % VN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 2
Min3 % VN Minimum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 3
Ave1 % VN Average voltage

value during the
sag/swell in the
input 1
P3U/en M/H006 263


value during the
sag/swell in the
input 2

value during the
sag/swell in the
input 3
Max1 % VN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 1
Max2 % VN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 2
Max3 % VN Maximum
voltage value
during the sag/
swell in the
input 3
Characteristics
Table 102 - Voltage sag & swell
Voltage sag limit 10 –120% VN (step 1%)
Voltage swell limit 20 –150% VN (step 1%)
Definite time function: DT
Low voltage blocking 0–50%
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ration:
- Sag 1.03
- Swell 0.97
264 P3U/en M/H006

Block limit 0.5 V or 1.03 (3%)
Inaccuracy:
- Activation ±0.5 V or 3% of the set value
- Activation (block limit) ±5% of the set value
If one of the line-to-line voltages is below sag limit and above block limit but
another line-to-line voltage drops below block limit, blocking is disabled.
6.6 Voltage interruptions

Description
The relay includes a simple function to detect voltage interruptions. The function
calculates the number of voltage interruptions and the total time of the voltage-off
time within a given calendar period. The period is based on the relay's real-time
clock. The available periods are:
• 8 hours, 00:00–08:00, 08:00–16:00, 16:00–24:00
• one day, 00:00–24:00
• one week, Monday 00:00 – Sunday 24:00
• one month, the first day 00:00 – the last day 24:00
• one year, 1st January 00:00 – 31st December 24:00
After each period, the number of interruptions and the total interruption time are
stored as previous values. The interruption counter and the total time are cleared
for a new period. Previous values are overwritten.
Voltage interruption is based on the value of the positive sequence voltage V1 and
a limit value you can define. Whenever the measured V1 goes below the limit, the
interruption counter is increased, and the total time counter starts increasing.
The shortest recognized interruption time is 40 ms. If the voltage-off time is

shorter, it may be recognized depending on the relative depth of the voltage dip.
If the voltage has been significantly over the limit V1< and then there is a small
and short under-swing, it is not recognized (Figure 135).
Figure 135 - A short voltage interruption which is probably not recognized
V1<
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 B
A.Voltage V1 B. Time (ms)
On the other hand, if the limit V1< is high and the voltage has been near this limit,
and then there is a short but very deep dip, it is not recognized (Figure 136).
P3U/en M/H006 265

Figure 136 - A short voltage interrupt that will be recognized
A
V1<
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
B
A.Voltage V1 B. Time (ms)
Table 103 - Setting parameters of the voltage sag measurement function
V1< 10.0–120.0 % 64 Setting value
Period 8h - Month Length of the

observation
Day
period
Week
Month
Date - - Date
Time - - Time
Table 104 - Measured and recorded values of voltage sag measurement function
Measured value Voltage LOW; - Current voltage

status
OK
V1 % Measured
positive
sequence
voltage
266 P3U/en M/H006

Recorded Count - Number of

values voltage sags
during the
current
observation
period
Prev - Number of
voltage sags
during the
previous
observation
period
Total s Total (summed)

time of voltage
sags during the
current
observation
period
Prev s Total (summed)

time of voltage
sags during the
previous
observation
period
Characteristics
Table 105 - Voltage interruptions
Voltage low limit (V1) 10–120% VN (step 1%)
- Operate time < 60 ms (Fixed)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio 1.03
Inaccuracy:
- Activation 3% of the set value
P3U/en M/H006 267

6.7 Current transformer supervision (ANSI 60)
ANSI Feeder Motor

60
P3U10 x x
P3U20 x x
P3U30 x x
Description
The relay supervises the current transformers (CTs) and the external wiring
between the relay terminals and the CTs. This is a safety function as well, since
an open secondary of a CT causes dangerous voltages.
The CT supervision function measures phase currents. If one of the three phase
currents drops below the IMIN< setting while another phase current exceeds the
IMAX> setting, the function issues an alarm after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 106 - Setting parameters of CT supervision
Imax> 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 2.0 Upper setting

for CT
supervision
current scaled
to primary
value,
calculated by
relay
Imin< 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 0.2 Lower setting

for CT
supervision
current scaled
to primary
value,
calculated by
relay
t> 0.02 – 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
CT on On; Off - On CT supervision

on event
CT off On; Off - On CT supervision

off event
268 P3U/en M/H006

Table 107 - Measured and recorded values of CT
Measured value Φmax A Maximum of

phase currents
Φmin A Minimum of
phase currents
Display Imax>, Imin< A Setting values

as primary
values
Recorded Date - Date of CT

values supervision
alarm
Time - Time of CT
supervision
alarm
Imax A Maximum phase

current
Imin A Minimum phase

current
Characteristics
Table 108 - Current transformer supervision
IMAX> setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)
IMIN< setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)
- Operate time 0.04 – 600.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio IMAX> 0.97
Reset ratio IMIN< 1.03
Inaccuracy: -
- Activation ±3% of the set value
P3U/en M/H006 269

6.8 Voltage transformer supervision (ANSI 60FL)
ANSI 60FL Feeder Motor
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The relay supervises the voltage transformers (VTs) and VT wiring between the
relay terminals and the VTs. If there is a fuse in the voltage transformer circuitry,
the blown fuse prevents or distorts the voltage measurement. Therefore, an alarm
should be issued. Furthermore, in some applications, protection functions using
voltage signals should be blocked to avoid false tripping.
The VT supervision function measures three line-to-line voltages and currents.

The negative sequence voltage V2 and the negative sequence current I2 are
calculated. If V2 exceed the V2> setting and at the same time, I2 is less than the
I2< setting, the function issues an alarm after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 109 - Setting parameters of VT supervision
V2> 0.0 – 200.0 % Vn 34.6 Upper setting

for VT
supervision
I2< 0.0 – 200.0 % In 100.0 Lower setting

for VT
supervision
t> 0.02 – 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
VT on On; Off - On VT supervision

on event
VT off On; Off - On VT supervision

off event
270 P3U/en M/H006

Table 110 - Measured and recorded values of VT supervision
Measured value V2 %VN Measured

negative
sequence
voltage
I2 %IN Measured
negative
sequence
current
Recorded Date - Date of VT

Values supervision
alarm
Time - Time of VT
supervision
alarm
V2 %VN Recorded
negative
sequence
voltage
I2 %IN Recorded
negative
sequence
current
Characteristics
Table 111 - Voltage transformer supervision
V2> setting 0.0 – 200.0% (step 0.1%)
I2< setting 0.0 – 200.0% (step 0.1%)
- Operate time 0.04 – 600.00 (step 0.02s)
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio 3% of the start value
Inaccuracy: -
- Activation V2> ±1%-unit
- Activation I2< ±1%-unit
P3U/en M/H006 271

6.9 Circuit breaker wear

Description
Circuit breaker (CB) wear is a function that monitors CB wear by calculating how
much wear the CB can sustain. It raises an alarm about the need for CB
maintenance before the condition of the CB becomes critical.
This function records the peak symmetrical current81) from each phase82), and
uses that magnitude as the breaking current for that phase to estimate the
amount of wear on the CB. The function then calculates the estimated number of
cycles or trips remaining before the CB needs to be replaced or serviced.
Permissible cycle diagram
The permissible cycle diagram is usually available in the documentation of the CB

manufacturer. This diagram specifies the permissible number of cycles as a
function of the breaking current, that is, how much wear occurs in the CB when it
trips with a given breaking current. So the maximum number of cycles a CB can
trip with this breaking current is used as the measure of wear.
The condition monitoring function must be configured according to this diagram.
In the configuration, this diagram is called Breaker curve.
Figure 137 - Example permissible cycle diagram
100000
10000
A 1000
100
50
20
10
100 200 500 1000 10000 100000
A. Number of permitted operations B. Breaking current (A)
Up to eight points can be selected from the diagram and entered to the device.
Each point specifies a breaking current and the associated maximum number of
permitted operations. The device assumes there is a straight line between each
two consecutive points in the log-log diagram (that is, uses logarithmic
interpolation between the points), and thus forms an approximation of the
permissible cycle diagram. It should be possible to accurately describe most
permissible cycle diagrams in this way.
The values in the example match the diagram in Figure 137.
81) The used peak current is the magnitude of the fundamental frequency component. This
magnitude does not include a possible DC component.
82) The current is sampled every 10 milliseconds, starting from the moment the monitored trip relay
is asserted and ending when the current of every phase has decreased below one quarter of
the phase’s breaking current or after 500 milliseconds have elapsed, whichever happens first.
272 P3U/en M/H006

Table 112 - An example of circuit breaker wear characteristics
Point Interrupted current (kA) Number of permitted

operations
1 0 (mechanical age) 10000
2 1.25 (rated current) 10000
3 31.0 (maximum breaking 80

current)
4 100 1
5 100 1
6 100 1
7 100 1
8 100 1
Alarm points
Two alarm points can be configured to notify about the approaching need for CB
maintenance.
The number of permissible CB cycles depends on the breaking current that is

interrupted by the CB. Larger currents lead to greater wear on the CB and thus to
fewer operating cycles.83)
An alarm point specifies a breaking current and an associated number of
permissible cycles. An alarm is raised if the remaining number of permissible
cycles at the given breaking current falls below this limit.
The table in the Operations left setting view shows the number of operation
cycles left before the alarm points are reached. The number of remaining cycles
is tracked for each phase separately, and the alarm is raised when any phase
runs out of cycles.
Figure 138 - Operations left
83) Each cycle causes mechanical wear on the CB. In addition, large enough currents create arcs
inside the CB, which causes erosion of the electrical contacts for each phase. The larger the
current, the greater the erosion, and thus the greater the wear on the CB. A worn CB has fewer
cycles left at any breaking current.
P3U/en M/H006 273

The first alarm point can be set, for example, to the CB’s nominal current and the
second alarm point to a typical fault current.
When an alarm is raised, a signal is asserted in the output matrix. Also, an event
is created depending on the settings given in the Event enabling setting view.
Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for the currents between the defined points is
logarithmically interpolated:
Equation 32
a
C=
In
C = permitted operations
I = interrupted current
a = constant according to Equation 33
n = constant according to Equation 34
Equation 33
a = C k I k2
Equation 34
Ck
ln
C k +1
n=
I
ln k +1
Ik
ln = natural logarithm function
Ck, Ck+1 = permitted operations
k = rows 2–7 in Table 112
Ik, Ik+1 = corresponding current
k = rows 2–7 in Table 112
Example of the logarithmic interpolation
Alarm 2 current is set to 6 kA. The maximum number of operations is calculated

as follows.
The current 6 kA lies between points 2 and 3 in the table. That gives value for the
index k. Using
k=2
Ck = 10000
274 P3U/en M/H006

Ck+1 = 80
Ik+1 = 31 kA
Ik = 1.25 kA
and Equation 34 and Equation 33, the device calculates
Equation 35
10000
ln
n= 80 = 1.5038
31000
ln
1250
Equation 36
a = 10000 ⋅ 12501.5038 = 454 ⋅ 10 6
Using Equation 32, the device gets the number of permitted operations for current
6 kA.
Equation 37
454 ⋅ 10 6
C= = 945
60001.5038
Thus, the maximum number of current-breaking operations at 6 kA is 945. This

can be verified with the original CB curve in Figure 137. The figure shows that at
6 kA, the operation count is between 900 and 1000. In this case, a useful alarm
level for the operations left is 50, for example, which is about 5 percent of the
maximum.
Example of operation counter decrementing when the CB breaks a current
Alarm 2 is set to 6 kA. The CB failure protection supervises trip relay T1, and a
trip signal of an overcurrent stage detecting a two-phase fault is connected to this
trip relay T1. The interrupted phase currents are 12.5 kA, 12.5 kA and 1.5 kA. By
what number are Alarm2 counters decremented?
Using Equation 32 and values n and a from the previous example, the device gets
the number of permitted operations at 10 kA.
Equation 38
454 ⋅ 10 6
C10 kA = = 313
125001.5038
At alarm level 2, 6 kA, the corresponding number of operations is calculated

according to:
P3U/en M/H006 275

Equation 39
C AlarmMax
∆=
C
945
∆A = ∆B = =3
313
Thus, Alarm2 counters for phases A and B are decremented by 3. In phase A, the
current is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For such currents, the decrement
is 1.
ΔC= 1
Table 113 - Local panel parameters of the CBWEAR function
CBWEAR STATUS
Operations left
for
Al1A
- Alarm 1, phase
Al1B
A
Al1C
- Alarm 1, phase
Al2A B
Al2B - Alarm 1, phase
Al2C C
- Alarm 2, phase
A
- Alarm 2, phase
B
- Alarm 2, phase
C
Latest trip
Date Time stamp of

the latest trip
time
operation
IA A Broken current
of phase A
IB A
Broken current
IC A
of phase B
Broken current
of phase C
CBWEAR SET
Alarm1
276 P3U/en M/H006

Current 0.00–100.00 kA Alarm1 current Set

level
Cycles 100000–1 Alarm1 limit for Set

operations left
Alarm2
Current 0.00–100.00 kA Alarm2 current Set

level
Cycles 100000–1 Alarm2 limit for Set

operations left
CBWEAR SET2
Al1On On; Off 'Alarm1 on' Set

event enabling
Al1Off On; Off 'Alarm1 off' Set

event enabling
Al2On On; Off 'Alarm2 on' Set

event enabling
Al2Off On; Off 'Alarm2 off' Set

event enabling
Clear -; Clear Clearing of Set

cycle counters
6.10 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

Description
Circuit breaker (CB) condition monitoring monitors the CB wear with the help of
the cumulative breaking current. It raises an alarm about the need for CB
maintenance before the CB’s condition becomes critical. This function has two
stages.
The approach to calculating the CB condition is different from the approach used
by the CB wear function described in 6.9 Circuit breaker wear. CB condition
monitoring also provides some additional features for integrating the device with
other Schneider Electric products. These functions are based on data analytics
for integration into EcoStruxure Asset Advisor cloud-based offers.
Cumulative breaking current
CB monitoring is activated when the monitored CB opens, and the breaking

current is added to the cumulative breaking current. This sum is calculated for
each phase separately. This way of estimating the wear on the CB is opposite to
the permissible cycles diagram used by the CB wear function. The permissible
P3U/en M/H006 277

cycles diagram describes how much more wear the CB can sustain, and this
approach describes how much wear the CB has accumulated.
To approximate the shape of the permissible cycles diagram, the cumulative

breaking current is also calculated for 5 different bins, so that each bin tracks
breaking currents within a given range (see Figure 139). If a phase's breaking
current is within the range of a given bin, this current is added to the phase’s
cumulative breaking current on that bin.
Each bin also has three counters (one for each phase). Each counter tracks the
number of times the CB has opened and something was added to the
corresponding sum on that bin (see Figure 139).
Figure 139 - Cumulative breaking current
If all cumulative breaking currents for the bins are zero when the value of the CT
primary parameter is changed in the Scaling setting view, the breaking current
ranges for the bins are automatically set to their default values relative to the new
CT primary value. The lower limit for the first bin is set to zero and the upper limit
to two times the CT primary value. There is no upper limit for the fifth bin.
The cumulative breaking currents are tracked with greater precision than what is
visible on the setting tool, that is, there are hidden decimals stored for each sum.
A non-zero sum that is too small to be visible in the setting tool may prevent the
bin ranges from getting their default values when the CT primary value is
changed.
Each breaking current can be added to one bin.
The cumulative breaking currents can be read over the Modbus protocol as
floating-point values (IEEE 754, binary32). These values are represented in two
consecutive holding registers, so that the register in the lower address contains
the MSB 16 bits. To change the sum by writing a floating-point value, the MSB 16
bits must be written first.
The cumulative breaking currents can be cleared by writing value zero to them.
Counters for mechanical operations
This function includes a counter that tracks the number of times the monitored CB
is opened, and a second counter that tracks how many of those operations were
caused by a protection stage trip. This requires that one of the controllable
278 P3U/en M/H006

objects (see 4.6 Controllable objects) has been configured to represent the CB
and this object has been selected in the Monitored object parameter.
Internally, each object has its own open counter and the counter for the monitored
object is shown under Opening counts, Trip counts and Rack-out counter (see
Figure 140). These open counters are incremented even when this function has
been disabled. In contrast, the trip counter is incremented when the monitored
object is opened by a protection stage trip and this function is enabled. Thus, if
you change the monitored object, the open counter value switches to the counter
of the new object, but the trip counter continues from its current value. Both
counters' values can be changed.
Figure 140 - Counters for mechanical operations
The number of times the monitored CB is racked out from the bay is tracked by its
own counter. This requires that a digital input is set up to indicate when the CB is
racked out85). This digital input is selected under Rack-out counter. Each digital
input has its own counter. The same counter is also found in the Digital inputs
setting view.
Operate times logs
This function records the completion times for the eight previous open, close, and
charge operations of the monitored CB. Each operate time is recorded with a
timestamp indicating when the operation was completed. This function also keeps
a cumulative moving average of 20 previous operate times for each of the three
categories.
The completion times are recorded even if this function has been disabled,
provided that the monitored object has been selected.
All three logs of completion times can be cleared by the Clear logs command.
85) When the CB r is in the bay, this digital input has logical value false, and when the CB is racked
out, this input has logical value true.
P3U/en M/H006 279

Figure 141 - CB opening times
The charging times are recorded in seconds whereas the opening and closing
times are recorded in milliseconds.
The operate times can be read over the Modbus protocol as floating-point values
(IEEE 754, binary32), so that a range of holding registers is used to represent all
operate times of a given category, from the newest to oldest. Each operate time is
represented in two consecutive holding registers, so that the register in the lower
address contains the MSB 16 bits.
Empty or unused cells in the log give value zero.
If an opening time or a closing time is greater than 300 milliseconds, this value is
given as NaN (not-a-number) when it is read as a floating-point value. Similarly,
charging times greater than 60 seconds are given as NaN.
6.11 Energy pulse outputs

Description
The relay can be configured to send a pulse whenever a certain amount of energy
has been imported or exported. The principle is presented in Figure 142. Each
time the energy level reaches the pulse size, a digital output is activated and the
relay is active as long as defined by a pulse duration setting.
Figure 142 - Principle of energy pulses
Configurable:
100 ms − 5 000 ms
Configurable:
10 – 10 000 kWh
kvarh
The relay has four energy pulse outputs. The output channels are:
280 P3U/en M/H006

• active exported energy

• reactive exported energy
• active imported energy
• reactive imported energy
Each channel can be connected to any combination of the digital outputs using
the output matrix. The parameters for the energy pulses can be found in the
ENERGY menu "E" under the submenus E-PULSE SIZES and E-PULSE
DURATION.
Table 114 - Energy pulse output parameters
E-PULSE E+ 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of

SIZES active exported
energy
Eq+ 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of

reactive
exported energy
E- 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of

active imported
energy
Eq- 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of

reactive
imported energy
E-PULSE E+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

DURATION active exported
energy
Eq+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

reactive
exported energy
E- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

active imported
energy
Eq- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of

reactive
imported energy
Scaling examples
1. The average active exported power is 250 MW.
The peak active exported power is 400 MW.
The pulse size is 250 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 250/0.250 = 1000 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 400/0.250 = 1600 pulses/h.
Set pulse length to 3600/1600 - 0.2 = 2.0 s or less.
P3U/en M/H006 281

The lifetime of the mechanical digital output is 50x106/1000 h = 6 a.
This is not a practical scaling example unless a digital output lifetime of about
six years is accepted.
2. The average active exported power is 100 MW.
The peak active exported power is 800 MW.
The pulse size is 400 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 100/0.400 = 250 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 800/0.400 = 2000 pulses/h.
3. Average active exported power is 20 MW.
Peak active exported power is 70 MW.
Pulse size is 60 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 25/0.060 = 416.7 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 70/0.060 = 1166.7 pulses/h.
4. Average active exported power is 1900 kW.
Peak active exported power is 50 MW.
Pulse size is 10 kWh.
The average pulse frequency is 1900/10 = 190 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency is 50000/10 = 5000 pulses/h.
Figure 143 - Application example of wiring the energy pulse outputs to a PLC
having common plus and using an external wetting voltage
+
Easergy P3 PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported Pulse counter input 2

energy pulses +Eq
Active imported Pulse counter input 3

energy pulses -E
Reactive imported Pulse counter input 4

energy pulses -Eq
282 P3U/en M/H006

having common minus and using an external wetting voltage
Easergy P3 +
PLC
Active exported
energy pulses +E
Pulse counter input 1
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq
having common minus and an internal wetting voltage.
Easergy P3 PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq Pulse counter input 2
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq Pulse counter input 4
6.12 Running hour counter

Description
The running hour counter is typically used to monitor the service time of the motor
or appropriate feeder. This function calculates the total active time of the selected
digital input, virtual I/O function button, GOOSE signal, POC signal or output
matrix output signal. The resolution is ten seconds and the data is stored in the
non-volatile memory.
P3U/en M/H006 283

Parameters
Table 115 - Running hour counter parameters
Runh 0...876000 h Total active (Set)86)

time, hours
Note: The label

text "Runh" can
be edited with
Easergy Pro.
Runs 0...3599 s Total active (Set)

time, seconds
Starts 0...65535 Activation (Set)

counter
Status Stop Current status

of the selected
Run
digital signal
DI - Select the Set87)

supervised
-
signal
DI1 – DIn,
None
VI1 – VIn,
Physical inputs
LedA,
Virtual inputs
LedB,
Output matrix
LedC, out signal LA
LedD, Output matrix
LedE, out signal LB
LedF, Output matrix

out signal LC
LedG,
Output matrix
LedDR,
out signal LD
VO1 – VO6
Output matrix
out signal LE
Output matrix
out signal LF
Output matrix
out signal LG
Output matrix
out signal DR
Virtual outputs
284 P3U/en M/H006

Started at Date and time of

the last
activation
Stopped at Date and time of

the last
inactivation
86) (Set) = An informative value which can be edited as well.
6.13 Timers
Description
The Easergy P3 protection platform includes four settable timers that can be used
together with the user's programmable logic or to control setting groups and other
applications that require actions based on calendar time. Each timer has its own
settings. The selected on-time and off-time is set, after which the activation of the
timer can be set to be as daily or according to the day of the week (See the
setting parameters for details). The timer outputs are available for logic functions
and for the block and output matrix.
Figure 146 - Timer output sequence in different modes
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
(not in use)
Daily
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
MTWTF
MTWTFS
SatSun
You can force any timer, which is in use, on or off. The forcing is done by writing a
new status value. No forcing flag is needed as in forcing for example the digital
outputs.
The forced time is valid until the next forcing or until the next reversing timed act
from the timer itself.
The status of each timer is stored in the non-volatile memory when the auxiliary
power is switched off. At startup, the status of each timer is recovered.
P3U/en M/H006 285

Table 116 - Setting parameters of timers
Parameter Value Description
TimerN - Timer status
- Not in use
0 Output is inactive
1 Output is active
On hh:mm:ss Activation time of the timer
Off hh:mm:ss De-activation time of the

timer
Mode For each four timers there

are 12 different modes
available:
- The timer is off and not

running. The output is off i.e.
0 all the time.
Daily The timer switches on and

off once every day.
Monday The timer switches on and

off every Monday.
Tuesday The timer switches on and

off every Tuesday.
Wednesday The timer switches on and

off every Wednesday.
Thursday The timer switches on and

off every Thursday.
Friday The timer switches on and

off every Friday.
Saturday The timer switches on and

off every Saturday.
Sunday The timer switches on and

off every Sunday.
MTWTF The timer switches on and

off every day except
Saturdays and Sundays
286 P3U/en M/H006

Parameter Value Description
MTWTFS The timer switches on and

off every day except
Sundays.
SatSun The timer switches on and

off every Saturday and
Sunday.
6.14 Combined overcurrent status

Description
This function collects faults, fault types and registered fault currents of all enabled
overcurrent stages and shows them in the event log.
Table 117 - Line fault parameters
IFltLas xIN or xIMOT Current of the (Set)

latest
overcurrent fault
LINE ALARM
AlrL1 Start (=alarm)

status for each
0
AlrL2 phase.
1
AlrL3 0 = No start
since alarm
ClrDly
1 = Start is on
OCs Combined
overcurrent start
0
status.
1
AlrL1 = AlrL2 =
AlrL3 = 0
AlrL1 = 1 or
AlrL2 = 1 or
AlrL3 = 1
LxAlarm - 'On' Event Set88)

enabling for
On / Off
AlrL1 – 3
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
P3U/en M/H006 287

LxAlarmOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
AlrL1...3
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
OCAlarm - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
combined o/c
starts
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
OCAlarmOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
combined o/c
starts
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
IncFltEvnt - Disabling Set

several start
On
and trip events
Off of the same
fault
Several events
are enabled89)
Several events
of an increasing
fault is
disabled 90)
ClrDly 0 – 65535 s Duration for Set

active alarm
status AlrL1,
Alr2, AlrL3 and
OCs
LINE FAULT
288 P3U/en M/H006

FltL1 - Fault (=trip)

status for each
FltL2 0
phase.
FltL3 1
0 = No fault
since fault
ClrDly
1 = Fault is on
OCt - Combined
overcurrent trip
0
status.
1
FltL1 = FltL2 =
FltL3 = 0
FltL1 = 1 or
FltL2 = 1 or
FltL3 = 1
LxTrip - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
FltL1 – 3
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
LxTripOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
FltL1...3
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
OCTrip - 'On' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
combined o/c
trips
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
P3U/en M/H006 289

OCTripOff - 'Off' Event Set

enabling for
On / Off
combined o/c
starts
Events are
enabled /
Events are
disabled
IncFltEvnt - Disabling Set

several events
On
of the same
Off fault
Several events
are enabled89)
Several events
of an increasing
fault is
disabled90)
ClrDly 0 – 65535 s Duration for Set

active alarm
status FltL1,
Flt2, FltL3 and
OCt
88) Set= An editable parameter (password needed).
89) Used with IEC 60870-105-103 communication protocol. The alarm screen shows the latest fault
current if it is the biggest registered fault current, too. Not used with Spabus because Spabus masters
usually do not like to have unpaired On/Off events.
90) Used with SPA-bus protocol because most SPA-bus masters need an off-event for each
corresponding on-event.
6.15 Main short-circuit fault locator

Description
The relay includes a stand-alone fault locator algorithm. The algorithm can locate
a short circuit in radially operated networks if the relay located in the incoming
feeder is connected CT & VT polarity-wise for forward (positive) power direction. If
the incoming feeder's power flow direction is configured negative, the short-circuit
fault locator function does not work.
The fault location is given as in reactance (ohms) and kilometres or miles. The
fault value can then be exported, for example, with an event to a Distribution
Management System (DMS). The system can then localize the fault. If a DMS is
not available, the distance to the fault is displayed as kilometres, and as a
reactance value. However, the distance value is valid only if the line reactance is
set correctly. Furthermore, the line should be homogenous, that is, the wire type
of the line should be the same for the whole length. If there are several wire types
on the same line, an average line reactance value can be used to get an
approximate distance value to the fault. Names and reactance values for widely
used overhead wires are:
290 P3U/en M/H006

• Sparrow: 0.408 ohms/km or 0.656 ohms/mile

• Raven: 0.378 ohms/km or 0.608 ohms/mile
The fault locator is normally used in the incoming bay of the substation.
Therefore, the fault location is obtained for the whole network with just one relay.
The algorithm functions in the following order:
1. The needed measurements (phase currents and voltages) are continuously

available.
2. The fault distance calculation can be triggered in two ways: by opening a

feeder circuit breaker due to a fault and sudden increase in phase currents
(Enable Xfault calc1 + Triggering digital input). Another option is to use only
the sudden increase in the phase currents (Enable Xfault calc1).
3. Phase currents and voltages are registered in three stages: before the fault,
during the fault and after the faulty feeder circuit breaker was opened.
4. The fault distance quantities are calculated.

5. Two phases with the biggest fault current are selected.
6. The load currents are compensated.
7. The faulty line length reactance is calculated.
Table 118 - Setting parameters of the main short-circuit fault locator
Triggering -; - - Trigger mode (-

digital input = triggering
DI1–DI18
based on
DI1 – DI16 sudden increase
VI1–VI4 of phase
current,
VO1–VO6
otherwise
NI1–NI64 sudden increase
POC1–POC16 of phase current

+ DIx/VIx)
Line reactance 0.010–10.000 Ohms/km 0.389 Line reactance

of the line. This
is used only to
convert the fault
reactance to
kilometers.
dItrig 10–800 %IN 50 Trig current

(sudden
increase of
phase current)
P3U/en M/H006 291

Blocked before 10–600 s 70 Blocks function

next trig for this time
after trigger.
This is used for
blocking
calculation in
autoreclose.
Xmax limit 0.5–500.0 Ohm 11.0 Limit for

maximum
reactance. If the
reactance value
is above the set
limit, the
calculation
result is not
shown.
Event Disabled; - Enabled Event mask

Enabled
Table 119 - Measured and recorded values of the main short circuit fault locator
Measured Distance km Distance to the

values/ fault
recorded values
Xfault ohm Fault reactance
Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Time ms Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Pre A Pre-fault current

(=load current)
Fault A Current during

the fault
Post A Post-fault
current
Udrop % Un Voltage dip

during the fault
292 P3U/en M/H006

Durati s Fault duration
Type - Fault type

(1-2,2-3,1-3,1-2-
3)
P3U/en M/H006 293

Figure 147 - Settings with fault location algorithm at incomer side 1
294 P3U/en M/H006

Voltages
dI
Currents
PRE-FAULT TIME FAULT TIME WITH THE BREAKER POST-FAULT

MORE THAN 2 OPERATION TIME INCLUDED HAS TO ONLY FEW
SECONDS BE 0.08-1 SECONDS CYCLES
IN CASE THE DIGITAL INPUT IS USED TOGETHER WITH THE

CURRENT CHANGE THE INPUT SIGNAL HAS TO BE ACTIVATED
AT LEAST 0.5 SECONDS AFTER THE FAULT OCCURES
P3U/en M/H006 295

Figure 148 - Application example with fault location algorithm at the feeder side
Voltages
dI
Currents
PRE-FAULT TIME FAULT TIME WITH THE BREAKER POST-FAULT

MORE THAN 2 OPERATION TIME INCLUDED HAS TO ONLY FEW
SECONDS BE 0.08-1 SECONDS CYCLES
IN CASE THE DIGITAL INPUT IS USED TOGETHER WITH THE

CURRENT CHANGE THE INPUT SIGNAL HAS TO BE ACTIVATED
AT LEAST 0.5 SECONDS AFTER THE FAULT OCCURES
296 P3U/en M/H006

6.16 Feeder fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
ANSI 21FL Feeder Motor
P3U10
P3U20
P3U30 x x
Description
The device includes a stand-alone fault locator algorithm. The algorithm can
locate a short-circuit fault and a ground fault in radially-operated networks.
The fault location is given in reactance (ohms) and kilometers or miles. The fault
value can then be exported, for example, with an event to a distribution
management system (DMS). The system can then localize the fault. If a DMS is
not available, the distance to the fault is displayed as kilometers and as a
reactance value. However, the distance value is valid only if the line reactance is
set correctly.
Four segments with different reactance values can be configured for a line.
Names and reactance values for widely used overhead wires are:
• Sparrow: 0.408 ohms/km or 0.656 ohms/mile

• Raven: 0.378 ohms/km or 0.608 ohms/mile
This fault locator cannot be used in incomer because the locator has no ability to
compensate effect of healthy feeders away.
When the feeder fault locator is calculating short-circuit impedance, the following
formula is used:
V A −V B VA = Vector between the voltage and the

Z AB = ground
IA − IB
VB = Vector between the voltage and the
ground
IA = Vector between the current and the

ground
IB = Vector between the current and the

ground
When the feeder fault locator is calculating ground fault impedance, the following
formula is used:
P3U/en M/H006 297

VA VA = Vector between the voltage and the

ZA =
I A + k × 3I 0 ground
IA = Vector between the current and the

ground
k = Ground factor k, needs to be set by

user
3IN = Ground fault overcurrent, calculated

from phase currents (IN Calc)
The ground factor k is calculated with the following formula:
K0 = (Z0L-Z1L) / (3 x Z1L)
Z0L = Zero sequence line impedance
Z1L = Positive sequence line impedance
Triggering of the fault reactance calculation happens when the start value is
exceeded or both “Start setting” and “Triggering digital input” terms are fulfilled.
When used, “Triggering digital input” can be either digital or virtual input.
Table 120 - Setting parameters of feeder fault locator
Start setting 0.10–5.00 xIn 1.2 Current limit for

triggering.
Triggering -; - - Trigger mode (=

digital input triggering based
DI1–DI18
on sudden
DI1 – DI16 increase of
VI1–VI4 phase current,
otherwise
VO1–VO6
sudden increase
NI1–NI64 of phase current
POC1–POC16 + DIx / VIx /

VOx / NIx /
POCx)
Line reactance 0.010–10.000 Ohms / km 0.491 Line reactance

of the line. This
is used only to
convert the fault
reactance to
kilometer.
Ground factor 0.000–10.000 - 0.678 Calculated

ground factor
from line
specifications
298 P3U/en M/H006

Ground factor -60 to +60 ° 10 Angle of

angle calculated
ground factor
from line
specifications
Event enabling Off/On - On Event mask
Advanced settings
Uavg limit 1.0–90.0 % Un 2.0 If the average of

the phase
voltages is
below this limit,
the voltage level
is considered
negligible, and
the averages
from the last
second are
used as angles
for the voltages.
IN limit 0.10–5.00 xIn/A 0.50 If the measured

IN is above this
limit, a ground
fault has
occurred
(otherwise,
there is a short-
circuit fault). A
ground fault is
indicated by N
in the fault type
(for example 2-
N or 3-N).
P3U/en M/H006 299

DI timeout 0.02–10.00 s 1.00 If a triggering

digital input is
used, it must be
asserted within
this time from
the start of the
fault.
Release timeout 0.02–2.00 s 0.50 When a fault

has been
detected and
handled, the
fault locator
waits for the
release timeout,
then waits until
all the phase
currents are
below the start
limit, after which
the fault locator
resets.
Table 121 - Measured and recorded values of feeder fault locator
Measured Distance km Distance to the

values/ fault
recorded values
Xfault ohm Fault reactance
Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Fault A Current during

the fault
Udrop % Un Voltage dip

during the fault
Type - Fault type (1-2,

2-3, 1-3, 1-2-3,
1-N, 2-N, 3-N,
1-N-2-N, 2-N-3-
N, 3-N-1-N, 1-
N-2-N-3-N)
300 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 149 - Feeder and incomer fault locator setting view
NOTE: In the fault log, the Pre-fault current and Current after fault columns
are only used for the incomer fault locator.
P3U/en M/H006 301

6.17 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74)

Description
Trip circuit supervision is used to ensure that the wiring from the protective relay
to a circuit breaker (CB) is in order. Even though the trip circuit is unused most of
the time, keeping it in order is important so that the CB can be tripped whenever
the relay detects a fault in the network.
Also the closing circuit can be supervised using the same principle.
NOTE: Apply trip circuit supervision using a digital input and its programmable
time delay.
6.17.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input
The benefits of this scheme are that only one digital inputs is needed and no extra
wiring from the relay to the circuit breaker (CB) is needed. Also, supervising a 24
Vdc trip circuit is possible.
The drawback is that an external resistor is needed to supervise the trip circuit on
both CB positions. If supervising during the closed position only is enough, the
resistor is not needed.
• The digital input is connected parallel to the trip contacts (see Figure 150).
• The digital input is configured as normal closed (NC).
• The digital input delay is configured to be longer than the maximum fault time
to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit fault alarm when the trip contact is closed.
• The digital input is connected to a relay in the output matrix giving out any trip
circuit alarm.
• The trip relay must be configured as non-latched. Otherwise, a superfluous
trip circuit fault alarm follows after the trip contact operates, and the relay
remains closed because of latching.
• By utilizing an auxiliary contact of the CB for the external resistor, also the
auxiliary contact in the trip circuit can be supervised.
302 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 150 - Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external
resistor R
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
R
-VAUX
A. Digital input 1 F. Circuit breaker compartment

B. Trip relay G. Close control
C. Alarm relay for trip circuit failure H. Open coil
D. Trip circuit failure alarm I. Close coil
E. Relay compartment
The circuit-breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB

position is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is
complete.
This is applicable to any digital inputs.
NOTE: The need for the external resistor R depends on the application and
circuit breaker manufacturer's specifications.
P3U/en M/H006 303

Figure 151 - Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary
contacts
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52a
-VAUX
R
H
CB
-VAUX

Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external resistor R. The
circuit breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB
position is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is
complete.
Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contacts. This is
applicable for any digital inputs.
304 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 152 - Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input when the circuit
breaker is in open position
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
R
-VAUX

P3U/en M/H006 305

Figure 153 - Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary
contacts. Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input, when the circuit
breaker is in open position
+VAUX = 24 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
C
D
0.5 s
G F
52a
-VAUX
R
H
CB
-VAUX

Figure 154 - Example of digital input DI7 configuration for trip circuit supervision
with one digital input
306 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 155 - Example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision with
one digital input
Example of dimensioning the external resistor R
VAUX = 110 Vdc - 20 % + 10%, Auxiliary voltage with tolerance
VDI = 18 Vdc, Threshold voltage of the digital input
IDI = 3 mA, Typical current needed to activate the digital input including a 1 mA
safety margin.
PCOIL = 50 W, Rated power of the open coil of the circuit breaker. If this value is
not known, 0 Ω can be used for the RCOIL.
VMIN = VAUX - 20 % = 88 V
VMAX = VAUX + 10 % = 121 V
RCOIL =V2AUX / PCOIL = 242 Ω.
The external resistance value is calculated using Equation 40:
Equation 40
V MIN − V DI − I DI ⋅ RCoil
R=
I DI
R = (88 – 18 – 0.003 x 242)/0.003 = 23.1 kΩ
In practice, the coil resistance has no effect.
By selecting the next smaller standard size, we get 22 kΩ.
The power rating for the external resistor is estimated using Equation 41 and
Equation 42.
The Equation 41 is for the CB open situation including a 100 % safety margin to
limit the maximum temperature of the resistor:
Equation 41
2
P = 2 ⋅ I DI ⋅R
P = 2 x 0.0032 x 22000 = 0.40 W
Select the next bigger standard size, for example 0.5 W.
P3U/en M/H006 307

When the trip contacts are still closed and the CB is already open, the resistor
has to withstand much higher power (Equation 42) for this short time:
Equation 42
2
U MAX
P=
R
P = 1212 / 22000 = 0.67 W
A 0.5 W resistor is enough for this short time peak power, too. However, if the trip
relay is closed for longer than a few seconds, a 1 W resistor should be used.
6.17.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs
The benefit of this scheme is that no external resistor is needed.
The drawbacks are that two digital inputs (DIs) from two separate groups and two
extra wires from the relay to the CB compartment are needed. Additionally, the
minimum allowed auxiliary voltage is 48 V dc which is more than twice the
threshold voltage of the dry digital input because when the CB is in open position,
the two digital inputs are in series.
When two DIs are connected in a series, the switching threshold value used with
one DI is too high. Therefore, a lower value must be selected: 24 V if the nominal
operation voltage for DI inputs is 110 V or 110 V if the nominal operation voltage
is 220 V.
• The first digital input is connected parallel to the auxiliary contact of the circuit
breaker's open coil.
• Another auxiliary contact is connected in series with the circuitry of the first
digital input. This makes it possible to supervise also the auxiliary contact in
the trip circuit.
• The second digital input is connected in parallel with the trip contacts.
• Both inputs are configured as normal closed (NC).
• The user’s programmable logic is used to combine the digital input signals
with an AND port. The delay is configured to be longer than the maximum
fault time to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit fault alarm when the trip contact
is closed.
• The output from the logic is connected to a relay in the output matrix giving
out any trip circuit alarm.
• Both digital inputs must have their own common potential.
Using the other digital inputs in the same group as the upper DI in Figure 156
is not possible in most applications. Using the other digital inputs in the same
group as the lower DI in Figure 156 is limited because the whole group is tied
to the auxiliary voltage VAUX.
In Figure 156, the supervised circuitry in this CB position is double-lined. The

digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is complete.
308 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 156 - Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs and closed CB
+VAUX = 48 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
& 0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
-VAUX

In Figure 157, the two digital inputs are in series.
P3U/en M/H006 309

Figure 157 - Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs and CB in open position
+VAUX = 48 Vdc ... 240 Vdc
A
comm
C
D
& 0.5 s
G F
52b 52a
-VAUX
H
CB
-VAUX

If DI3–DI16 are used, the minimum voltage has to be 96 Vdc.
Figure 158 - An example of digital input configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two dry digital inputs DI1 and DI2
310 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 159 - An example of logic configuration for trip circuit supervision with two
digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
Figure 160 - An example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two digital inputs
P3U/en M/H006 311

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 7 Communication and protocols
7 Communication and protocols
7.1 Cybersecurity
According to a classic model of information security, the three security goals are:
• confidentiality (prevention of unauthorized disclosure of information)

• integrity (prevention of unauthorized modification of information)
• availability (ensuring that information is always available to authorized users)
These goals may be used as a starting point in designing security solutions for
electric power distribution.
We recommend that computer systems used to design or operate electric power

distribution systems are designed with the principle of least privilege, in other
words, that users only have those access rights that they needs to perform their
duties. All workstations and servers should also have an effective antimalware
solution in place, such as a virus scanner. Finally, these computer systems need
to be protected with adequate physical security measures to prevent physical
tampering of the devices or networks.
NOTICE
To improve cybersecurity:
• Change all passwords from their default values when taking the protection
device into use.
• Change all passwords regularly.
• Ensure a minimum level of password complexity according to common
password guidelines.

access.
Related topics
2.4 Access to device configuration
7.2 Communication ports

In the front panel, there is a USB port for connection to the Easergy Pro setting
and configuration tool.
At the back, the relay may optionally have the following connections, depending
on the type of the communication option:
• RS-485 connection (remote port)

• RS-232 connection for serial protocols (remote and extension ports), and in
addition clock synchronization port (IRIG-B).
• 1 x RJ-45 or 1 x LC connection for Ethernet protocols (Ethernet port).
• 2 x RJ-45 or 2 x LC connection for Ethernet protocols (Ethernet port).
312 P3U/en M/H006

7 Communication and protocols Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
Each communication port can be individually enabled or disabled with the

Configurator access level via:
• the front panel of the Easergy P3 protection device
• Easergy Pro
• the web HMI
NOTE: By default and when the device comes from the factory, the
communication ports are off. Each serial port, Ethernet port and protocol (for
example Telnet or HTTP) must be enabled before they can be used.
7.2.1 Remote and extension ports
Remote and extension ports are used for serial protocols like Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103. The physical interface is described in 9.6 Connections.
The parameters for the port can be set via the relay's front panel or using Easergy
Pro. The number of available serial ports depends on the type of the
communication option ordered.
NOTE: The relay supports using two communication protocols simultaneously
but the same protocol can be used only once. The protocol configuration
menu contains selection for the protocol, port settings and message/error/
timeout counters.
7.2.2 Ethernet port
The Ethernet port is used for Ethernet protocols like IEC61850 and Modbus TCP.
The physical interface is described in 9.6 Connections.
The parameters for the port can be set via the device's front panel or using
Easergy Pro. Two different protocols can be used simultaneously – both protocols
use the same IP address and MAC address (but different port number).
P3U/en M/H006 313

7.2.3 Disabling the Ethernet communication
NOTICE
• To improve cybersecurity, disable the Ethernet communication in

environments where effective antimalware solutions have not been taken
into use.
• The device is not capable of transmitting data encrypted using Ethernet
protocols. If other users gain access to your network, transmitted information
can be disclosed or subject to tampering.
• For transmitting data over an internal network, segment the network
physically or logically and restrict access using standard controls such as
firewalls and other relevant features supported by your device such as
IPTable whitelisting.
• For transmitting data over an external network, encrypt protocol
transmissions over all external connections using an encrypted tunnel, TLS
wrapper or a similar solution.

access.
1. To disable all Ethernet-based protocols:
a. In Easergy Pro, go to Communication > Protocol configuration.
b. Under Ethernet, disable the Ethernet port by unselecting the Enable

Ethernet communication checkbox.
Figure 161 - Disabling the Ethernet port
This disables all the Ethernet-based protocols.
2. To disable Ethernet protocols separately:
314 P3U/en M/H006

a. Under Ethernet, select the Enable Ethernet communication checkbox.
b. Unselect the Enable... checkbox for the servers or protocols you want to
disable.
Figure 162 - Disabling individual Ethernet-based protocols
P3U/en M/H006 315

7.3 Storm protection

Storm protection limits the number of broadcast messages, for example, address
resolution protocol (ARP) messages that are forwarded to the central processing
unit (CPU) or to the protection device’s second Ethernet interface. Storm
protection may be necessary if the Ethernet network contains devices that may
send a big amount of ARP requests when starting up or during the normal
operation. If storm protection is not enabled, the protection devices can be
overloaded with the big number of ARP messages.
The storm protection limit defines how big percentage of the broadcast messages
are forwarded to the CPU.
Storm protection level 0.01% means 15 packets per second in a 100 Mbps
network. Broadcast traffic forwarded to CPU can be limited down to 15% for 100
Mbps. This is based on a theoretical maximum of 100 packets per second that the
CPU can receive and process.
Storm protection can be enabled in the Advanced Ethernet options setting view
with the Storm protection on Port1 and Storm protection on Port2
parameters.
Figure 163 - Storm protection properties
7.4 Communication protocols

The communication protocols enable the transfer of the following type of data:
• events
• status information
• measurements
• control commands
• clock synchronization
• some settings through SPA bus, IEC-103, Modbus and IEC-61850 protocols
• disturbance recordings through IEC-103, Modbus and IEC-61850 protocols
This product contains software developed by Viola Systems.
7.4.1 Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP
Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP protocols are often used in power plants and
industrial applications. The difference between these two protocols is the media.
316 P3U/en M/H006

Modbus TCP uses Ethernet and Modbus RTU uses RS-485, optic fibre, or
RS-232.
Modbus TCP supports using two masters and IEC 61850 at the same time.
Easergy Pro shows a list of all available data items for Modbus. They are also
available as a zip file ("Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip").
The information available via Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP includes:
• status values
• control commands
• measurement values
• events
• protection settings
• disturbance recordings
The Modbus communication is activated via a menu selection with the parameter
"Protocol".
For more information on Modbus configuration, see the document

P3APS18025EN Modbus configuration instructions.
For the Ethernet interface configuration, see 7.2.2 Ethernet port.
7.4.2 Profibus DP
The Profibus DP protocol is widely used in the industry. An external VPA 3CG
option module and VX084 cable are required.
Device profile "continuous mode"
In this mode, the relay is sending a configured set of data parameters

continuously to the Profibus DP master. The benefit of this mode is the speed and
easy access to the data in the Profibus master. The drawback is the maximum
buffer size of 128 bytes, which limits the number of data items transferred to the
master. Some PLCs have their own limitation for the Profibus buffer size, which
may further limit the number of transferred data items.
Device profile "Request mode"
Using the request mode, it is possible to read all the available data from the
Easergy P3 relay and still use only a very short buffer for Profibus data transfer.
The drawback is the slower overall speed of the data transfer and the need of
increased data processing at the Profibus master as every data item must be
separately requested by the master.
NOTE: In the request mode, it is not possible to read continuously only one
single data item. At least two different data items must be read in turn to get
updated data from the relay.
There is a separate manual for VPA 3CG for the continuous mode and request
mode. The manual is available for downloading on our website.
Available data
Easergy Pro shows the list of all available data items for both modes. A separate
document "Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip" is also available.
P3U/en M/H006 317

7.4.3 SPA-bus
The relay has full support for the SPA-bus protocol including reading and writing
the setting values. Also, reading multiple consecutive status data bits,
measurement values or setting values with one message is supported.
Several simultaneous instances of this protocol, using different physical ports, are
possible, but the events can be read by one single instance only.
There is a separate document "Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip"

of SPA-bus data items available.
7.4.4 IEC 60870-5-103 (IEC-103)
The IEC standard 60870-5-103 "Companion standard for the informative interface
of protection equipment" provides a standardized communication interface to a
primary system (master system).
The unbalanced transmission mode of the protocol is used, and the relay
functions as a secondary station (slave) in the communication. Data is transferred
to the primary system using the "data acquisition by polling" principle.
The IEC functionality includes application functions:

• station initialization
• general interrogation
• clock synchronization
• command transmission.
It is also possible to transfer parameter data and disturbance recordings via the
IEC 103 protocol interface.
The following application service data unit (ASDU) types can be used:
• ASDU 1: Time-tagged message
• ASDU 3: Measurands I
• ASDU 5: Identification message
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization
• ASDU 8: Termination of general interrogation
• ASDU 10: Generic data
The relay accepts:
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization
• ASDU 7: Initiation of general interrogation
• ASDU 10: Generic data
• ASDU 20: General command
• ASDU 21: Generic command
• ASDU 23: Disturbance recorder file transfer
The data in a message frame is identified by:

• type identification
• function type
• information number.
These are fixed for data items in the compatible range of the protocol, for
example, the trip of I> function is identified by:
• type identification = 1
• function type = 160
• information number = 90
318 P3U/en M/H006

"Private range" function types are used for such data items that are not defined by
the standard (for example, the status of the digital inputs and the control of the
objects).
The function type and information number used in private range messages is
configurable. This enables flexible interfacing to different master systems.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-103 in Easergy P3 relays, see the "IEC 103
Interoperability List.pdf" and "Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip"
documents.
7.4.5 DNP 3.0
The relay supports communication using the DNP 3.0 protocol. The following
DNP 3.0 data types are supported:
• binary input
• binary input change
• double-bit input
• binary output
• analog input
• counters
For more information, see the “DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document.pdf" and
“"Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip"”. DNP 3.0 communication is
activated via menu selection.
7.4.6 IEC 60870-5-101 (IEC-101)
The IEC 60870-5-101 standard is derived from the IEC 60870-5 protocol standard
definition. In Easergy P3 relays, the IEC 60870-5-101 communication protocol is
available via menu selection. The relay works as a controlled outstation (slave)
unit in unbalanced mode.
The supported application functions include process data transmission, event

transmission, command transmission, general interrogation, clock
synchronization, transmission of integrated totals, and acquisition of transmission
delay.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-101 in Easergy P3 relays, see the

"Communication parameter protocol mappings.zip" document.
7.4.7 IEC 61850
The IEC 61850 protocol is available with the optional communication module. It
can be used to read or write static data from the relay or to receive events and to
receive or send GOOSE messages from or to other relays.
The IEC 61850 server interface includes the following features:
• configurable data model: selection of logical nodes corresponding to active

application functions
• configurable pre-defined data sets
• supported dynamic data sets created by clients
P3U/en M/H006 319

• supported reporting function with buffered and unbuffered report control

blocks
• support for changing selected setting parameters of the protection functions
• sending analog values over GOOSE
• supported control modes:
◦ direct with normal security
◦ direct with enhanced security
◦ select before operation with normal security
◦ select before operation with enhanced security
• supported horizontal communication with GOOSE: configurable GOOSE
publisher data sets, configurable filters for GOOSE subscriber inputs, GOOSE
inputs available in the application logic matrix
• 32 data points can be published with GOOSE (two goose control blocks with
maximum 16 data points).
• 64 binary data points and five analog data points can be subscribed in
GOOSE (maximum five different MAC addresses).
• The maximum number of clients is eight (the maximum number of BRCBs is
eight and the maximum number or URCBs is eight).
• Both Ed1 and Ed2 are supported and can be selected with a parameter.
For additional information, see separate documents:

• IEC 61850 Edition 2 Certificate for Easergy P3
• Easergy P3 communication protocol parameter mapping
• IEC 61850 configuration instructions
7.4.8 Ethernet/IP
The relay supports communication using the Ethernet/IP protocol which is a part
of the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) family. The Ethernet/IP protocol is
available with the optional in-built Ethernet port. The protocol can be used to read
or write data from or to the relay using request / response communication or via
cyclic messages transporting data assigned to assemblies (sets of data).
For more detailed information and parameter lists for Ethernet/IP, refer to a
separate application note “EtherNet/IP configuration instructions.pdf”.
For the complete data model of Ethernet/IP, see the document “DeviceNet and
EtherNetIP data model.pdf” and "Communication parameter protocol
mappings.zip".
7.5 IP filter
Easergy P3 devices contain a simple IP filter (IP firewall), which can be used to
filter incoming TCP/IP connections. This filtering applies only to Modbus TCP,
DNP3, and Ethernet/IP, and can be configured via Easergy Pro.
320 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 164 - IP firewall setting view
The IP filter works based on configured rules. Incoming IP packets are compared
against the rules, and when a matching rule is found, the packet is handled using
the action specified for the rule. If none of the rules matches the packet, the
default action is taken on the packet. The IP filter records how many times a
packet has matched a rule. The number is shown in the Counter column.
On TCP connections, the rules are mostly applied only when a connection is
opened.
7.5.1 Configuring the IP filter
You can configure up to 10 rules for the IP filter via Easergy Pro and enable each
rule individually.
1. In Easergy Pro, go to Communication > Protocol configuration.
2. In the IP firewall setting view, select the Enable IP firewall checkbox to

enable the firewall.
P3U/en M/H006 321

Figure 165 - IP firewall setting view
3. In the IP firewall setting view, create a rule.
a. In the Name column, give the rule a name (maximum 32 characters) that
describes its purpose .
b. In the IP address column, specify an IP address.

The IP address is used to filter the incoming IP packets based on the
(apparent) IP address of the source device. There are four options.
Table 122 - IP address for the IP filter
IP address Description
Any By writing a dash or value zero in this

column, the rule is set to match any
source IP address. The column shows
a dash.
Single IP address If a single IP address (such as

192.168.0.10) is written here, the
packets (or connections) must originate
from this IP address to match the rule.
IP subnet If all IP addresses in a subnet should

match this rule, write the subnet here
using the CIDR notation. For example,
notation 192.168.0.0/24 matches all IP
addresses in the range 192.168.0.0–
192.168.0.255.
IP address range If a range of IP addresses (for

example, 192.168.0.20–192.168.0.30)
is written here, packets from these
addresses match the rule. Both end
points of this range are inclusive.
322 P3U/en M/H006

NOTE: If the matching range of IP addresses can be expressed using

the CIDR notation, the range is expressed in this format, regardless of
how the range was entered into the configuration. As a result, the
presentation format of the configuration as it is read from the device
might not match the format in which it was entered. This may cause
problems with Easergy Pro because this tool expects the presentation
format to match exactly. To work around this issue, select the Reset
and read current view command in Easergy Pro after writing the
configuration. This is required to handle the large number of different
input formats supported.
c. In the Action column, specify an action for the rule.

There are four options.
Table 123 - Actions for IP filter
Action Description
Allow The packet is allowed to continue

normally. This means that the specified
source devices can use the specified
services on the P3 device.
Reject91) The packet is blocked and the remote

peer is informed about this decision.
Drop The packet is blocked without informing

the remote peer.
Cont. The processing of the other rules

continues on this packet normally.
91) Because of the implementation details in the Easergy P3 TCP/IP stack, rules that are
given the Reject action sometimes behave as if their action was Drop.
7.5.2 Unexpected packets
The IP filter also can also detect unexpected packets. For example, if a client
attempts to close a connection that does not exist, this is considered an
unexpected packet.
Certain techniques used by hackers produce unexpected packets, but such

packets may also appear on the network if some packets are lost or dropped
because of a malfunctioning network device. Some devices may also have
programming errors or bugs produce unexpected packets in their TCP/IP stack.
The unexpected packets feature attempts to distinguish between these two

sources based on the number of unexpected packets detected within a
configurable “recent period”. If the number of these packets is greater than the
configured limit, the selected alarm signal is triggered.
P3U/en M/H006 323

Figure 166 - Unexpected packets setting view
Table 124 - Parameters for unexpected packages
Parameter Description
Counter Counts the number of unexpected packets

detected within the configured recent
period.
Limit The limit after which an alarm is given
Recent period The number of unexpected packets

counted within this period is compared to
the configured limit value
• Default value: 1 minute
• Maximum value: 65535 minutes (45
days)
Alarm Select which CS alarm signal (CS Alarm

1/CS Alarm 2) is activated when the set
limit is exceeded. The alarms can be
assigned to other signals in the output
matrix.
7.5.3 Alarms
Active cybersecurity (CS) alarms can be viewed in the Alarms view. When an
alarm signal has been asserted, it remains active until it is cleared with the Clear
alarms command.
Figure 167 - Alarms
324 P3U/en M/H006

8 Applications and configuration examples Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
8 Applications and configuration examples

This chapter describes the protection functions in different protection applications.
The relay can be used for line/feeder protection of medium voltage networks with
a grounded, low-resistance grounded, isolated or a compensated neutral point.
The relays have all the required functions to be applied as a backup relay in high-
voltage networks or to a transformer differential relay. In addition, the relay
includes all the required functions to be applied as a motor protection relay for
rotating machines in industrial protection applications.
The relays provide a circuit breaker control function. Additional primary switching
relays (grounding switches and disconnector switches) can also be controlled
from the front panel or the control or SCADA/automation system. A
programmable logic function is also implemented in the relay for various
applications, for example interlockings schemes.
8.1 Substation feeder protection
Figure 168 - Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 used in substation feeder
protection
P3U/en M/H006 325

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 8 Applications and configuration examples
In this application, an instantaneous overcurrent stage 50/51-3 of the relay

located in the incoming feeder is blocked with a start signal coming from the
relays located in the outgoing feeders. This prevents the instantaneous stage
from operating in the incoming feeder if the fault happens in the outgoing feeders.
The interlocking scheme enables a lower time delay setting for the instantaneous
stage of the incoming feeder, thus providing shorter busbar fault tripping times.
Figure 169 - Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 used in substation feeder
protection in compensated network
In this application, the network grounding information, taken from Petersen coil, is
obtained for the directional ground fault overcurrent stage through relay's digital
input. The grounding status controls dynamically the operation characteristics of
the directional ground fault overcurrent stage. For a grounded network, Res mode
and for an isolated network, Cap mode is applied.
326 P3U/en M/H006

8.2 Industrial feeder / motor protection
Figure 170 - Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 used in cable protection of an
industry plant network.
The relay supports directional ground fault protection and three-phase overcurrent
protection that is required in a cable feeder. Furthermore, the thermal stage can
be used to protect the cable against overloading. All necessary motor protection
functions are supported when using the motor application mode.
8.3 Using CSH120 and CSH200 with core balance CTs

General
The CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct ground fault
overcurrent measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter.
Because of their low-voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
P3U/en M/H006 327

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 8 Applications and configuration examples
These core balance CTs can be connected to the Easergy P3 protection device
range when 0.2 A IN input is used. This needs to be determined when ordering
the protection device (select 0.2 A for the ground fault current input in the order
code).
Settings in the Easergy P3 protection device
When CSH120 or CSH200 is connected to an Easergy P3 protection device, to

secure correct operation of the protection functions and measurement values, use
the following values in the Scaling setting view:
• INX CT primary: 470 A

• INX CT secondary: 1 A
• Nominal INX input: 0.2 A
NOTE: X refers to the IN input channel number (1 or 2).
Figure 171 - Scalings view for I01 input
Lower scaling values
The device also allows selecting ten times lower scaling values. Set the values to:
• INX CT primary: 47 A
• INX CT secondary: 0.1 A
• Nominal INX input: 0.2 A
The minimum setting for the primary current is then 0.005 x 47 A = 0,235 A.
Measuring specifications
When CSH120 or CSH200 is used with Easergy P3 protection devices the

measuring range is 0.2 A–300 A of primary current. The minimum setting for
primary current is 0.005xIN which in this case means 0.005 x 470 A = 2.35 A of
primary current.
328 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 172 - Ground fault overcurrent setting view
P3U/en M/H006 329

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 9 Installation
9 Installation
9.1 Safety in installation

This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed precisely
before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment.
Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below. Only qualified
personnel, equipped with appropriate individual protection equipment, may work
on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the
equipment and of the system to which it is being connected.
• are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted
safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize
equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it.
• are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices.
• are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH BEFORE
PERFORMING ANY INTERVENTION:
• Turn off all power supplying the protection device and the equipment in
which it is installed before working on it.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that power
is off.
• Replace all devices, doors, and covers before turning on power to this
equipment.
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment and follow safe electrical
work practices. See local regulation.
• Do not install this product in ATEX class 0, 1 and 2 areas.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
HAZARD OF FIRE
Insufficient tightening causes high contact resistance and overheat with

current, in extreme cases, even loose and ineffective connections and fire
hazard. Tighten all the electric connections with specified torque.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious

injury.
330 P3U/en M/H006

9 Installation Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNEXPECTED OPERATION
Do not energize the primary circuit before this protection relay is properly
configured.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury,

or equipment damage.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF FIRE, DAMAGE TO ELECTRONICS OR MALFUNCTION
If you are authorized to withdraw the relay:

• Disconnect the power supply before removing or replacing a module or
the withdrawable part of the protection relay.
• Never touch electronic parts (electrostatic discharge).
• Before replacing the withdrawable part, visually check the cleanliness and
if there are any foreign objects in the case, the withdrawable part and the
connectors.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.
Protection Class I equipment
Before energizing the equipment it must be grounded using the protective

conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in
the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (ground) connection must not be removed since the
protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
When the protective (ground) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate
cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (ground)
conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional ground
connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (ground)
connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (ground) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(AWG 14) (3.3 mm² (AWG 12) for North America) unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by
local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (ground) connection must be low-inductance and as

short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded
when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
NOTE: Use only copper conductors with minimum 75°C rating.
P3U/en M/H006 331

9.2 Checking the consignment

Check that the unit packaging and the seal are intact at the receipt of the delivery.
Our products leave the factory in closed, sealed packaging. If the transport
packaging is open or the seal is broken, the confidentiality and authenticity of the
information contained in the products cannot be ensured.
9.3 Product identification

Each Easergy P3 relay is delivered in a separate package containing:
• Easergy P3 protection relay with the necessary terminal connectors

• Production testing certificate
• Quick Start manual
Optional accessories are delivered in separate packages.
To identify an Easergy P3 protection relay, see the labels on the package and on
the side of the relay.
Serial number label
Figure 173 - P3U Serial number label
Vn: 100/110V 1 Made in Finland

fn: 50/60Hz 2 Mfg Date: 31.7.2017 9
In: 1/5A 3 MAC: 001AD301203A 10
Io1n: 1/5A 4
Pmax: 15W 5
Vaux: 48 230 Vac/dc 6
Type: P3U30-5AAA1BCA 7
REL52003 11
S/N: EB173050011 8 VID: P3U30-016985 12
1. Rated voltage Vn
2. Rated frequency fn
3. Rated phase current In
4. Rated ground fault current I0n
5. Power consumption Pmax
6. Power supply operating range VAUX
7. Order code
8. Serial number
9. Manufacturing date
10. MAC address for TCP/IP communication
11. Short order code
12. Production identification
332 P3U/en M/H006

Unit package label
Figure 174 - P3U Unit package label
REL52010 A x1
Protection relay
Relais de protection
B Made in Finland
EB172720007
A REL52010
135716
Easergy - P3 C
D P3U30-5AAA2BDA
E
3 606481 3571 68
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
CS30323
F-92506 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX
A. Short order code D. Order code

B. Serial number E. EAN13 bar code
C. Internal product code
9.4 Storage
Store the relay in its original packaging in a closed, sheltered location with the
following ambient conditions:
• ambient temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C (or -40 °F to +158 °F)

• humidity < 90 %.
Check the ambient conditions and the packaging yearly.
9.5 Mounting
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. For clothing refer applicable local standards.
• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should
be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking
the technical characteristics of the device.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing relay to ensure that all power
is off.
• Do not open the secondary circuit of a live current transformer.
• Connect the device's protective ground to functional ground according to
the connection diagrams presented in this document.
P3U/en M/H006 333

Figure 175 - Panel mounting
A B
P3Uxx-5 214mm / 8.4″ 192mm / 7.6″
P3Uxx-6 226mm / 8.9″ 204mm / 8.0″
mm
128
171
in 5.04 A 2.5 124.5
6.72
155 0.1 4.90
Easergy 6.10
OK
176 137 B
F1 F2 6.94 5.39
O
I
13.25
0.52 144.5 6
5.69 12 6
A B 4.9
9.25 5.0 mm
0.36 0.2 in
28.5
1.12
Ea se rg
y 2 Ea se rg
y
9.5
0.37
120
139 4.72
OK
5.47
OK
F2
F2
9.5
F1
F1
O 0.37 O
1.
I
0.040-10
I
- 0.3
9
X1 (P3Uxx-6) X1 (P3Uxx-5) X2, X3, X4, X5
T max. 1.40Nm T max. 1.40Nm T max. 0.6Nm
12lb.in 12lb.in 5.3lb.in
0.8 x 4.0
5/32in x 0.03in
0.8 x 4.0 0.4 x 2.5 0.4 x 2.5

5/32in x 0.03in 3/32in x 0.015in 3/32in x 0.015in
T max. 0.80Nm
7lb.in
> 20
min. 2.5mm2
C 0.79
Ø 4-6mm
y
Ea se rg
y
Ea se rg
Nut M4
7mm 1.5Nm OK
OK
9/32in 13.3Ib in F2
F2
F1
F1
OK
OK
F2
F2 O
O
F1
F1
I
I
OO
II
334 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 176 - Panel mounting with the raising frame REL52834

mm 171
in A 124.5
6.72
110 4.90
Easergy 4.3
A B
B
176 P3Uxx-5 214mm / 8.4″ 147mm / 5.8″
137
OK
6.94 5.39
F1 F2 P3Uxx-6 226mm / 8.9″ 159mm / 6.2″
O
I
2.5
0.1
A B C
y
Ea se rg Ea se rg
y
rgyy
serg
Ease
Ea
OK
OK
F2
F2
F1 OK
OK
F1
F2
F2
F1
F1
O
O
I
I
OO
II
X1 (P3Uxx-6) 13.25
0.52
T max. 1.40Nm
D 144.5 6
12lb.in 5.69 12 6
4.9 mm
9.25 5.0 in
0.8 x 4.0 0.36 0.2
5/32in x 0.03in
28.5
1.12
X1 (P3Uxx-5) 2 Ea se rg y y
T max. 1.40Nm 9.5 Ea se rg
12lb.in 0.37
0.8 x 4.0 120
5/32in x 0.03in 139 4.72
T max. 0.80Nm
5.47
7lb.in
OK
OK
0.4 x 2.5
F2
9.5
F2
F1
3/32in x 0.015in F1
0.37
X2, X3, X4, X5 O
O
1.
0.040-12
T max. 0.6Nm I
I
5.3lb.in - 0.4
7
0.4 x 2.5
> 20
3/32in x 0.015in E 0.79
min. 2.5mm2
y
Ø 4-6mm Ea se rg
y
Ea se rg
OK
Nut M4 OK
F2
7mm 1.5Nm
F2
F1
F1
9/32in 13.3Ib in OK
F2
O
O
F1
I
I
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
Use protective gloves when moving and mounting the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.
P3U/en M/H006 335

Figure 177 - Example of the P3U alarm facial label insertion
1 Set group 1/2

Relay power
Io block
Relay status
Alarm Io > stage
Trip Io >> stage
I> stage
I>> stage
Set group 1/2 Io block

Relay power Relay status
Alarm Io > stage
Trip Io >> stage
I> stage
I>> stage
Set group 1/2 Io block

Relay power Relay status
Alarm Io > stage
Trip Io >> stage
I> stage
I>> stage
See "P3 Standard Series facial label instruction" document for more information.
Protective film
NOTICE
RISK OF DESTRUCTION OF THE RELAY
The protective film on the relay's display is plastic and can melt if exposed to
high temperatures intensive sunlight. Remove the protective film after mounting
the relay.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
9.6 Connections
NOTE: The figures show the relay outputs with the auxiliary power on and the
protection functions on standby mode.
NOTE: Digital inputs are polarity-free, which means that you can freely
choose "-" and "+" terminals for each digital input.
336 P3U/en M/H006

CARD SLOT ARRANGEMENT

WARNING! DO NOT REMOVE CARDS!
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES VY197B
9.6.1 Rear panel
Figure 178 - Pluggable Clamp 2xLC P3Uxx-5AAA3BDA
Figure 179 - Pluggable Clamp RJ45 ETH_RS232 without X2-X5 connectors

P3Uxx-5ABA1BEA
P3U/en M/H006 337

Terminal X1 connections
The Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 relays have two alternative pluggable
current input terminals containing automatic short circuiting if the terminal is
removed from its relay socket. Order option 5 has screw clamp terminals and
option 6 ring lug screw terminals.
Table 125 - Terminal X1 connections
- Phase current connection 5 = Pluggable clamp 6 = Pluggable ring lug

pins / input polarity / nominal
secondary current
1 IA (S1) 5/1A92) 5/1A92)
2 IA (S2)
3 IB (S1)
4 IB (S2)
5 IC (S1)
6 IC (S2)
Ground fault overcurrent A=1/5A B=0.2/1A A=1/5A B=0.2/1A

current connection pins / input
polarity / nominal secondary
current
7 IN (S1) 5A 1A 5A 1A
8 IN (S2)
9 IN (S1) 1A 0.2A 1A 0.2A
10 IN (S2)
92) Nominal secondary phase current can be scaled to 1-10A
NOTE: Connect the ground fault overcurrent I0 either to terminal pins 7–8 or
9–10 as the relay has only one I0 input channel.
338 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 180 - Option 5: Pluggable clamp Figure 181 - Option 6: Pluggable ring
connector lug connector
No Symbol Description
1 U4 Uo/ULN/ULL
(da/a/a)
2 U4
Uo/ULN/ULL
3 +/~
(dn/n/b)
4 -/~
Auxiliary voltage
Auxiliary voltage
P3U/en M/H006 339

- No Symbol Description
20 SF NC Self-diagnostic relay,
normal close when
19 SF NO
power ON
18 SF COM
Self-diagnostic relay,
17 T1 normal open when
16 T1 power ON
15 T2 Self-diagnostic relay,
common terminal
14 T2
Trip relay 1
13 T3
Trip relay 1
12 T3
Trip relay 2
11 T4
Trip relay 2
10 T4
Trip relay 3
9 A1 NC
Trip relay 3
8 A1 NO
Trip relay 4
7 A1 COM
Trip relay 4
6 DI2
Alarm relay 1,
5 DI2
normal closed
4 DI1 terminal
3 DI1 Alarm relay 1,
2 - normal open
1 - Alarm relay 1,
common
Digital input 2
Digital input 2
Digital input 1
Digital input 1
No connection
No connection
CAUTION
Do not invert the connectors X3, X4 and X5.
340 P3U/en M/H006

Terminal X4 with RS-485 communication, B = RS-485 + 8DI
Available in the P3U20 and P3U30 devices
20 DI10 Digital input 10
18 COM Common for digital

inputs 9–10
17 DI8
Digital input 8
16 DI7
Digital input 7
15 COM
Common for digital
14 DI6
inputs 7–8
13 DI6
Digital input 6
12 DI5
Digital input 6
11 DI5
Digital input 5
10 DI4
Digital input 5
9 DI4
Digital input 4
8 DI3
Digital input 4
7 DI3
Digital input 3
6 RS-485 term
Digital input 3
5 RS-485 -
RS-485 interface
4 RS-485 + termination resistor
3 RS-485 term for “-“ connection
2 RS-485 G RS-485 interface “-

“ connection
1 RS-485 SHD
RS-485 interface “+
“ connection
RS-485 interface
termination resistor
for “+“ connection
RS-485 interface
ground terminal
RS-485 interface
cable shield
connection
NOTE: Interconnect 3 & 4 and 5 & 6 when termination is needed.
CAUTION
P3U/en M/H006 341

Figure 182 - RS-485 multidrop connections
Terminal X4 with ethernet communication, C = 2 x RJ-45 + 8DI

inputs 9–10
11 DI8
Digital input 8
10 DI7
Digital input 7
9 COM
Common for digital
8 DI6
inputs 7–8
7 DI6
Digital input 6
6 DI5
Digital input 6
5 DI5
Digital input 5
4 DI4
Digital input 5
3 DI4
Digital input 4
2 DI3
Digital input 4
1 DI3
Digital input 3
Digital input 3
CAUTION
342 P3U/en M/H006

Terminal X4 with optical ethernet communication, D = 2 x LC + 8DI
Terminal X4 with optical ethernet communication, D = 2 x LC + 8DI

inputs 9–10
11 DI8
Digital input 8
10 DI7
Digital input 7
9 COM
Common for digital
8 DI6
inputs 7–8
7 DI6
Digital input 6
6 DI5
Digital input 6
5 DI5
Digital input 5
4 DI4
Digital input 5
3 DI4
Digital input 4
2 DI3
Digital input 4
1 DI3
Digital input 3
Digital input 3
CAUTION
P3U/en M/H006 343

Terminal X4 with ethernet and RS-232 communication, E = RJ + 232 + 8DI

with IRIG-B

inputs 9–10
11 DI8
Digital input 8
10 DI7
Digital input 7
9 COM
Common for digital
8 DI6
inputs 7–8
7 DI6
Digital input 6
6 DI5
Digital input 6
5 DI5
Digital input 5
4 DI4
Digital input 5
3 DI4
Digital input 4
2 DI3
Digital input 4
1 DI3
Digital input 3
Digital input 3
CAUTION
344 P3U/en M/H006

Terminal X4 with optical ethernet and RS-232 communication, F= LC + 232 +

8DI with IRIG-B
Ethernet LC fiber and RS-232 serial interfaces
Cable VX082, VX083 or VX084 is needed for connecting external option modules to the
RS-232 connector of the Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30.

inputs 9–10
11 DI8
Digital input 8
10 DI7
Digital input 7
9 COM
Common for digital
8 DI6
inputs 7–8
7 DI6
Digital input 6
6 DI5
Digital input 6
5 DI5
Digital input 5
4 DI4
Digital input 5
3 DI4
Digital input 4
2 DI3
Digital input 4
1 DI3
Digital input 3
Digital input 3
CAUTION
P3U/en M/H006 345

Terminal X4 with RS-485 communication, G = RS-485 + 6DI + 3DO
Available in the P3U20 device

inputs 6–8
16 DI5
Digital input 5
15 DI4
Digital input 4
14 DI3
Digital input 3
13 COM
Common for digital
12 T5
inputs 3–5
11 T5
Trip relay 5
10 T6
Trip relay 5
9 T6
Trip relay 6
8 T7
Trip relay 6
7 T7
Trip relay 7
6 RS-485 term
Trip relay 7
5 RS-485 -
RS-485 interface
4 RS-485 + termination resistor
3 RS-485 term for “-“ connection
2 RS-485 G RS-485 interface “-

“ connection
1 RS-485 SHD
RS-485 interface “+
“ connection
RS-485 interface
termination resistor
for “+“ connection
RS-485 interface
ground terminal
RS-485 interface
cable shield
connection
NOTE: Interconnect 3 & 4 and 5 & 6 when termination is needed.
CAUTION
346 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 183 - RS-485 multidrop connections
Terminal X4 with ethernet communication, H = 2 x RJ-45 + 6DI + 3DO

inputs 6–8
10 DI5
Digital input 5
9 DI4
Digital input 4
8 DI3
Digital input 3
7 COM
Common for digital
6 T5
inputs 3–5
5 T5
Trip relay 5
4 T6
Trip relay 5
3 T6
Trip relay 6
2 T7
Trip relay 6
1 T7
Trip relay 7
Trip relay 7
CAUTION
P3U/en M/H006 347

Terminal X4 with optical ethernet communication, I = 2 x LC + 6DI + 3DO

inputs 6–8

inputs 3–5
6 T5 Trip relay 5
5 T5 Trip relay 5
4 T6 Trip relay 6
3 T6 Trip relay 6
2 T7 Trip relay 7
1 T7 Trip relay 7
CAUTION
348 P3U/en M/H006

Terminal X5 B = 3U (100/110V) + 6DI + 3DO
No. Symbol Description
20 U1 ULN/ULL (a/a)
19 U1 ULN/ULL (n/b)
18 U2 ULN/ULL (a/a)
17 U2 ULN/ULL (n/b)
16 U3 Uo/ULN/ULL (da/a/a)
15 U3 Uo/ULN/ULL (dn/n/b)
14 T5 Trip relay 5
13 T5 Trip relay 5
12 T6 Trip relay 6
11 T6 Trip relay 6
10 T7 Trip relay 7
9 T7 Trip relay 7
8 DI 16 Digital input 16

inputs 14–16

inputs 11–13
CAUTION
P3U/en M/H006 349

Terminal X5 C = 6DI+3DO
No. Symbol Description
14 T5 Trip relay 5
13 T5 Trip relay 5
12 T6 Trip relay 6
11 T6 Trip relay 6
10 T7 Trip relay 7
9 T7 Trip relay 7

inputs 14–16

inputs 11–13
CAUTION
9.6.2 Auxiliary voltage
DANGER
Before connecting the devices, disconnect the supply voltage to the unit.
The external auxiliary voltage VAUX for the relay is connected to the pins X2: 3–4.
The voltage options are:
350 P3U/en M/H006

• Power A: 48 (-20%) – 230 (+10%) V ac/dc

• Power B: 24 V dc (-20% /+50%) or 24–48 (±20%) V dc93)
NOTE: Check the available power supply range from the device's serial
number label.
NOTICE
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
• If the relay is no longer supplied with power or is in permanent fault state,
the protection functions are no longer active and all the digital outputs are
dropped out.
• Check that the operating mode and SF relay wiring are compatible with the
installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage and

unwanted shutdown of the electrical installation.
9.6.3 Local port
The relay has a USB port in the front panel.
Protocol for the USB port
The front panel USB type B port is always using the command line protocol for
Easergy Pro.
The speed of the interface is defined in the CONF/DEVICE SETUP menu via the
front panel. The default settings for the relay are 38400/8N1.
Connecting a cable between the PC and the relay creates a virtual com-port. The
default settings for the relay are 38400/8N1. The communication parameter
display on the local display shows the active parameter values for the local port.
It is possible to change the front USB port's bit rate. This setting is visible only on
the relay's local display. The bit rate can be set between 1200 and 187500. This
changes the bit rate of the relay, and the Easergy Pro bit rate has to be set
separately. If the bit rate in the setting tool is incorrect, it takes a longer time to
establish the communication.
NOTE: Use the same bit rate in the relay and the Easergy Pro setting tool.
93) 24–48 (±20%) V dc from serial number xxxx onwards
P3U/en M/H006 351

9.6.4 Connection data
Table 126 - Auxiliary voltage
Type A (standard) Type B (option)
Rated voltage VAUX 48 (-20%) – 230 (+10%) V 24 V dc (-20 %, +50 %)

ac/dc
Note! Polarity
48/110/120/230 V ac
X2:3= positive (+)
48/110/125/220 V dc
X2:4= negative (-)
Continuously: 38.4–253 V
Continuously: 19.2–36 V dc
ac/dc
Type B (option)
Note: Check the available

power supply range from the
device's serial number label.
24–48 V dc (±20%)
Note! Polarity
X2:3= positive (+)
X2:4= negative (-)
Continuously: 19.2–57.6 V
dc
Start-up peak (dc)

25 A with time constant of 1000 µs
110 V (Type A) 15 A with time constant of 500 µs
220 V (Type A) 25 A with time constant of 750 µs
Power consumption
- Normal state94) < 11 W
- All digital outputs activated < 15 W
Fuse UL 489 approved miniature circuit breaker, for example,

Schneider Electric Multi C60 Series, rated 6A
94) Power on, communications, measurements, display, LED’s and SF output active.
Table 127 - Digital inputs technical data
Number of inputs As per the order code
Model: P3U30-xxxxxBxx: 16
Model: P3U20-xxxxxAxx: 10
Model: P3U20-xxxxxG/H/Ixx: 8
Voltage withstand 255 V ac/dc
Nominal operation voltage DI1 – DI16 (as 1: 24–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
per the order code digits)
2: 110–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
3: 220–230 V ac/dc (max. 255 V ac/dc)
352 P3U/en M/H006

Typical switching threshold (as per order 1: 12 V dc

code digits)
2: 75 V dc
3: 155 V dc
NOTE: For trip circuit supervision with

two digital inputs, select a lower
switching threshold (24 V or 110 V).
Current drain < 4 mA (typical approx. 3mA)
Cycle time 10 ms
Activation time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
Reset time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
NOTE: Set the dc/ac mode according to the used voltage in Easergy Pro.
Table 128 - Trip contact, Tx
Number of contacts Model: P3U30-xxxxxBxx: 7
Model: P3U20-xxxxxAxx: 4
Model: P3U20-xxxxxxG/H/Ixx: 7
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA at 24 Vdc
Typical operation time ≤8 ms
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3 s 15 A
Breaking capacity, ac 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, dc (L/R = 40 ms)
at 48 V dc: 1.15 A
at 110 V dc: 0.5 A
at 220 V dc: 0.25 A
Contact material AgNi 90/10
Table 129 - Signal contact, A1 and SF
Number of contacts: 1
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
P3U/en M/H006 353

Breaking capacity, AC 2 000 VA
Minimum making current 100 mA at 24 V ac/dc
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3 s 15 A
Breaking capacity, ac 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, dc (L/R = 40 ms)
at 48 V dc: 1A
at 110 V dc: 0.3 A
at 220 V dc: 0.15 A
Contact material AgNi 0.15
Table 130 - Connection terminal tightening torque
Terminal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
characteris
tics
Pluggable clamp connector
Wire cross 6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

section, mm2 (10) (13 - 14) (13 - 14) (13 - 14) (13 - 14)
(AWG)
Maximum 0.8 0.5–0.6 0.5–0.6 0.5 - 0.6 0.5 - 0.6

wiring screw
(7) (4.4–5.3) (4.4–5.3) (4.4 – 5.3) (4.4 – 5.3)
tightening
torque Nm
(Ib-in)
Maximum 1 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34

connector
(8.5) (3) (3) (3) (3)
retention
tightening
torque Nm
(Ib-in)
Wire type Single strand or stranded with insulated crimp terminal
Pluggable ring lug connector
Ring lug 10.0, M4

width (mm)
and screw
size
354 P3U/en M/H006

Terminal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
characteris
tics
Maximum 2.5
wire cross
(14)
section if
directly
mounted
under screw,
mm2 (AWG)
Maximum 1.5 Nm
wiring screw
(13)
tightening
torgue Nm
(Ib-in)
Maximum 1.4
connector
(12)
retention
screw
tightening
torque Nm
(Ib-in)
Wire type Single strand or stranded with insulated crimp terminal
Table 131 - Serial communication port
Number of physical ports 0–1 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RS-232 (option, IRIG-B included)
RS-485 (option)
Profibus (option, external module)
Glass fibre connection (option, external

module)
Protocols Modbus RTU, master
Modbus RTU, slave
Spabus, slave
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61870-5-101
Profibus DP
DNP 3.0
IRIG-B
P3U/en M/H006 355

Table 132 - Ethernet communication port
Number of ports 0 or 2 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RJ-45 100 Mbps (option)
Protocols IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP 3.0
Ethernet/IP
IEC 61870-5-101
Table 133 - Fiber Ethernet communication port
Number of ports 0 or 2 on rear panel (option)
Connection type LC 100 Mbps
Optical characteristics Operates with 62.5/125 μm and 50/125 μm

multimode fiber
Center Wavelength: 1300 nm typical
Output Optical Power:
• Fiber: 62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 23.0

dBm
• Fiber: 50/125 μm, NA = 0.20 26.0 dBm
Input Optical Power: -31 dBm
Protocols IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP 3.0
Ethernet/IP
IEC 61870-5-101
Table 134 - Measuring circuits
Phase current inputs
Rated phase current 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 1–10

A)
- Current measuring range 0.05–250 A
- Thermal withstand • 20 A (continuously)

• 100 A (for 10 s)
• 500 A (for 1 s)
• 1250 A (for 10 ms)
- Burden 0.075 VA
- Impedance 0.003 Ohm
IN input (5 A)
356 P3U/en M/H006

Rated ground fault overcurrent 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1–

10 A)

• 100 A (for 10 s)
• 500 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.075 VA
IN input (1 A)
Rated ground fault overcurrent 1 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1–

10.0 A)

• 20 A (for 10 s)
• 100 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA
IN input (0.2 A)
Rated ground fault overcurrent 0.2 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1–

10.0 A)
- Thermal withstand • 0.8 A (continuously)

• 4 A (for 10 s)
• 20 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA
Voltage inputs
Rated voltage VRated 100 V (configurable 50–250 V)
- Voltage measuring range95) 0.5–190 V
- Thermal withstand • 250 V (continuously)

• 600 V (for 10 s)
- Burden <0.015 VA (110 V), <0.06 VA (250 V)
P3U/en M/H006 357

Frequency
Rated frequency fN 45–65 Hz (protection operates accurately)
Measuring range 16–95 Hz
< 44Hz / > 66Hz (other protection is not

steady except frequency protection)
95) Note that the measuring range is 0.5-190 V even if the rated voltage is adjusted.
9.6.5 External option modules
9.6.5.1 VSE-001 fiber-optic interface module
DANGER
• This equipment must only be installed or serviced by qualified electrical

personnel.
• Turn off all power supplying this device and the equipment in which it is
installed before working on the device or equipment.
• Connect protective ground before turning on any power supplying this
device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
An external fiber-optic module VSE-001 is used to connect the device to a fiber-

optic loop or a fiber-optic star. There are four different types of serial fiber-optic
modules:
• VSE001PP (Plastic-plastic)
• VSE001GG (Glass-glass)
The modules provide a serial communication link up to 1 km (0.62 miles) with

VSE 001 GG. With a serial-fibre interface module, it is possible to have the
following serial protocols in use:
• None
• IEC-103
• Modbus slave
• SpaBus
The power for the module is taken from RS-232 connector of the Easergy P3U10,
P3U20 and P3U30 or from an external power supply interface. The module is
connected to the RS-232 serial port with a VX082 or VX083 cable.
358 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 184 - VSE-001 module
A
C
VX082 REM
A. VSE-001 C. VX082
B. Communication bus
Module interface to the device
The physical interface of the VSE-001 is a 9-pin D-connector. The signal level is
RS-232.
NOTE: The product manual for VSE-001 can be found on our website.
9.6.5.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module
DANGER

personnel.
device.
An external RS-485 module VSE-002 (VSE002) is used to connect Easergy P3

protection devices to RS-485 bus. With the RS-485 serial interface module, the
following serial protocols can be used:
• None
• IEC-103
• ModbusSlv
• SpaBus
The power for the module is taken from RS-232 connector of the protection
device or from an external power supply interface. The module is connected to
the RS-232 serial port with VX082 or VX083 cable.
P3U/en M/H006 359

Figure 185 - VSE-002 module
A
C
VX082 REM
A. VSE-002 C. VX082
B. Communication bus
The physical interface of the VSE-002 is a 9-pin D-connector. The signal level is
RS-232 and therefore, the interface type for the module has to be selected as
RS-232.
It is possible to connect multible devices in daisychain. “Termination” has to be

selected as on for the last unit in the chain. The same applies when only one unit
is used.
Figure 186 - RS-232 and TTL interface
Termination
ON OFF
73 mm
Interface type
TLL RS-232
20 mm
Table 135 - RS-232 and TTL interface
Pin number TTL mode RS-232 mode
1 - -
2 RXD (in) RXD (in)
3 TXD (out) TXD (out)
4 RTS (in) RTS (in)
360 P3U/en M/H006

Pin number TTL mode RS-232 mode
7 GND GND
9 +8V (in) +8V (in)
9.6.5.3 VPA-3CG Profibus interface module
DANGER
personnel.
device.
Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 can be connected to Profibus DP by using an

external Profibus interface module VPA-3CG (VPA3CG). The device can then be
monitored from the host system. VPA-3CG is attached to the RS-232 connector at
the back of the device with a VX-084 (VX084) cable. With the Profibus interface
module, the following protocols can be used:
• None
• ProfibusDP
The power for the module is taken from an external power supply interface.
Figure 187 - VPA-3CG module
A
C
VX084
VPA3CG
+ -
+ -
+ -
D
B
A. VPA-3CG C. VX084
B. Communication bus D. +12 Vdc power supply
The physical interface of the VPA-3CG Profibus interface module is a 9-pin D-

connector.
P3U/en M/H006 361

Profibus devices are connected in a bus structure. Up to 32 stations (master or

slave) can be connected in one segment. The bus is terminated by an active bus
terminator at the beginning and end of each segments. When more than 32
stations are used, repeaters (line amplifiers) must be used to connect the
individual bus segments.
The maximum cable length depends on the transmission speed and cable type.
The specified cable length can be increased by the use of repeaters. The use of
more than 3 repeaters in a series is not recommended.
A separate product manual for VPA-3CG can be found on our website.
9.6.5.4 VIO 12A RTD and analog input / output modules
VIO 12A I/O modules can be connected to Easergy P3U20 and P3U30 using
RS-485 connection in interface modules. Alternatively VIO 12A I/O modules can
be connected to Easergy P3U20 and P3U30 using RS-232 connection. If RS-232
connection is used a separate VX082 or VX083 connection cable and VSE001 or
VSE002 option module are needed.
A separate product manual for VIO 12A is available.
9.6.6 Block diagrams
The status of the output contacts is shown when the relay is energized but none
of the protection, controlling or self-supervision elements are activated.
362 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 188 - P3U10 5AA A1AAA block diagram
A
X2:1 X2
P3U10- AA A2 AAA
V4
X2:2
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X3
T1 X3:17
6
5
X3:16
X1:1 X1
IA T2 X3:15
X1:2
X1:3 X3:14
IB T3 X3:13
X1:4
3
1
X1:5 X3:12
IC T4 X3:11
X1:6
X3:10
X1:7
IN 5A A1 X3:7
X1:8 X3:9
X1:9 X3:8
IN 1A
X1:10 SF X3:20
X3:19
X3:18
X3:3 DI1 X3
DI
X3:4 DI1
X3:5 DI2
X3:6 DI2
A. Front
NOTE: Connect only one (5 A, 1 A or 0.2 A) ground fault overcurrent input.
DANGER
Connect the device's protective ground to functional ground according to the

connection diagrams presented in this document.
P3U/en M/H006 363

Figure 189 - P3U20 5AA A1ABAA block diagram
A
X2:1
X2
X2:2
V4
B
P3U20-5 AA A2 ABAA
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4 X4:1 1)
X4:2 RS - 485 GND
X1:1 X4:3 2)
X1
6
IA X4:4 RS - 485 +
X1:2
X4:5 RS - 485 -
X1:3 X4:6 3)
IB
X1:4
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3 T1
3
1
X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
X1:10 T3 X3:13
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:4 DI1 X3:10
A1 X3:7
X3:5 DI2
X3:9
X3:6 DI2 X3:8
SF X3:20
X4:7 DI3 DI X4 X3:19
X4:8 DI3 X3:18
X4:9 DI4
X4:10 DI4
X4:11 DI5
X4:12 DI5
X4:13 DI6
X4:14 DI6
X4:15 COM DI
X4:16 DI7
X4:17 DI8
X4:18 COM DI
X4:19 DI9
X4:20 DI10
A. Front 2) + side termination, connect to X4:4

B. Communications 3) - side termination, connect to X4:5
1) Cable shield gnd
DANGER

364 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 190 - P3U20 5AA A1ACAA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
P3U20-5 AA A2 ACAA
X2:2
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4
Eth1
6
X1:1
IA
X1
X1:2 Eth2
X1:3
IB
X1:4
3
1
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3 T1
X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:10
X3:4 DI1
A1 X3:7
X3:5 DI2
X3:9
X3:6 DI2 X3:8
SF X3:20
X4:1 DI3 DI X4 X3:19
X4:2 DI3 X3:18
X4:3 DI4
X4:4 DI4
X4:5 DI5
X4:6 DI5
X4:7 DI6
X4:8 DI6
X4:9 COM DI
X4:10 DI7
X4:11 DI8
X4:12 COM DI
X4:13 DI9
X4:14 DI10
A. Front
DANGER

P3U/en M/H006 365

Figure 191 - P3U20 5AA A1AHAA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
P3U20-5 AA A2 A HAA
X2:2
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4
Eth1
6
X1:1
IA
X1
X1:2 Eth2
X1:3
IB
X1:4
3 I
1
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3 T1
X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:10
X3:4 DI1
A1 X3:7
X3:5 DI2
X3:9
X3:6 DI2 X3:8
SF X3:20
X4:20 DI8 DI X4 X3:19
X4:19 DI7 X3:18
X4:18 DI6
X4:17 COM
X4 T5 X4:12
X4:16 DI5
X4:15 DI4 X4:11
T6 X4:10
X4:14 DI3
X4:13 COM X4:9
T7 X4:8
X4:7
A. Front
DANGER

366 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 192 - P3U20 5AA A1AGAA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
X2:2
P3U20-5 AA A2 AGAA
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4
RS-485
6
X1:1
IA
X1
X1:2
X1:3
IB
X1:4
3
1
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3 T1
X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:10
X3:4 DI1
A1 X3:7
X3:5 DI2
X3:9
X3:6 DI2 X3:8
SF X3:20
X4:14 DI8 DI X4 X3:19
X4:13 DI7 X3:18
X4:12 DI6
X4:11 COM
X4 T5 X4:6
X4:10 DI5
X4:9 DI4 X4:5
T6 X4:4
X4:8 DI3
X4:7 COM X4:3
T7 X4:2
X4:1
A. Front
DANGER

P3U/en M/H006 367

Figure 193 - P3U30 5AA A1BBA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
B
X2:2
P3U30- 5 AA A2 BBA
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4 X4:1 1)
X4:2 RS-485 GND
X4:3 2)
X1
6
X1:1
IA X4:4 RS-485 +
X1:2
X4:5 RS-485 -
X1:3 X4:6 3)
IB
X1:4
3
1
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3 T1
X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X5:20 X5
V1
X5:19 X3:10
A1 X3:7
X5:18
V2 X3:9
X5:17 X3:8
X5:16
V3
X5:15 SF X3:20
X3:19
X3:18
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:4 DI1
X3:5 DI2
X3:6 DI2 X5
T5 X5:14
X5:13
X4:7 DI3 DI X4
X4:8 DI3
T6 X5:12
X4:9 DI4
X5:11
X4:10 DI4
X4:11 DI5 T7 X5:10
X4:12 DI5
X5:9
X4:13 DI6
X4:14 DI6
X4:15 COM DI
X4:16 DI7
X4:17 DI8
X4:18 COM DI
X4:19 DI9
X4:20 DI10
X5:1 COM DI X5
X5:2 DI11
X5:3 DI12
X5:4 DI13
X5:5 COM DI
X5:6 DI14
X5:7 DI15
X5:8 DI16
A. Front 2) + side termination, connect to X4:4

B. Communications 3) - side termination, connect to X4:5
1) Cable shield gnd
DANGER

368 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 194 - P3U30 5AA A1BCA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
X2:2
P3U30- 5 AA A2 BCA
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4
Eth1
X1
6
X1:1
IA
X1:2 Eth2
X1:3
IB
X1:4
3
1
X1:5
IC X3 T1
X1:6 X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X5:20 X5
V1
X5:19 X3:10
A1 X3:7
X5:18
V2 X3:9
X5:17 X3:8
X5:16
V3
X5:15 SF X3:20
X3:19
X3:18
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:4 DI1
X3:5 DI2
X3:6 DI2 X5
T5 X5:14
X5:13
X4:1 DI3 DI X4
X4:2 DI3
T6 X5:12
X4:3 DI4
X5:11
X4:4 DI4
X4:5 DI5 T7 X5:10
X4:6 DI5 X5:9
X4:7 DI6
X4:8 DI6
X4:9 COM DI
X4:10 DI7
X4:11 DI8
X4:12 COM DI
X4:13 DI9
X4:14 DI10
X5:1 COM DI X5
X5:2 DI11
X5:3 DI12
X5:4 DI13
X5:5 COM DI
X5:6 DI14
X5:7 DI15
X5:8 DI16
A. Front
DANGER

P3U/en M/H006 369

Figure 195 - P3U30 5AA A1BHA block diagram
A
X2:1
V4 X2
X2:2
P3U30-5 AA A2 BHA
X2:3 ~
X2:4 = X4
Eth1
X1:1 X1
6
IA
X1:2 Eth2
X1:3
IB
X1:4
X1:5
IC
X1:6 X3
3
1
T1 X3:17
X1:7
IN 5A X3:16
X1:8 T2 X3:15
X1:9
IN 1A X3:14
T3 X3:13
X1:10
X3:12
T4 X3:11
X5:20
V1
X5
X5:19 X3:10
A1 X3:7
X5:18
V2 X3:9
X5:17 X3:8
X5:16
V3
X5:15 SF X3:20
X3:19
X3:18
X3:3 DI1 DI X3
X3:4 DI1
X3:5 DI2
X3:6 DI2 X4
T5 X4:6
X4:5
X4:7 COM DI X4 T6 X4:4

X4:8 DI3
X4:9 DI4 X4:3
X4:10 DI5
T7 X4:2
X4:11 COM DI
X4:1
X4:12 DI6
X4:13 DI7
X4:14 DI8
X5
T8 X5:14
X5:1 COM DI X5 X5:13
X5:2 DI9
X5:3 DI10 T9 X5:12
X5:4 DI11
X5:11
X5:5 COM DI
X5:6 DI12 T10 X5:10
X5:7 DI13
X5:8 DI14 X5:9
A. Front
DANGER

370 P3U/en M/H006

9.6.7 Connection examples
Two-phase current measurement
Figure 196 - Two-phase current measurement
ΦA ΦB ΦC
P3 S _2ph current
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
1) X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) Io 1A
X1:10
1) Positive CT current flow
2) Use either 5 A or 1 A ground fault overcurrent input
Applications and limitations:
• suitable for short-circuit protection only

• to be used in three-wire systems only
• assumption I1 + I2 + I3 = 0. Measurement algorithm is -I2 = I1 + I3
• ground fault overcurrent calculation is not possible
• broken conductor, negative sequence overcurrent and incorrect phase
sequence calculation are not possible
DANGER
• Always connect the polarity of the current transformer (CT) and / or the
voltage transformer (VT) and their secondary ground wiring according to
P3U/en M/H006 371

Three-phase current measurement
Figure 197 - Three-phase current measurement
ΦA ΦB ΦC
P3 S OC with 3ph CT
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
1) X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) Io 1A
X1:10
• all types of three-phase networks

• all current-based protection functions available
• ground fault overcurrent can be calculated by the relay
DANGER
372 P3U/en M/H006

Three-phase current measurement and summation of ground fault

overcurrent
Figure 198 - Three-phase current measurement and summation of ground fault

overcurrent
ΦA ΦB ΦC
P3 S EF _OC with 3ph CT

X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
1) X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) Io 1A
X1:10

• dissimilarity of the CTs results in inaccuracy in the ground fault overcurrent
measurement resulting in limitation in sensitivity
• uneven saturation of the CTs results in inaccuracy in the ground fault
overcurrent measurement resulting in limitation in sensitivity
• advantage: the ground fault overcurrent can be monitored by the disturbance
recorder
DANGER
P3U/en M/H006 373

Ground fault overcurrent calculation from phase currents
Figure 199 - Ground fault overcurrent calculation from phase currents
ΦA ΦB ΦC
P3 S OC with 3ph CT
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
1) X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) Io 1A
X1:10
2) Not in use

• dissimilarity of the CTs results in inaccuracy in the ground fault overcurrent
measurement resulting in limitation in sensitivity
• uneven saturation of the CTs results in inaccuracy in the ground fault
overcurrent measurement resulting in limitation in sensitivity
• disadvantage: the calculated ground fault current cannot be monitored by the
disturbance recorder
DANGER
374 P3U/en M/H006

Ground fault overcurrent by core balance CT
Figure 200 - Ground fault overcurrent by core balance CT
ΦA ΦB ΦC
P3 S EF CORE BALANCE
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
1) X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) Io 1A
X1:10
• preferred ground fault overcurrent measurement in three-phase networks

• good sensitivity
DANGER
P3U/en M/H006 375

Ground fault overcurrent measured from neutral grounding
Figure 201 - Ground fault overcurrent measured from neutral grounding
P3 S EF TR STAR
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
1) Io 1A
ΦA ΦB ΦC N X1:10
1) Use either 5A or 1A ground fault overcurrent input
• used in TN-S network
DANGER
376 P3U/en M/H006

Ground fault overcurrent measurement by sum of phase overcurrent and

ground fault overcurrent
Figure 202 - Ground fault overcurrent measurement by sum of phase overcurrent

and ground fault overcurrent
P3 S Io LV sum
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
Io 1A
ΦA ΦB ΦC N PEN X1:10
• used in TN network
DANGER
P3U/en M/H006 377

Ground fault overcurrent measurement by using core balance CT
Figure 203 - Ground fault overcurrent measurement by using core balance CT
P3 S Io LV core balance
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3 IL2
X1:4
X1:5
IL3
X1:6
X1:7
Io 5A
X1:8
X1:9
1) Io 1A
ΦA ΦB ΦC N PEN X1:10
• used in TT network
DANGER
378 P3U/en M/H006

3LN voltages + 3LN currents + core balance EF
Figure 204 - 3LN voltages + 3LN currents + core balance EF
ΦA
P3U30_3LN_A
ΦB
ΦC
X5:20 X5
U1
X5:19
X5:18
U2
X5:17
X5:16
U3
X5:15
Easergy P3 Standard
X2:1 X2
U4
X2:2
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3
IL2
X1:4
1) X1:5
IL3
X1:6
X1:7
I0 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) I0 1A
X1:10
1) Positive CT current flow, positive energy direction (imported), negative energy direction
(exported)
• applicable to all types of three-phase networks

• offers good sensitivity for EF overcurrent
• neutral displacement voltage (Vo) calculated by the relay
DANGER
P3U/en M/H006 379

3LN voltages + Uo + 3LN currents + core balance EF
Figure 205 - 3LN voltages + Uo + 3LN currents + core balance EF
ΦA
P3U30_3LN+Uo_A
ΦB
ΦC
X2:1 X2
U4
X2:2
X5:20 X5
U1
X5:19
X5:18
Easergy P3 Standard
U2
X5:17
X5:16
U3
X5:15
X1:1
IL1
X1
X1:2
X1:3
IL2
X1:4
1) X1:5
IL3
X1:6
X1:7
I0 5A
X1:8
X1:9
2) I0 1A
X1:10
1) Positive CT current flow, positive energy direction (imported), negative energy direction
(exported)
• applicable to all types of three-phase networks

• offers good sensitivity for EF overcurrent
DANGER
380 P3U/en M/H006

9.7 Voltage system configuration

Multiple channel voltage measurement
The P3U30 model has nine different voltage measurement modes.

Table 136 - Voltage measurement modes for P3U20 and P3U30
Terminal X5 X2
20 19 18 17 16 15 1 2
Voltage channel V1 V2 V3 V4
Mode / Used voltage
P3U30 3LN VA VB VC -
3LN+V0 V0
3LN+LLy LLy VC
3LN+LNy LNy
2LL+V0 VAB VBC V0 -
2LL LLy V0
+V0+LLy
2LL LNy
+V0+LNy
LL VABy VABz
+V0+LLy
+LLz
LN VA VAy VAz
+V0+LNy
+LNz
P3U10 V0 V0
P3U20
VLN VA
VLL VA-B
P3U/en M/H006 381

Figure 206 - 3LN

VA
P3U30_3LN
VB
VC
X5:20
V1
X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
3LN
• Voltages measured by VTs: VA, VB, VC
• Values calculated: VAB, VBC, VCA, V0, V1, V2, V2/V1, f
• Measurements available: All
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 67NI, ANSI 25
DANGER
Figure 207 - 3LN+V0
VA
P3U30_3LN + Uo
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1 X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
3LN+V0
382 P3U/en M/H006

This connection is typically used for feeder and motor protection schemes.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VA, VB, VC, V0

• Values calculated: VAB, VBC, VCA, V1, V2, V2/V1, f
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 25
DANGER
• Always connect the polarity of the current transformer (CT) and the
Figure 208 - 3LN+LLy

VA
P3U30_3LN + LLy
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1
X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
3LN+LLy
• Voltages measured by VTs: VA, VB, VC, VABy
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 67NI
Connection of voltage transformers for synchrocheck application. The other side

of the CB has line-to-line connection for reference voltage.
P3U/en M/H006 383

DANGER
Figure 209 - 3LN+LNy

VA
P3U30_3LN + LNy
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1
X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
3LN+LNy
This connection is typically used for feeder protection scheme where line-to-
neutral voltage is required for synchrocheck application.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VA, VB, VC, VAy

• Protection functions not available: ANSI 67NI
DANGER
384 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 210 - 2LL+V0
VA
P3U30_2LL + Uo
VB
VC
X5:20
V1 X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
2LL+V0
• Voltages measured by VTs: VAB, VBC, V0

• Values calculated: VA, VB, VC, VCA, V1, V2, f
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 25
DANGER
Figure 211 - 2LL+V0+LLy
VA
P3U30_2LL + Uo + LLy
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1 X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
P3U/en M/H006 385

2LL+V0+LLy
Connection of two line-to-line and neutral displacement voltage scheme. Line-to-

line reference voltage is taken from other side of the CB for synchrocheck
scheme.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VAB, VBC, V0, VABy

• Values calculated: VCA, VA, VA, VC, V1, V2, f, fy
• Protection functions not available: -
DANGER
Figure 212 - 2LL+V0+LNy
VA
P3U30_2LL + Uo + LNy
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1
X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
2LL+V0+LNy
Connection of two line-to-line and neutral displacement voltage scheme. The

other side of the CB has phase-to-neutral connection for synchrocheck.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VAB, VBC, V0, VAy

• Values calculated: VCA, VA, VB, VC, V1, V2, f, fy
• Protection functions not available: -
386 P3U/en M/H006

DANGER
Figure 213 - LL+V0+LLy+LLz
VA
P3U30_LL + Uo + LLy + LLz
VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1 X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
LL+V0+LLy+LLz
This scheme has two CBs to be synchronized. The left side of the bus bar has
line-to-line and right side line-to-line connection for synchrocheck's reference
voltages. In the middle system, voltages are measured by phase-to-neutral and
broken delta connection.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VAB, V0, VABy, VABz

• Values calculated: VA, VB, VC, VBC, VCA, f, fy, fz
• Measurements available: -
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 21FL, ANSI 67
DANGER
P3U/en M/H006 387

Figure 214 - LN+V0+LNy+LNz
VA
P3U30_LN + Uo + LNy + LNz

VB
VC
X2:1 X2
V4
X2:2
X5:20
V1 X5
X5:19
X5:18
V2
X5:17
X5:16
V3
X5:15
LN+V0+LNy+LNz
This scheme has two CBs to be synchronized. The left and right sides of the bus
bar have line-to-neutral connections for synchrocheck's reference voltages. In the
middle system, voltages are measured by phase-to-neutral and broken delta
connection.
• Voltages measured by VTs: VA, V0, VAy, VAz

• Values calculated: VAB, VBC, VCA, VB, VC, f, fy, fz
• Measurements available: -
• Protection functions not available: ANSI 21FL, ANSI 67
DANGER
9.8 CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs

Function
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are for direct
ground fault overcurrent measurement. The difference between CSH120 and
CSH200 is the inner diameter.
Because of their low-voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
388 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 215 - CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs
Characteristics
CSH120 CSH200
Inner diameter 120 mm (4.7 in) 200 mm (7.9 in)
Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)
Accuracy ±5% at 20°C (68°F)
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C
(-13°F to +158°F)
Transformation ratio 1/470
Maximum permissible 20 kA - 1 s
current
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Dimensions
Figure 216 - Dimensions
A B
C
G H J D
I K
F E
A. 4 horizontal mounting holes Ø 6 B. 4 vertical mounting holes Ø 6
P3U/en M/H006 389

Dime C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
nsion
s
CSH12 120 164 44 190 80 40 166 65 35

0
(4.75) (6.46) (1.73) (7.48) (3.14) (1.57) (6.54) (2.56) (1.38)
(in)
CSH20 196 256 46 274 120 60 254 104 37

0
(7.72) (10.1) (1.81) (10.8) (4.72) (2.36) (10) (4.09) (1.46)
(in)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all
power is off.
• Only CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs can be used for direct
ground fault overcurrent measurement.
• Install the core balance CTs on insulated cables.
• Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have an
grounded shielding.
Assembly
Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT.
Use non-conductive binding to hold the cables.

Remember to insert the three medium-voltage cable shielding groundng cables
through the core balance CT.
390 P3U/en M/H006

Figure 217 - Assembly on MV cables
CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
Connect the secondary circuit and the cable shielding of the CSH core
balance CTs to ground in the shortest possible manner according to the
connection diagram presented in this document.
Connection
Connection to Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
To ground fault current IN input, on connector X1, terminals 9 and 10 (shielding).
Recommended cable
• Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid

• Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
• Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
• Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
• Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Easergy
P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
• Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and

P3U30.
The maximum resistance of the Easergy P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 connection
wiring must not exceed 4 Ω (i.e. 20 m maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum
for 30.5 mΩ/ft).
P3U/en M/H006 391

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 10 Test and environmental conditions
10 Test and environmental conditions
10.1 Disturbance tests

Table 137 - Disturbance tests
Test Standard & Test class / Test value

level
Emission IEC/EN 60255-26 (ed3)
Conducted Class A / CISPR 22 0.15–30 MHz
Emitted Class A / CISPR 11 30–1000 MHz
Immunity IEC/EN 60255-26 (ed3)
Slow damped oscillatory IEC/EN 61000-4-18 ±2.5kVp CM

wave
IEEE C37.90.1 ±2.5kVp DM
1 MHz
Fast damped oscillatory IEC/EN 61000-4-18 ±2.5kVp CM

wave
3 MHz, 10 MHz and 30 MHz
Static discharge (ESD) IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Level 4 ±8 kV contact
±15 kV air
Emitted HF field IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 80–2700 MHz, 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2 80–1000 MHz, 20 V/m
Fast transients (EFT) IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Level 4 ±4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
IEEE C37.90.1
Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Level 3 ±4 kV, 1.2/50 μs, CM
±2 kV, 1.2/50 μs, DM
Conducted HF field IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Level 3 0.15–80 MHz, 10 Vrms
Power-frequency magnetic IEC/EN 61000-4-8 300 A/m (continuous)

field
1000 A/m 1–3 s
Pulse magnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-9 Level 5 1000 A/m, 1.2/50 μs
392 P3U/en M/H006

10 Test and environmental conditions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

level
ac and dc voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-29, 0% of rated voltage - Criteria

IEC/EN 61000-4-11 A
• ac: ≥ 0.5 cycle
• dc: ≥ 10 ms
40% of rated voltage -

Criteria C
• ac: 10 cycles
• dc: 200 ms
70% of rated voltage -

Criteria C
• ac: 25 cycles
• dc: 500 ms
ac and dc voltage IEC/EN 61000-4-29, 100% interruption - Criteria

interruptions IEC/EN 61000-4-11 C
• ac: 250 cycles
• dc: 5 s
Voltage alternative IEC/EN 61000-4-17 15% of operating voltage

component (dc) / 10 min
10.2 Electrical safety tests

Table 138 - Electrical safety tests

level
Impulse voltage withstand IEC/EN 60255-27, Class III 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J

Communication
Dielectric test IEC/EN 60255-27, Class III 2 kV, 50 Hz
0.5 kV, 50 Hz
Communication
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 60255-27 > 100 MΩ at 500 Vdc using

only electronic/brushless
insulation tester
Protective bonding IEC/EN 60255-27 shall not exceed 0,1 Ω

resistance
Clearance and creepage Design criteria for distances

distance as per IEC 60255-27 Annex
C (pollution degree 2,
overvoltage category 3)
P3U/en M/H006 393


level
Burden IEC 60255-1
Contact performance IEC 60255-1
10.3 Mechanical tests

Table 139 - Mechanical tests

level
Device in operation
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / 1 Gn, 10 Hz – 150 Hz

IEC 60068-2-6, Fc
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 10 Gn / 11 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Method A, 2 G horizontal / 1 G vertical ,

Class II 1–35 Hz
Device de-energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / 2 Gn, 10 Hz – 150 Hz

IEC 60068-2-6, Fc
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 30 Gn / 11 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
Bump IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / 20 Gn / 16 ms

IEC 60068-2-27, Ea
10.4 Environmental tests

Table 140 - Environmental tests

level
Device in operation
Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bd 70°C (158°F)
Temperature test UL 50896) 55°C (131°F)
Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ad -40°C (-40°F)
Damp heat, cyclic EN / IEC 60068-2-30, Db From 25°C (77°F) to 55°C

(131°F)
From 93% RH to 98% RH
Testing duration: 6 days
394 P3U/en M/H006

10 Test and environmental conditions Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

level
Damp heat, static EN / IEC 60068-2-78, Cab 40°C (104°F)
93% RH
Testing duration: 10 days
Change of temperature IEC / EN 60068-2-14, Nb Lower temp -40°C
Upper temp 70°C
5 cycles
Flowing mixed gas corrosion IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25° C (77° F), 75 % RH

test, method 1
21 days 100 ppb H2S, 500
ppb SO2
Flowing mixed gas corrosion IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25° C (77° F), 75 % RH

test, method 4
21 days 10 ppb H2S, 200
ppb NO2, 10 ppb CL2, 200
ppb SO2
Device in storage
Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bb 70°C (158°F)
Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ab -40°C (-40°F)

96) Testcondition: Device operated continuously. All digital inputs and digital outputs activated with 5 s
on, 30 s off duty cycle, carrying maximum rated loads.
10.5 Environmental conditions

Table 141 - Environmental conditions
Condition Value
Ambient temperature, in- -40 – 60°C (-40 –140°F)

service97) 98) 99)
Ambient temperature, storage -40 – 70°C (-40 –158°F)
Relative air humidity < 95%, no condensation allowed
Maximum operating altitude 2000 m (6561.68 ft)

97) The display contrast is affected by ambient temperatures below -25°C (-13°F).
98) Aftera cold start, in temperatures below -30°C (-22°F), allow the relay to stabilize for a few
minutes to achieve the specified accuracy.
99) 55°C Max ambient temperature according to UL 508
P3U/en M/H006 395

10.6 Casing
Table 142 - Casing
Parameter Value
Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP54 Front panel, IP20 rear side 100)
P3Uxx-5 Dimensions (W x H x D) 171 x 176 x 214 mm / 6.73 x 6.93 x 8.43 in
P3Uxx-6 Dimensions (W x H x D) 171 x 176 x 226 mm / 6.73 x 6.93 x 8.90 in
Weight 2.5 kg (5.519 lb)

100) UL508 Environment – flat surface mounting in a type 1 enclosure or equivalent
396 P3U/en M/H006

11 Maintenance Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
11 Maintenance
DANGER
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. For clothing, see applicable local standards.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to ensure that all
power is off.
• Do not open the secondary circuit of a live current transformer.
• Always connect the polarity of the current transformer (CT) and the voltage
transformer (VT) and their secondary ground wiring according to the
The Easergy P3 protection relays and arc flash detection products together with
their extension units, communication accessories, arc flash detection sensors and
cabling, later called “device”, require maintenance in work according to their
specification. Keep a record of the maintenance actions. The maintenance can
include, but is not limited to:
• preventive maintenance
• periodic testing
• hardware cleaning
• system status messages
• spare parts
• self-supervision
11.1 Preventive maintenance

Check the device visually when the switch gear is de-energized. During the
inspection, pay attention to:
• dirty components
• loose wire connections
• damaged wiring
• indicator lights
• other mechanical connections
Perform visual inspection every three (3) years minimum.
Related topics
2.5.6 Testing the LEDs and LCD screen
P3U/en M/H006 397

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 11 Maintenance
11.2 Periodic testing

Test the device periodically according to the end user's safety instructions and
national safety instructions or law. Carry out functional testing every five (5) years
minimum.
Conduct the testing with a secondary injection principle for the protection stages
used in the device and its extension units.
In corrosive or offshore environments, carry out functional testing every three (3)
years. For the testing procedures, see separate testing manuals.
11.3 Hardware cleaning

Special attention must be paid that the device do not become dirty. If cleaning is
required, wipe out dirt from the units.
11.4 System status messages

If the device’s self checking detects an unindented system status, it will in most
cases provide an alarm by activating the service LED and indication status
notification on the LCD screen. If this happens, store the possible message and
contact your local representative for further guidance.
11.5 Spare parts

Use an entire unit as a spare part for the device to be replaced. Always store
spare parts in storage areas that meet the requirements stated in the user
documentation.
11.6 Self-supervision
NOTICE
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
• If the relay is no longer supplied with power or is in permanent fault state,

the protection functions are no longer active and all the Easergy P3 digital
outputs are dropped out.
• Check that the operating mode and SF relay wiring are compatible with the
installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage and

unwanted shutdown of the electrical installation.
Description
The electronic parts and the associated circuitry as well as the program execution
are supervised by means of a separate watchdog circuit. Besides supervising the
device, the watchdog circuit attempts to restart the microcontroller in an
398 P3U/en M/H006

11 Maintenance Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
inoperable situation. If the microcontroller does not restart, the watchdog issues a
self-supervision signal indicating a permanent internal condition.
When the watchdog circuit detects a permanent fault, it always blocks any control
of other digital outputs (except for the self-supervision digital output). In addition,
the internal supply voltages are supervised. Should the auxiliary supply of the
device disappear, an indication is automatically given because the device status
inoperative (SF) digital output functions on a working current principle. This
means that the SF relay is energized, the X3:18–20 contact closed, when the
auxiliary supply is on. The service LED and SF contact are assigned to work
together. The manufacturer recommends that the SF output is hardwired into the
substation's automation system for alarm purposes.
In addition to the dedicated self-supervision function, the protection relay has

several alarm signals that can be connected to outputs through the output matrix.
The alarms include:
• remote communication inactive

• extension I/O communication inactive
• communication Port 1 down
• communication Port 2 down
• selfdiag 1, 2 or 3 alarm
• password open
NOTE: SF output is referenced as "service status output" in the setting tool.
11.6.1 Diagnostics
The device runs self-diagnostic tests for hardware and software in boot sequence
and also performs runtime checking.
Permanent inoperative state
If a permanent inoperative state has been detected, the device releases an SF

relay contact and the service LED is set on. The local panel also displays a
detected fault message. The permanent inoperative state is entered when the
device is not able to handle main functions.
Temporal inoperative state
When the self-diagnostic function detects a temporal inoperative state, a Selfdiag

matrix signal is set and an event (E56) is generated. If the inoperative state was
only temporary, an off event is generated (E57). The self-diagnostic state can be
reset via the front panel.
Diagnostic registers
There are four 16-bit diagnostic registers which are readable through remote
protocols.
P3U/en M/H006 399

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 11 Maintenance
Table 143 - Readable registers through remote communication protocols
Register Bit Code Description
SelfDiag1 0 (LSB) (Reserved) (Reserved)
1 (Reserved) (Reserved)
2 T1 Detected digital
output fault
3 T2
4 T3
5 T4
6 T5
7 T6
8 T7
10 A1
SelfDiag4 0 (LSB) +12V Detected internal

voltage fault
1 ComBuff BUS: detected buffer

error
2 Order Code Detected order code

error
3 Slot card Detected option card

error
The code is displayed in self-diagnostic events and on the diagnostic menu on the
local panel and Easergy Pro.
NOTE: All signals are not necessarily available in every Easergy P3 product.
400 P3U/en M/H006

12 Order codes and accessories Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
12 Order codes and accessories
12.1 Order codes

When ordering, state:
• Order code of the relay
• Quantity
• Accessories (see the order codes in section Accessories)
Figure 218 - P3U10 order code
X1 X1 X2 X5 X4
Easergy P3U10 - A A A A Protection relay
Application
U10 = Feeder & Motor, 4xI, 1xU. 2DI, 5DO
Phase currents & voltage input, X1

5 = 1A/5A & 1V (100/110V), pluggable clamp connector
6 = 1A/5A & 1V (100/110V), pluggable ring lug connector
Ground fault current input,X1

A = 1A/5A
B = 0.2A/1A
Nominal Supply Voltage [V], X2

A = Power A 48-230 V (range: 38.4... 253 Vac/dc)
B = Power B 24-48 V (range: 19.2... 57.6 Vdc) (1
Future option
A = None
DI treshhold voltage (V)

1 = 24 Vdc/ac
2 = 110 Vdc/ac
3 = 220 Vdc/ac
Voltage measurements + I/O, X5

A = None
I/O with comms, X4

A = None
Product version
A = Version 2.1, newest FW
Region
A = English, IEC
B = English, ANSI
1) Always check the power supply range from the device's serial number label.
NOTE: All PCBA cards are conformally coated.
P3U/en M/H006 401

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 12 Order codes and accessories

X1 X1 X2 X5 X4
Easergy P3U20 - A A A Protection relay
Application

5 = 1A/5A (pluggable clamp) & 1U (100/110V)
6 = 1A/5A (pluggable ringlug) & 1U (100/110V)
Earth-fault current input, X1

A = 1A/5A
B = 0.2A/1A

A = Power A 48 - 230 V
B = Power B 24 - 48V (1
Future option
A = None
Nominal DI voltage (voltage withstand)

1 = 24Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
2 = 110 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
3 = 220 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
4 = DI1-2: 24 Vdc/ac, DI3-10: 110 Vdc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)
5 = DI1-2: 24 Vdc/ac, DI3-10: 220 V dc/ac (255 Vdc/ac)

A = None
I/O with comms, X4

B = RS-485 + 8DI
C = 2 x RJ-45 + 8DI
D = 2 x LC + 8DI
E = RJ + 232 + 8DI with IRIG-B
F = LC + 232 + 8DI with IRIG-B
G = RS485 + 6DI + 3DO
H = 2 x RJ45 + 6DI + 3DO
I = 2 x LC + 6DI + 3DO
Product version
B = FW30.108
Region
A = English, IEC
B = English, ANSI
402 P3U/en M/H006

12 Order codes and accessories Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

X1 X1 X2 X5 X4
Easergy P3U30 - A A Protection relay
Application

5 = 1A/5A & 1V (100/110V), pluggable clamp connector X5 = B
6 = 1A/5A & 1V (100/110V), pluggable ring lug connector X5 = B
Ground fault current input,X1

A = 1A/5A
B = 0.2A/1A

A = Power A 48-230 V (range: 38.4... 253 Vac/dc)
B = Power B 24-48 V (range: 19.2... 57.6 Vdc) (1
Future option
A = None
DI treshhold voltage (V)

1 = 24 Vdc/ac
2 = 110 Vdc/ac
3 = 220 Vdc/ac
4 = 24 Vdc/ac for DI -DI2, 110 Vdc/ac for DI3-DI16 (255 Vdc/ac)
5 = 24 Vdc/ac for DI1-DI2, 220 Vdc/ac for DI3-DI16 (255 Vdc/ac)

B = 3V (100/110V) + 6DI + 3DO X1 = 5 or 6
I/O with comms, X4

B = RS-485 + 8DI
C = 2 x RJ-45 + 8DI
D = 2 x LC + 8DI
E = RJ + 232 + 8DI with IRIG-B
F = LC + 232 + 8DI with IRIG-B
G = RS-485 + 6DI + 3DO X1 = 5 or 6
H = 2 x RJ-45 + 6DI + 3DO X1 = 5 or 6
I = 2 x LC + 6DI + 3DO X1 = 5 or 6
Product version
Region
A = English, IEC
B = English, ANSI Slot X1 = 6
12.2 Accessories
Table 144 - Accessories for Easergy P3 Standard
Product reference Description REL code P3U10 P3U20 P3U30
VIO12AASE RTD module, 12pcs RTD inputs, Optical Tx REL52811 X X
VIO12ABSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD inputs, RS485 REL52812 X X
VIO12ACSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD inputs, mA in/out REL52813 X X
VIO12ADSE RTD module, 12pcs RTD inputs, mA in/out REL52814 Y X
VPA3CGSE Profibus interface module REL52815 X X
VSE001-GGSE Fiber optic module (Glass - Glass) REL52816 X X
VSE001-GPSE Fiber optic module (Glass - Plastic) REL52817 X X
VSE001-PGSE Fiber optic module (Plastic - Glass) REL52818 X X
P3U/en M/H006 403

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 12 Order codes and accessories
Product reference Description REL code P3U10 P3U20 P3U30
VSE001-PPSE Fiber optic module (Plastic - Plastic) REL52819 X X
VSE002 RS485 module REL52820 X X
VX052-3 USB programming cable (Easergy Pro) REL52822 X X
VX072 P3x Profibus cable REL52824
VX082 P3U (RS232) - VSE(D9) cable REL52825 X X
VX083 P3U (RS232) - Remote/Ext. (3xD9) cable REL52826 X X
VX084 P3U (RS232) - VPA 3CG cable REL52827 X X
P3UPSC P3U Panel Seal Cover REL52833 X X X
VYX860 Projection mounting frame, P3U, 45 mm REL52834 X X X
P3UWAF Wall mounting kit P3U REL52836 X X X
EMS59572 Voltage adapter - 47… 240 V - RJ45 output EMS59572 X
EMS59573 LPVT hub connector, RJ45 input - RJ45 EMS59573 X

output
CCA770 Screened Ethernet cable between LPVT hub 59660 X

or Voltage adapter and P3 relay, 0.6 m

or Voltage adapter and P3 relay, 2 m

or Voltage adapter and P3 relay, 4 m
VW3A8306RC LPVT hub termination, use this if all LPVT are VW3A8306R X
not present C
404 P3U/en M/H006

13 Firmware revision Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30
13 Firmware revision
Table 145 - Firmware revisions
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.204 • Phase rotation configuration ABC to ACB for voltage and currents
• Communications:
Release date: January 2021
◦ IEC61850 and Modbus: Alarm setting and operations left parameters for
circuit breaker monitoring
◦ Ethernet/IP communication protocol restored back to use
Version: 30.203 • Cybersecurity for the ANSI models to meet California Law 2020: HTTP, FTP
and Telnet removed
Release date: July 2020
• I>>> stage latch function upgrade during the power on-off-on state
• RSTP network reconstruction optimization
• Adjusted time stamps for disturbance recorder and events logs
• Backlight off default timeout changed to 10 min
• Added Modbus registers for alarm setting of CB wear (read) and Operation left
data (read)
• DNP3 updates:
◦ Added function 24 record current time
◦ Added VO and LED status to BI data list
◦ Added the possibility to configure time reference to UTC
Version: 30.202 • LPIT support

◦ for P3U30 and P3F30 models only
Release date: July 2020
◦ The high-speed arc flash current (Arc I>) is not supported in this release.
◦ CT secondary in slot 8 adjustable to 1–10 A
• Modbus
◦ Added PME/PSO support
◦ Voltage measurements descriptions
Version: 30.201 Cybersecurity improvements:

• passwords are stored as salted hash
Release date: January 2020
• password resetting procedure changed
• new user account Administrator added
Version: 30.111 • Improved menu titles for COM ports and Ethernet ports in the Protocol
Configuration menu
Release date: October 2019
• IEC-61850 speed optimizations
• Modbus:
◦ registers to include protection function status
◦ added LED status information
Version: 30.110 • ANSI terminology

• Digital inputs 33–36 added to DNP and IEC 101 protocol
Release date: August 2019
• Phase-wise cumulative breaking current over IEC 61850
• Temperature LN to IEC 61850
• Add VI5-20 and VO7-20 added to IEC 103 protocol mapping
• Ethernet/IP protocol removed
P3U/en M/H006 405

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30 13 Firmware revision
FW revision Changes
Version: 30.109 • Negative sequence voltage 47-1, 47-2, and 47-3(ANSI 47) stages added.
• Maximum number of disturbance records increased from 12 to 24.
Release date: March 2019
Version: 30.108 • Intermittent ground fault (ANSI 67NI) changed:

◦ New start setting "Sensitive/Normal" and VN check for trip added
Release date: December 2018
• CB condition monitoring upgraded with opening counts and opening, closing
and charging times
• Fault locator enhanced to allow multiple line segments.
• COMTRADE files can be read over Modbus.
• Product and vendor data changed to Schneider Electric in EDS file. This
change affects CIP protocols: DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP.
• Pole slip protection (ANSI 78) added for P30G and P3G32.
• New CBFP functions added: "CBFP1" and "CBFP2".
• Restricted ground fault protection (ANSI 64REF) for P3T32 and P3G32.
• Faulty phase detection added for ANSI 67N (I0Dir) stage.
• Ethernet's redundancy protocols are now in separate menus.
Version: 30.106 • The setting "Inv. time coefficient k" in stages 50/51-1, 67N-1, 67N-2, 50N/51N-1,
67N-1, 67N-2, 67N-3 has three decimals instead of two and the minimum value
Release date: 16.5.2018
for the ground fault overcurrent was changed from 0.05 to 0.025.
• Communication protocol updates
Version: 30.104 First release
Release date: 2.10.2017
406 P3U/en M/H006

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison - France
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.
© 2021 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved.
P3U/en M/H006 — 02/2021

P3u en M h006 Ansi Web

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P3u en M h006 Ansi Web

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P3u en M h006 Ansi Web

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Easergy P3

Universal Relays P3U10, P3U20 and P3U30

5.16 Thermal overload (ANSI 49 RMS).............................................................. 158

6 Supporting functions.................................................................. 246

6.17 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74) ...............................................................302

7 Communication and protocols....................................................312

8 Applications and configuration examples...................................325

9.7 Voltage system configuration........................................................................ 381

10 Test and environmental conditions...........................................392

12 Order codes and accessories.................................................. 401

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger”

Electrical equipment must only be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained

No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising

North America regulatory compliance

Certificate number: 20190829-E215590

Issue date: 2019-August-29

• UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment

Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive. Product Specific

Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive. Product

1 About this manual

1.2 Related documents

Easergy P3 Universal Relay P3U Quick P3U/EN QS/xxxx

Easergy Pro Setting and Configuration Tool P3eSetup/EN M/xxxx

RTD and mA Output/Input Modules User P3VIO12A/EN M/A001

Profibus Interface Module User Manual P3VPA3CG/EN M/A001

IEC 61850 configuration instructions P3APS17001EN

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) P3APS17002EN

EtherNet/IP configuration instructions P3APS17003EN

Parallel Redundancy Protocol for Easergy P3APS17004EN

Communication parameter protocol P3TDS17005EN

Easergy P3 protection functions' P3TDS17006EN

IEC103 Interoperability List P3TDS17009EN

DNP 3.0 Device Profile Document P3TDS17010EN

P3 Standard Series facia label instruction P3TDS17011EN

Principles of numerical protection P3INS17019EN

Restricted earth fault protection using an I0 P3APS17016EN

1.3 Abbreviations and terms

AFD Arc flash detection

ANSI American National Standards Institute

bps Bits per second

CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection

CLPU Cold load pickup

Controlling output Heavy duty output rated for the circuit

CPU Central processing unit

cosφ Active power divided by apparent power =

(See power factor PF.)

Negative sign indicates reverse power.

CT primary CTPRI. Nominal primary value of the IL

CT’ primary CT’PRI. Nominal primary value of the I’L

CT secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the IL

CT’ secondary CTSEC. Nominal secondary value of the I’L

Dead band See hysteresis.

Digital output Relay's output contact

DMS Distribution management system

Document file Stores information about the relay settings,

DSR Data set ready

An RS232 signal. Input in front panel port of